Home

- Power Logic

1. Exchanges are initiated by the master and include a request by the master and a function 7 high speed reading of 8 bits reply by the slave Sepam Requests by the master are either addressed to a function 15 writing of n bits given Sepam identified by its number in the first byte of the request frame or function 16 writing of n words addressed to all the Sepam broadcasting function 8 Modbus diagnosis migeter function 11 reading of Modbus event counter function 43 sub function 14 reading of identification MT10204 broadcasting slave slave slave Broadcast commands are necessarily write commands No replies are transmitted by Sepam ms at 9600 bauds This time is given with the following parameters m 9600 bauds format 8 bits odd parity 1 stop bit question broadcasting question m MT10524 request Tr lt 15 ms Tr lt 15 ms reply Synchronizing Exchanges master slave Any character that is received after a silence of more than three characters is treated like a new frame A silence of at least three characters must be left on the line between two frames It is not necessary to have a detailed knowledge of the protocol unless the master is a central computer that requires corresponding p
2. Selection Criteria Measurements land Vi land Vi land Vi Specific protection functions Directional ground Directional ground fault fault and phase overcurrent Applications Substation S40 S41 42 Transformer T40 T42 Motor M41 Generator G40 Sepam Series 40 a modular solution Main Functions Protection m phase overcurrent protection and ground fault protection with adjustable reset time and switching of the active group of settings and zone selective interlocking m ground fault protection insensitive to transformer switching m RMS thermal overload protection that takes into account external operating temperature and ventilation operating rates m directional ground fault protection suitable for all grounding systems effectively ungrounded compensated neutral tuning reactor or neutral to ground impedance low resistance ground high resistance ground or reactance grounded m directional phase overcurrent protection with voltage memory m voltage and frequency protection functions under over Communication Sepam can be connected to a supervision communication network S LAN based on the following communication protocols m Modbus RTU m DNP3 m IEC 60870 5 103 Sepam Series 40 with basic UMI and fixed advanced UMI All data needed for centralized equipment management from a remote monitoring and control system is available via the communication port m reading all measure
3. Measurements x 10 Word Address Access Modbus Function Format Unit Enabled Phase current la x 10 0136 R 3 4 16NS 1A Phase current Ib x 10 0137 R 3 4 16NS 1A Phase current Ic x 10 0138 R 3 4 16NS 1A Residual current Ir Sum x 10 0139 R 3 4 16NS 1A Residual current measured x 10 013A R 3 4 16NS 1A Average phase current Ima x 10 013B R 3 4 16NS 1A Average phase current Imb x 10 013C R 3 4 16NS 1A Average phase current Imc x 10 013D R 3 4 16NS 1A Peak demand phase current IMa x 10 013E R 3 4 16NS 1A Peak demand phase current IMb x 10 013F R 3 4 16NS 1A Peak demand phase current IMc x 10 0140 R 3 4 16NS 1A Phase to phase voltage Vab x 10 0141 R 3 4 16NS 10 V Phase to phase voltage Vbc x 10 0142 R 3 4 16NS 10V Phase to phase voltage Vca x 10 0143 R 3 4 16NS 10 V Phase to neutral voltage Van x 10 0144 R 3 4 16NS 10 V Phase to neutral voltage Vbn x 10 0145 R 3 4 16NS 10V Phase to neutral voltage Ven x 10 0146 R 3 4 16NS 10 V Residual voltage Vr x 10 0147 R 3 4 16NS 10 V Positive sequence voltage V1 x 10 0148 R 3 4 16NS 10 V Negative sequence voltage V2 x 10 0149 R 3 4 16NS 10V Frequency 014A R 3 4 16NS 0 01 Hz Active power P x 100 014B R 3 4 16S 100 kW Reactive power Q x 100 014C R 3 4 16S 100 kvar Apparent power S x 100 014D R 3 4 16S 100 kVA Peak demand active power Pm x 100 014E R 3 4 16S 100 kW Peak demand reactive power Qm x 100 014F R 3 4 16S 100 kvar Power factor cos x 10
4. MES114 Modules Description O M and K 3 removable lockable screw type connectors QD connectors for 4 relay outputs m O11 1 control relay output m 012 to 014 3 annunciation relay outputs M connectors for 4 independent logic inputs 111 to 114 amp connectors for 6 logic inputs m 121 1 independent logic input m 122 to 126 5 common point logic inputs 1 25 pin sub D connector to connect the module to the base unit 2 Voltage selector switch for MES114E and MES114F module inputs to be set to m VDC for DC voltage inputs default setting m VAC for AC voltage inputs 3 Label to be filled in to indicate the chosen parameter setting for MES114E and MES114F input voltages The parameter setting status can be accessed in the Sepam Diagnosis screen of the SFT2841 software tool Parameter setting of the inputs for AC voltage V AC setting blocks the operating time measurement function Assembly 1 Insert the two pins on the MES module into the slots 1 on the base unit 2 Flush mount the module against the base unit to plug it into the connector 2 3 Tighten the mounting screw 3 Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 191 amp Electric DE51685 Installation MES114 MES114E MES114F 192 63230 216 219 B1 MES114 Modules Connection The inputs are potential free and the DC power supply source is external A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC
5. Fiber type Graded index multimode silica Wavelength 820 nm invisible infra red Type of connector ST BFOC bayonet fiber optic connector Fiber Optic Numerical Maximum Minimum Optical Maximum Diameter um Aperture Attenuation Power Available Fiber Length NA dBm km dBm 50 125 0 2 2 7 5 6 2300 ft 700 m 62 5 125 0 275 3 2 9 4 5900 ft 1800 m 100 140 0 3 4 14 9 9200 ft 2800 m 200 HCS 0 37 6 19 2 8500 ft 2600 m 200 63230 216 219 B1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Installation ACE9492 2 wire RS485 Network Interface Function The ACE9492 interface performs two functions m Electrical interface between Sepam and a 2 wire RS485 communication network m Main network cable branching box for the connection of a Sepam with a CCA612 cable PE50029 Characteristics Weight ACE9492 2 wire RS485 network connection interface Assembly Operating temperature Environmental characteristics 0 22 Ib 0 1 kg On symmetrical DIN rail 13 F to 158 F 25 C to 70 C Same characteristics as Sepam base units Standard Distributed power supply Power consumption EIA 2 wire RS485 differential External 12 V DC or 24 V DC 10 16 mA in receiving mode 40 mA maximum in sending mode Number of Maximum Length with Maximum Length with Sepam Units 12 V DC Power Supply 24 V DC Power Supply 5 1000 ft 320 m 3300 ft
6. Lamp Event Front Panel Label LED 1 Tripping of protection 50 51 unit 1 I gt 51 LED 2 Tripping of protection 50 51 unit 2 I gt gt 51 LED 3 Tripping of protection 50N 51N unit 1 lo gt 51N LED 4 Tripping of protection 50N 51N unit 2 lo gt gt 51N LED5 Ext LED 6 LED 7 Circuit breaker open 111 0 off LED 8 Circuit breaker closed 112 lon LED 9 Tripping by circuit breaker control Trip 1 Assignment by default with MES1 14 The default parameter setting may be personalized using the SFT2841 software m the assignment of signal lamps to events is to be defined in the control matrix screen LEDs tab m editing and printing personalized labels are proposed in the Sepam menu 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 113 ectric Control and Monitoring Functions Ein Ed Open fep Ascicaton Qoos Wingow 2 o OSHS ORD or AL ALAS Wr le Oates Oups Indicators Everts MT11186 17 orei r Parenter eating Fam coris en 010002 101827 SFT2841 control matrix Control Matrix The control matrix is used for simple assignment of the logic outputs and signal lamps to information produced by the protection units program logic and logic inputs Each column creates a logic OR between all the lines selected The matrix can also be used to display the alarms connected to the information It guarantees the consistency of the parameter setting with the predefined fun
7. 2300h 2500h B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 BO9 BO8 BO7 BO6 BO5 B04 BOS BO2 BO1 BOO Number of usable bytes Exchange number in the data zone Data zone Reading should always begin with the first word in the address zone any other address triggers an exception reply incorrect address The configuration and data files are read in their entirety in Sepam They are transferred adjacently 63230 216 219 B1 159 amp Electric Modbus Communication 160 63230 216 219 B1 Disturbance Recording If the master requests more exchanges than necessary the exchange number remains unchanged and the number of usable bytes is forced to 0 To guarantee data transfers a response time of about 500 ms between each read operation at 2300h is allowed The first word transmitted is an exchange word The exchange word comprises two fields m the most significant byte contains the exchange number It is initialized to zero after an energizing operation It is incremented by 1 by Sepam each time a transfer takes place successfully When it reaches the value FF it automatically goes back to zero m the least significant byte contains the number of usable bytes in the data zone It is initialized to zero after an energizing operation and must be different from FFh The exchange word may also have the following values m xxyy the number of usable bytes in the data zone yy must be different from FFh m 00
8. A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Only qualified personnel should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device NEVER work alone Before performing visual inspections tests or maintenance of this equipment disconnect all sources of electric power Assume all circuits are live until they have been completely de energized tested and tagged Pay particular attention to the design of the power system Consider all sources of power including the possibility of backfeeding Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off To remove current inputs to the Sepam unit unplug the CCA630 or CCA634 connector without disconnecting the wires from it The CCA630 and CCA634 connectors ensure continuity of the current transformer secondary circuits Before disconnecting the wires connected to the CCA630 or CCA634 connector short circuit the current transformer secondary circuits Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 179 amp Electric Installation MT10490 DE80068 Bridging of terminals Bridging of terminals 1 2 3and9 1 2 and 3 1A 5A Current Transformers Connecting and Assembling the CCA630 Connector 1 NO 0 Open the two side shields for access to the connec
9. Step 1 ground fault message I Ground Fault I l I 4 j Step 2 ground fault message l larl I Protection time delay l l Dead time step 1 1 Dead time step 2 k E Reclaim time tH gt Cleared fault message Example 2 Fault not Cleared 50N 51N unit 1 instantaneous 50N 51N unit 1 T 500 ms Circuit breaker open Recloser ready Remote indication Reclosing in progress Remote indication final trip 2007 Schneider Ground fault Step 1 ground fault message Ground fault Ground fault Step 2 ground fault message I a TEE en Protection time delay Protection I time delay Final trip I message l Dead time step 1 Dead time step 2 Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 83 amp Electric MT10557 MT10558 MT10564 Protection Recloser ANSI Code 79 Example 3 Closing on a Fault l 50N 51N unit 1 l instantaneous l l l Protection time delay 50N 51N unit 1 T 500 ms Ground fault Circuit breaker Final tripping open EEE EEE 2 a message Recloser ready Example 4 No Extension of Dead Time Ground fault l TRIP A Dead time step 1 Dead time step 2 Circuit breaker oOo u EEE AO O open f u Circuit breaker t Recharging time charged Example 5 Extension of Dead Time Ground fault TRIP Maximum addi
10. Accuracy derating according to wiring see Installation of MET1482 module 20 63230 216 219 B1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric MT10180 Metering Ik TRIPta TO Tripping current TRIPla acquisition gt t 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Network Diagnosis Functions Tripping Context Tripping Current Tripping Context Operation This function gives the values of physical units at the time of tripping to enable fault isolation analysis Values available on the advanced UMI are as follows m tripping currents residual currents based on sum of phase currents and measured on Ir input phase to phase voltages residual voltage frequency active power reactive power The SFT2841 software may be used to obtain the following in addition to the values available on the advanced UMI m phase to neutral voltages m negative sequence voltage m positive sequence voltage The values for the last five trips are stored with the date and time of tripping They are saved in the event of a power outage Readout The measurements may be accessed via m advanced UMI display unit by pressing the key m aPC with SFT2841 software m acommunication link Tripping Current Operation This function gives the RMS value of currents at the prospective time of the last trip m TRIPla phase a current m TRIPIb phase b current m TRIPIc phase c current It is based on measuring the funda
11. sf fu ri l I go al I IN single phase Checking Phase Current amp Voltage Input Connection With Single Phase Generator amp Voltages Delivered by Two VTs Procedure 1 Connect the single phase voltage and current generator to the corresponding test terminal boxes using the plugs provided according to the block diagram below Lf Sepam Series 40 voltage test a a terminal box 0 enerator 2 a A 2 Turn the generator on 3 Apply via the test box the voltage delivered at the V_ terminals of the generator set to V3 2 times the rated secondary phase to phase voltage of the VTs V3 V 8 2 between terminals 1 3 of Sepam s voltage inputs 4 Inject the generator current set to the rated secondary current of the CTs 1A or 5A and in phase with the V_ voltage applied generator phase displacement a V_ 1 0 to Sepam s phase a current input via the test box 5 Use the SFT2841 software to check the following m the value indicated for la phase current is approximately equal to the rated primary current of the CT INp m the value indicated for Van phase to neutral voltage is approximately equal to the rated primary phase to neutral voltage of the VT V p V p V3 m the value indicated for the phase displacement pa Van la between the la current and Van voltage is approximately equal to 0 6 Proceed in the same way to check the Ib Vbn pb Vbn Ib
12. 2 At V p in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved dp Electric Metering 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Residual Voltage Vr Positive Sequence Voltage V1 Residual Voltage Operation This function gives the value of the residual voltage Vr Van Vbn Von Vr is measured m by taking the internal sum of the 3 phase voltages m by anwye open delta sometimes referred to as a wye broken delta VT It is based on measuring the fundamental component Readout The measurement may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the O key m aPC with SFT2841 software m acommunication link Characteristics Measurement range 0 04 to 3 V p Unit V or kV Accuracy 1 from 0 5 to 3 V p 2 from 0 05 to 0 5 V_ p 5 from 0 04 to 0 05 V_ p Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1V Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 V np primary rated phase to neutral voltage V P V p V2 Positive Sequence Voltage Operation This function gives the calculated value of the positive sequence voltage V1 Readout The measurement may be accessed via m advanced UMI display unit by pressing the amp key m aPC with SFT2841 software m acommunication link Characteristics Measurement range 0 05 to 1 2 Vinp Unit VorkV Accuracy 2 at Vp Display format 3 significant digits Res
13. Block Diagram v1 time delayed output V1 lt 0 1 Vu pick up signal Vab or Van TET message rotation Characteristics Vsd Set Point Setting 15 to 60 V p Accuracy 2 Pick up drop out ratio 103 2 5 Resolution 1 Time Delay Setting 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 2 or from 25 ms to 35 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic Times Operating time pick up lt 55 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 35 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Protection Remanent Undervoltage ANSI Code 27R Operation This protection is single phase It enables when Vab phase to phase voltage is less than the V s set point The protection includes a definite time delay Block Diagram time delayed output pick up signal Characteristics VLS set point Setting 5 to 100 V p Accuracy 5 or 0 005 V p Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 104 3 Time Delay T Setting 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 0 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic Times Operation time lt 40 ms Overshoot time lt 20 ms Reset time lt 30 ms 1 IN reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 41 ectric DE50459 Protection Directional Active Overpower ANSI Code 32P Operation This f
14. DE50247 DE50248 Timer Hold Delay The function includes an adjustable timer hold delay T1 Directional Ground Fault ANSI Code 67N 67NC time delayed output pick up signal and to zone selective interlocking m definite time timer hold for all the tripping curves Ir gt Isr time delayed output Ir gt Isr pick up signa valua of internal time delay counter mo tripping m IDMT for IEC IEEE and IAC curves value of internal time delay counter amp Electric tripping Ir gt Isr time delayed output Vt Ir gt Isr pick up signal ii Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Protection 1 Inr IN if the sum of the three phase currents is used for the measurement Inr sensor rating if the measurement is taken by a CSH120 or CSH200 zero sequence CT Inr IN of the CT if the measurement is taken bya 1 Aor5A current transformer Inr IN of the CT 10 if the measurement is taken by a 1 A or 5 A current transformer with the sensitivity x 10 option 2 IN reference conditions IEC 60255 6 3 Setting ranges in TMS Time Multiplier Setting mode Inverse SIT and IEC SIT A 0 04 to 4 20 Very inverse VIT and IEC VIT B 0 07 to 8 33 Very inverse LTI and IEC LTI B 0 01 to 0 93 Ext inverse EIT and IEC EIT C 0 13 to 15 47 IEEE moderately inverse 0 42 to 51 86 IEEE very inverse 0 73 to 90 57 IEE
15. RTD 1 Stator 1 Phase 1 T1 RTD 2 Stator 2 Phase 1 T2 RTD 3 Stator 3 Phase 2 T1 RTD 4 Bearing 1 Phase 2 T2 RTD5 Bearing 2 Phase 3 T1 RTD 6 Bearing 3 Phase 3 T2 RTD7 Bearing 4 RTD 8 Ambient temperature Ambient temperature 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 lectric 45 Protection Operation The negative sequence unbalance protection function activates ifthe negative sequence component of phase currents is greater than the operation set point The function is time delayed It can be a definite time or Inverse Definite Minimum Time IDMT according to a standardized curve or specially adapted Schneider curve The three phase currents determine the negative sequence current gt 1 gt 2 gt I2 x lara Ib alc 2x with a e 3 If Sepam is connected to two phase current sensors only the negative sequence current is 2 Life Ic 3 2z witha e 3 Both formulas are equal when there is no zero sequence current ground fault Definite Time Protection Is is the operation set point expressed in Amps and T is the protection operation time delay t MT10228 Definite time protection principle Standardized IDMT Protection IDMT protection operates in accordance with the IEC 60255 3 BS 142 and IEEE C 37112 standards tA MT10551 l2 Is IDMT protection principle The Is setting is the vertical asymptote ofthe curve and T is the operation time
16. interfaces Maximum number of Sepam interfaces with distributed supply 11 bits 1 start 8 data 1 parity 1 stop lt 100 ns 12 V DC or 24 V DC 12 Operating temperature 23 F to 131 F 5 C to 55 C Fast transient bursts 5 ns 60255 22 4 4 kV with capacitive tie breaker in common mode 2 kV with direct tie breaker in common mode 1 kV with direct tie breaker in differential mode 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 60255 22 1 1 kV common mode 0 5 kV differential mode 3 kV common mode 1 kV differential mode 1 MHz damped oscillating wave 1 2 50 us impulse waves 60255 5 63230 216 219 B1 209 amp Electric DE51668 Installation 1 77 45 2 56 65 Male 9 pin sub D connector supplied with the ACE9092 ACE9092 Rx Tx OV RS232 RS485 PhN V V L L l UL tere 31719 5 210 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider ACE9092 RS232 RS485 Converter Description and Dimensions A Terminal block for RS232 link limited to 10 m 33 ft Female 9 pin sub D connector to connect to the 2 wire RS485 network with distributed power supply 1 screw type male 9 pin sub D connector is supplied with the converter Power supply terminal block 1 Distributed power supply voltage selector switch 12 V DC or 24 V DC 2 Protection fuse unlocked by a 1 4 turn
17. 1 V P E S40 Dir Grd O C 1 V P E 41 Dir Ph amp Grd O C I V P E 42 Non Dir 0 C I Dir Grd O C 1 V P E M41 Non Dir O C I Non Dir O C 1 V P E T40 Dir Ph amp Grd O C I V P E T42 Non Dir O C l V P E G40 Volt Freq v Volt Freq dF dt Vv Note Typical Catalog Number for S42 use SP1S42A NOTES 1 IF 2 VT s connect a b c to Sepam Series 40 at E1 E2 the wrong phase sequence will cause Rotation alarm and 47 Neg Seq O V operation Te ER tl i a8 amp BE B6 E5 selected and H CT common toward Load B5 E6 as shown 7 AS i IIe2 A it B3 E2 H AS 7 s2 i i I Bt a 9 ot ae ie Sw SRo SERIO Powerlogio B21 or22 ALL Kanne Re EUER yeaa Test Sw 11 Sepam PowerLogic SER20 CM or PM Tr A B21 or 22 H 2VT s 3VT s L L L L t I g d O D 103 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ies 40 t Breaker Using Seri Ircul Circuit Breaker Contactor Control C Control and Monitoring Functions BREAKER DC CONTROL USING SEPAM SERIES 20 40 CLOSE CIRCUIT TRIP CIRCUIT 9 i FU ra Ec TeS za
18. External tripping 1 External tripping 2 External tripping 3 Open command sent by recloser V_TRIPCB logic equations SSL tripping zone selective interlocking TC 2 remote close command block remote control q Close command sent by recloser V_CLOSECB logic equations Manual closing logic input TC1 remote open command Manual opening logic input breaker closed 1 The close command is only available when the MES114 option is included 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider amp Electric 02 DB Block Closing via NO or NC contacts T 200 ms 0 T 01 Trip via NO or NC contacts D 0110 T 200 ms Close 0 T Command breaker closed Q 63230 216 219 B1 99 Control and Monitoring Functions RESET key acknowledgment TC5 inhibit remote control DE51204 reset external reset TC1 2 received 3 remote control TC2 position an discrepancy MT10190 MT10191 Wiring for undervoltage trip unit 100 63230 216 219 B1 Circuit Breaker Contactor Control ANSI Code 94 69 Latching Acknowledgement The tripping outputs of all protection functions and logic inputs can be latched individually Logic outputs may not be latched The logic outputs set up in pulse mode maintain pulse type operation even when linked to latched data Latched data are saved in the event of a power outage All latched data may be acknowledged locally on th
19. Link via TCP IP Ethernet The Sepam units are connected to an RS485 multidrop network over an Ethernet Modbus TCP IP gateway for example EGX gateway Configuring the Modbus TCP IP Gateway See the setup manual for the gateway used The gateway should be assigned an IP address The configuration parameters for the gateway s RS485 interface must be defined in accordance with the Sepam communication interface configuration m speed 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bauds m character format 8 data bits 1 stop bit parity none even odd Configuring Communication on SFT2841 When configuring a Sepam network on SFT2841 the following communication parameters must be defined m P address IP address of the remote Modbus TCP IP gateway m time out from 100 to 3000 ms A time out of between 800 ms and 1000 ms is sufficient in most installations Communication via the TCP IP gateway may however be slowed down if other applications want Modbus TCP IP access at the same time The time out value should then be increased 2 to 3 seconds m number of retries from 1 to 6 Note 1 SFT2841 uses the Modbus TCP IP communication protocol Although communication is IP based use of SFT2841 is restricted to a local installation network based on an Ethernet network LAN Local Area Network The operation of SFT2841 over a WAN Wide Area Network cannot be guaranteed because of the presence of some routers or firewalls that may reject the Modb
20. O stripped length 0 31 in 8 mm amp Protective ground Screw 1 green yellow wire max length 9 8 ft 3 m 5 terminal and max cross section AWG 12 2 5 mm 207 Functional ground 0 16 in 4 Grounding braid supplied for connection to cubicle i mm ring grounding lug Schneider amp Electric 63230 216 219 B1 207 R S p w a DE52165 Installation 2 wire Power supply RS485 network B B AA V B B A A V V Ring connection 208 Optic star connection Rx Tx _Rx Tx 63230 216 219 B1 Optic star ACE969FO ACE969TP and ACE969FO Multi Protocol Interfaces Connection 2 wire RS485 Communication Ports S LAN or E LAN Connecting RS485 twisted pair S LAN or E LAN to black terminals A and B m Connecting twisted pair for distributed power supply to green terminals V and V m The interfaces are fitted with clamps to hold the network cable and recover shielding at the incoming and outgoing points of the network cable o the network cable must be stripped o the cable shielding must be around and in contact with the clamp o shielding continuity of incoming and outgoing cables is ensured by the electrical continuity of the clamps m All cable clamps are linked by an internal connection to the grounding terminals of the ACE969 interface protective and functional grounding i e the shielding of the RS 485 cables is grounded as well m On the ACE969TP interface th
21. Remote setting enabled No Yes Sepam working language Engish C Local language Incomer leeder Incomer C Feeder Number of CTs Rated peimary current fin Base current Ib Integration period Residual current Rated residual curent Ind Voltage tanstomers Rated pemary voltage Urg Rated secondary voRage Uns VT connection type Residual voRage measurement 8 7 Connected Motor M41 Example of general characteristics screen Operation Be E la xl E CTIA v erg Bor Fa 2A rated CSH120 200 hd R fea o wa EE Meter increment m nd Reactive energy Remote controts en 2401 2002 16 56 38 Mi Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 63230 216 219 B1 amp Electric 217 Use and Commissioning Not Connected to Sepam Mode Sepam Parameter and Protection Setting The parameter and protection setting of a Sepam using SFT2841 consists of preparing the Sepam file containing all the characteristics that are specific to the application This file is then downloaded into Sepam at the time of commissioning CAUTION HAZARD OF UNINTENDED OPERATION m The device must only be configured and set by qualified personnel using the results of the installation protection system study m During commissioning of the installation and after any modification check that the Sepam configuration and protection function settings are consistent
22. The Phase voltage fault and Residual voltage fault information disappears automatically when m the cause of the fault has disappeared and m all measured voltages are present Use of Circuit Breaker Closed Information This information is used to detect the loss of one two or three voltages if it is connected to a logic input If the circuit breaker closed information is not connected to a logic input the detection of VT faults due to the loss of one or more voltages is not determined by the position of the circuit breaker Block Diagram Partial loss of phase voltages DE51254 V2 V2 gt Vs2 circuit breaker closed logic input phase voltage fault and VT fault message Loss of all phase voltages max voltages measured lt 10 ViLp max la Ib Ic lt 10 IN circuit breaker closed logic input phase VT fuse melting logic input logic equation min voltages measured gt 40 ViLp Detection of phase voltage fault g phase voltage fault i Vr calculated by sum residual voltage fault Vr VT fuse melting Vr VT fault message Detection of residual voltage fault 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 31 ectric Metering 32 63230 216 219 B1 Switchgear Diagnosis Functions VT Supervision ANSI Code 60V Consequences of a VT Fault on Protection Functions A Phase voltage fault
23. The address of bit i 0 lt i lt F of address word J is then J x 16 i Example 0C00 bit 0 C000 0C00 bit 7 C007 Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Modbus Communication Data Addresses and Encoding Synchronization Zone The synchronization zone is a table that contains the absolute date and time forthe time tagging function Time messages should be written in a single block containing four words using function 16 write word Messages can be read word by word or by groups of words using function 3 Synchronization Zone Word Address Access Modbus Function Enabled Binary time year 0002 Read write 3 16 Binary time months days 0003 Read 3 Binary time hours minutes 0004 Read 3 Binary time milliseconds 0005 Read 3 See Time Tagging Events chapter for data format Identification Zone The identification zone contains system type information pertaining to the identification of the Sepam equipment Some of the information in the identification zone is also found in the configuration zone at the address 02CCh Identification Zone Word Address Access Modbus Function Format Value Enabled Manufacturer identification 0006 R 3 0100 Equipment identification 0007 R 3 0 Marking equipment type 0008 R 3 Idem 02E2 Modbus version 0009 R 3 Not managed 0 Application version 000A B R 3 0 Sepam check word 000C R 3 Idem 0100 Extens
24. key m Automatically if no keys are activated for more than 5 minutes 230 63230 216 219 B1 Advanced UMI Data Entry Principles Modifying Passwords Only the parameter setting qualification level 2 keys or the SFT2841 allow password modification Passwords are modified in the general settings screen key Loss of Passwords If the factory set passwords have been modified and the latest passwords entered have been irretrievably lost by the user please contact your local after sales service representative Entering Parameters or Settings Principle Applicable to all Sepam Units example of phase overcurrent protection 1 Enter the password 2 Access the corresponding screen by successively pressing the key 3 Move the cursor by pressing the V key for access to the desired field e g curve 4 Press the 4 key to confirm the choice then select the type of curve by pressing the V or A key and confirm by pressing the key 5 Press the v key to reach the following fields up to the apply box Press the lt key to confirm the setting Entering Numerical Values current threshold value 1 Position the cursor on the required field using the P A keys then confirm to go on to the next digit by pressing the J key i u E 2 Select the first digit to be entered and set the value by pressing the AA or a key choice of ___ 0 9 a 3 Press the J key to confirm the choice and go on
25. lt Isr bus line CT or Ircos pr 6r gt Isr choice ZSCT ACE990 74 63230 216 219 B1 sector characteristic angle Or 0 Vr Isr set point Directional Ground Fault ANSI Code 67N 67NC Description This function comprises two groups of settings with two units for each group The mode of switching groups of settings may be determined by parameter setting m by input 113 113 0 group A 113 1 group B m by remote control TC3 TC4 m operation with a single group group A or group B To adapt to all cases of applications and all grounding systems the protection function operates according to three different types of characteristics m type 1 the protection function uses Ir vector projection m type 2 the protection function uses Ir vector magnitude m type 3 the protection function uses Ir vector magnitude according to the Italian ENEL DK5600 specification Type 1 Operation The function determines the projection of the residual current Ir on the characteristic line the position of which is set by the setting of characteristic angle Or in relation to the residual voltage The projection value is compared to the Isr set point This projection method is suitable for radial feeders in resistive effectively ungrounded or compensated neutral systems that are designed to compensate for system capacitance by using a tuned inductor in the neutral This is not a common practice in North America
26. m Equipment identification m Assembly m Connecting inputs current voltage and sensors m Connecting power supply m Checking prior to commissioning 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Precautions Handling Transport and storage Sepam in its Original Packaging Transport Sepam can be shipped to any destination by all usual means of transport without taking any additional precautions Handling Sepam can be handled without any particular care and can even withstand being dropped by a person standing at floor level Storage Sepam can be stored in its original packaging in an appropriate location for several years m Temperature between 25 C and 70 C between 13 F and 158 F m Humidity lt 90 Periodic yearly checking of the environment and the packaging condition is recommended Sepam should be energized as soon as possible once it has been unpacked Sepam Installed in a Cubicle Transport Sepam can be transported by all usual means of transport in the customary conditions used for cubicles Storage conditions should be taken into consideration for a long period of transport Handling Should the Sepam fall out of a cubicle check its condition by visual inspection and energizing Storage Keep the cubicle protection packing for as long as possible Sepam like all electronic units should not be stored in a damp environment for more than a month Sepam shou
27. 140 0 5260 0 4907 0 4591 0 4308 0 3414 0 2785 0 2321 0 1967 0 1691 0 147 0 1291 0 1143 0 1020 0 0916 0 0827 0 0751 0 0685 145 0 5511 0 5136 0 4802 0 4502 0 3561 0 2900 0 2414 0 2045 0 1757 0 1527 0 1340 0 1187 0 1058 0 0950 0 0858 0 0778 0 0710 150 0 5767 0 5370 0 5017 0 4700 0 3709 0 3017 0 2509 0 2124 0 1823 0 1584 0 1390 0 1230 0 1097 0 0984 0 0889 0 0806 0 0735 155 0 6031 0 5610 0 5236 0 4902 0 3860 0 3135 0 2604 0 2203 0 189 0 1641 0 1440 0 1274 0 1136 0 1019 0 0920 0 0834 0 0761 160 0 6302 0 5856 0 5461 0 5108 0 4013 0 3254 0 2701 0 2283 0 1957 0 1699 0 1490 0 1318 0 1174 0 1054 0 0951 0 0863 0 0786 165 0 6580 0 6108 0 5690 0 5319 0 4169 0 3375 0 2798 0 2363 0 2025 0 1757 0 1540 0 1362 0 1213 0 1088 0 0982 0 0891 0 0812 170 0 6866 0 6366 0 5925 0 5534 0 4327 0 3498 0 2897 0 2444 0 2094 0 1815 0 1591 0 1406 0 1253 0 1123 0 1013 0 0919 0 0838 175 0 7161 0 6631 0 6166 0 5754 0 4487 0 3621 0 2996 0 2526 0 2162 0 1874 0 1641 0 1451 0 1292 0 1158 0 1045 0 0947 0 0863 180 0 7464 0 6904 0 6413 0 5978 0 4651 0 3747 0 3096 0 2608 0 2231 0 1933 0 1693 0 1495 0 1331 0 1193 0 1076 0 0976 0 0889 185 0 7777 0 7184 0 6665 0 6208 0 4816 0 3874 0 3197 0 2691 0 2301 0 1993 0 1744 0 1540 0 1371 0 1229 0 1108 0 1004 0 0915 190 0 8100 0 7472 0 6925 0 6444 0 4985 0 4003 0 3300 0 2775 0 2371 0 2052 0 1796 0 1585 0 1411 0 1264 0 1140 0 1033 0 0941 195 0 8434 0 7769 0 7191 0 6685 0 5157 0 4133 0 3403 0 2860 0 2442 0 2113 0 1847 0 1631 0 1451 0 1300 0 1171 0 1062 0 0967 200 0 8780 0
28. 40 308 SFT2841 Sepam Configuration screen Communication configuration I ai 38400 Odd hd Advanced parameters gt gt gt SFT2841 communication configuration window for ACE949 122 63230 216 219 B1 Configuring the Communication Interfaces Access to Configuration Parameters The Sepam communication interfaces are configured using SFT2841 software The configuration parameters can be accessed from the Communication configuration window in SFT2841 To access this window m open the Sepam configuration window in SFT2841 check the box for ACE9xx communication interface E m click f the Communication configuration window appears m select the type of interface used ACE949 ACE959 ACE937 ACE969TP or ACE969FO m select the Modbus communication protocol The configuration parameters will vary depending on the communication interface selected ACE949 ACE959 ACE937 ACE969TP or ACE969FO The table below specifies the parameters to be configured depending on the communication interface chosen Parameters to Configure ACE949 ACE969TP ACE969FO ACE959 ACE937 Physical layer parameters Fiber optic parameters Modbus advanced parameters u E LAN parameters Configuring the Physical Layer of the Modbus Port Asynchronous serial transmission is used with the following character format m startbit m 8 data bits m 1 stop bit m parity according to parameter setting
29. 90 Time Delay T Setting Instantaneous 50 ms lt T lt 300s Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Accuracy lt 3 or 20 ms at 2 IsO Characteristics Times Operation time Pick up lt 40 ms at 2 Isr Instantaneous lt 50 ms at 2 Isr Overshoot time lt 35 ms to 2 Isr Reset time lt 50 ms to 2 Isr 1 The tripping zone Lim 2 Lim 1 must be greater than or equal to 10 2 For Isr 0 the protection is equivalent to the neutral voltage displacement protection ANSI 59N 3 INr k n with n number of zero sequence CT turns and k factor to be determined according to the wiring of the ACE990 0 00578 lt k lt 0 04 Standard Settings for Tripping Zone The settings below are for usual applications in the different grounding systems The shaded boxes represent default settings Angle Lim 1 190 100 100 Angle Lim 2 350 280 280 Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 81 amp Electric Protection Definition Reclaim Time The reclaim time delay is activated by a circuit breaker closing command given by the recloser If no faults are detected before the end of the reclaim time delay the initial fault is considered cleared Otherwise a new reclosing cycle is initiated Safety Time until Recloser Ready After the circuit breaker is manually closed the recloser function is blocked during this time If a fault occurs during this time no reclosing shots are initiated and the circuit breaker rema
30. IEEE MI D VI E El F DT or IDMT IAC I VI El DT or IDMT Is set point 0 1 to 24 IN Definite time Inst 0 05 s to 300 s 0 1 to 2 4 IN IDMT 0 1 s to 12 5 s at 10 Is Timer hold Definite time DT timer hold Inst 0 05 s to 300 s IDMT IDMT reset time 0 5 s to 20 s Characteristic angle 30 45 60 ANSI 67N 67NC Type 1 Directional Ground Fault According to Ir Projection Characteristic angle 45 0 15 30 45 60 90 Isr set point 0 1 to 15 INr Definite time Inst 0 05 s to 300 s Vsr set point 2 to 80 of Vit Memory time Trmem time 0 0 05 s to 300s Vrmem validity set point 0 2 to 80 of Vip ANSI 67N 67NC Type 2 Directional Ground Fault According to Ir Magnitude with Half Plan Tripping Zone Characteristic angle 45 0 15 30 45 60 90 Tripping Time delay Timer Hold Tripping curve Definite time DT SIT LTI VIT EIT UIT DT RI DT CEI SIT A LTI B VIT B EIT C DT or IDMT IEEE MI D VI E El F DT or IDMT IAC I VI El DT or IDMT IsO set point 0 5 to 15 Inr Definite time Inst 0 05 s to 300 s 0 5 to 1 Inr IDMT 0 1 s to 12 5 s at 10 Isr Vs0 set point 2 to 80 of V p Timer hold Definite time DT timer hold Inst 0 05 s to 300 s IDMT IDMT reset time 0 5 s to 20 s ANSI 67N 67NC Type 3 Directional Ground Fault According to Ir Magnitude with Angular Sector Tripping Zone An
31. Isr is the operation set point expressed in Amps and T is the protection operation time delay tA DE50398 Tripping characteristic of protection 67N type 2 Isr Ir IDMT Protection The IDMT protection function operates in accordance with IEC 60255 3 BS 142 and IEEE C 37112 standards DE52321 gt 1 1 2 10 20 Ir Isr The Is setting is the vertical asymptote of the curve and T is the operation time delay for 10 Isr The tripping time for Ir Isr values of less than 1 2 depends on the type of curve chosen Name of Curve Type Standard inverse time SIT 1 2 Very inverse time VIT or LTI 1 2 Extremely inverse time EIT 1 2 Ultra inverse time UIT 1 2 RI curve 1 IEC temps inverse SIT A IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI B IEC extremely inverse time EIT C IEEE moderately inverse IEC D IEEE very inverse IEC E IEEE extremely inverse IEC F IAC inverse 2 4 a a a IAC very inverse IAC extremely inverse 1 The curve equations are given in the section titled IDMT Protection Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 77 ectric DE80151 Protection 23 CSH ZSCT CT ZSCT ACE990 Van Vbn x Ven vv V Q external VT Block Diagram Ir Ir gt Isr a Eos ek 0n S0 bus line r Ircos or Or gt 0 choice Vr Vr gt Vsr 78 63230 216 219 B1
32. RS485 Supplied by ACE Supplied by ACE Supplied by ACE Not supplied by EGX Not supplied by EGX Protocol Modbus IEC 60870 5 103 DNP3 Power Supply DC 24 to 48 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC AC 110 to 220 V AC 110 to 220 VAC 100 to 240 V AC with adapter See details on page 6 209 6 211 6 211 See EGX100 manual See EGX400 manual Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 63230 216 219 B1 199 DE51659 Installation Communication Interface Connection CCA612 Connection Cable Plugging into Sepam cable used to connect a communication interface to a Sepam base unit m Length 9 8 ft 3 m m Fitted with two green RJ45 plugs Sepam Series 20 and Series 40 Sepam Series 80 DE51660 CCA612 ACE959 Sepam Series 20 and Series 40 1 communication port Sepam series 80 2 communication ports Connecting to the Communication Network RS485 medium 1 shielded twisted pair 2 shielded twisted pairs Distributed power supply 1 shielded twisted pair 1 shielded twisted pair Shielding Tinned copper braid coverage gt 65 Characteristic impedance 1202 Gauge AWG 24 Resistance per unit length lt 62 1 Q mi 100 Q km Capacitance between conductors lt 18 3 pF ft 60 pF m Capacitance between lt 30 5 pF ft 100 pF m conductor and shielding Maximum length 4270 ft 1300 m
33. affects the following protection functions m 27 27S 32P 32Q 40 47 51V m 59 only in cases where the protection function is set up for phase to neutral overvoltage when the voltages are measured by two phase VTs Vr VT m 67 A residual voltage fault affects the following protection functions m 59N m 67N 67NC The behavior of the protection functions in the event of a Phase voltage fault or Residual voltage fault is to be set up and the following choices are proposed m for protection functions 27 27S 32P 32Q 40 47 51V 59 and 59N block or no block m for protection function 67 blocking or non directional operation 50 51 m for protection function 67N 67NC block or non directional operation 50N 51N Setting Advice The partial loss of voltages is based on the detection of the presence of negative sequence voltage and the absence of negative sequence current By default m the presence of negative sequence voltage is detected when V2 gt 10 V p Vs2 m the absence of negative sequence current is detected when 12 lt 5 In Is2 m time delay T1 is 1s These default settings ensure the stability of the VT supervision function in the event of short circuits or transient phenomena on the network The Isi set point may be raised for highly unbalanced networks Time delay T2 for the detection of the loss of all voltages must be longer than the time it takes for a short circuit to be cleared by the protection function 50 51
34. attention to the design of the power system Consider all sources of power including the possibility of backfeeding m Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off m Only CSH120 CSH200 and CSH280 zero sequence CTs can be used for direct residual current measurement Other residual current sensors require the use of an intermediate device CSH30 ACE990 or CCA634 m Install the zero sequence CTs on insulated cables m Cables with a rated voltage of more than 1000 V must also have a grounded shielding Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury CAUTION HAZARD OF NON OPERATION Do not connect the secondary circuit of the CSH zero sequence CTs to ground This connection is made in Sepam Failure to follow this instruction can cause Sepam to operate incorrectly 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved CSH120 and CSH200 Zero Sequence CTs Assembly Group the MV cable or cables in the middle of the zero sequence CT Use non conductive binding to hold the cables Remember to insert the three medium voltage cable shielding grounding cables through the zero sequence CT DE51678 E40465 Assembly on MV cables Assembly on mounting plate Connection Connecting to Sepam Series 20 and Series 40 To residual current Ir input on connector A terminals 19 and 18 shielding Connecting to S
35. current set to 5A and in phase with the voltage applied generator phase displacement a V 0 5 Use the SFT2841 software to check the following m the value indicated for the measured Ir zero sequence current is approximately equal to 5A m the value indicated for the measured Vr residual voltage is approximately equal to the rated primary phase to neutral voltage of the VTs V_ p V p V3 m the value indicated for the phase displacement r Vr Ir between the Ir current and Vr voltage is approximatelyequal to 0 6 Turn the generator off Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 243 amp Electric MT11194 MT11195 Use and Commissioning Ee Edt Opeation Sep Asekcaion Qotons Winde 2 ale x o DSHS BL 0R ALT AZTAY Se Chagrow Input ouput and indicat siaha Pemote ndcaon sans Input output and indicator status radeon ds vs ISIN ers E oa In Te e o O O o 0 Faa u u u u is w u w 9 ron Oas w m o ny w a a on iz oF 5 on im ou owe x Eu Tevirg on WIT oreca ator att Meta 1 Parmeter ve Renate corto en 0010002 465240 Input output indicator status screen SET 2041 Sepam 1000 van GE fie Ea Open Sesam scheuen Options Window 2 DSEH8 8L 30m SL HALAL We Dugros ew ouput and indicate status Remote indication states Sepam diagnosis Sapam germal chassctewtics ie 40 Connection window Sensa an Mar ia Aeckesnon yoe Pancia seang enabled Connect
36. gt Is time delayed output MT10527 gt Is pick up signal l l 1 Li li I I E bi l l tripping value of internal time delay l I l at al I l counter I I Characteristics Tripping Curve Setting Definite time IDMT chosen according to list Is Set Point Setting Definite time 0 5 IN lt Is lt 24 IN expressed in Amps IDMT 0 5 IN lt Is lt 2 4 IN expressed in Amps Resolution 1A or 1 digit Accuracy 5 or 0 01 IN Drop out pick up ratio 93 5 5 or gt 1 0 015 IN Is x 100 Time Delay T Operation Time at 10 Isr Setting Definite time inst 50 ms lt T lt 300 IDMT 100 ms lt T lt 12 5 s or TMS Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Accuracy Definite time 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms IDMT class 5 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Timer Hold Delay T1 Definite time timer hold 0 0 05 to 300 s IDMT 0 5 to 20s Characteristic Times Operation time pick up lt 35 ms at 2 Is typically 25 ms Confirmed instantaneous m inst lt 50 ms at 2 Is for Is gt 0 3 IN typically 35 ms m inst lt 70 ms at 2 Is for Is lt 0 3 Inr typically 50 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 50 ms for T1 0 1 IN reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 Setting ranges in TMS Time Multiplier Setting mode Inverse SIT and IECIEC SIT A 0 04 to 4 20 Very inverse VIT and IEC VIT B 0 07 to 8 33 Very inverse LTI and IEC LTI B 0 01 to 0 93 E
37. gt Is time delayed output MT10527 gt Is pick up signal I value of internal time delay counter Characteristics Tripping Curve Setting Confirmation Definite time IDMT chosen according to list on page 59 Setting by undervoltage unit 1 by negative sequence overvoltage none Is Set Point Setting Definite time 0 1 IN lt Is lt 24 IN expressed in Amps IDMT 0 1 IN lt Is lt 2 4 IN expressed in Amps Resolution 1Aor1 digit Accuracy 5 or 0 01 IN Drop out pick up ratio Time Delay T Operation Time at 10 Is 93 5 5 or gt 1 0 015 IN Is x 100 Setting Definite time inst 50 ms lt T lt 300 s IDMT 100 ms lt T lt 12 5 s or TMS Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Accuracy Definite time 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms IDMT Class 5 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Timer Hold Delay T1 Definite time timer hold 0 0 05 to 300 s IDMT 0 5 to 20 s Characteristic Times Operation time Pick up lt 35 ms at 2 Is typically 25 ms Confirmed instantaneous m inst lt 50 ms at 2 Is for Is gt 0 3 IN typically 35 ms E inst lt 70 ms at 2 Is for Is lt 0 3 IN typically 50 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 50 ms for T1 0 1 IN reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 Setting ranges in TMS Time Multiplier Setting mode Inverse SIT and IEC SIT A 0 04 to 4 20 Very inverse VIT and IEC VIT B 0 07 to 8 33 Very inv
38. in zone selective interlocking chain 2 O12 by default On S42 only Trip by zone selective interlocking Trip command sent by the zone selective interlocking function Only when the zone selective interlocking function is used without the circuit breaker control function Cleared fault The recloser function has operated sucessfully Impulse type output Final trip The circuit breaker is definitively open after the reclosing shots Impulse type output Recloser ready The recloser is ready to carry out the shots Recloser in service The recloser is in service Recloser shot 1 Shot 1 in progress Recloser shot 2 Shot 2 in progress Recloser shot 3 Shot 3 in progress Recloser shot 4 Shot 4 in progress Reverse phase rotation The voltages measured are rotating in reverse MET148 1 fault MET148 2 fault Hardware problem on an MET module module 1or 2 or on an RTD Watchdog Logic Inputs Button Logic inputs 111 to 114 Monitoring of Sepam operation According to configuration Always on O4 if used If MES114 module is configured Logic inputs 121 to 126 Equations Button V1 to V10 According to configuration Logical equation editor outputs If MES114 is configured 114 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Control and Monitoring Functions Ein Lat Omsan Sep Apkraten store
39. m Flashing Rx LED Sepam receiving 3 Clamps and recovery of shielding for two network cables incoming and outgoing inner diameter of clamps 0 24 in or 6 mm Fixing stud for network cable ties Jumper for 2 wire RS485 network line end impedance matching with load resistor Re 150 Q to be set to Re if the interface is not at one end of the network default position m Rec if the interface is at one end of the network DE51863 DE51864 a Fiber Optic Communication Port 1 LEDs S LAN Port ACE969FO m Flashing Tx LED Sepam sending 1 m Flashing Rx LED Sepam receiving 8 2 Rx female ST type connector Sepam receiving 3 3 3 Tx female ST type connector Sepam sending Rx Tx on Rx Tx A S LAN E LAN V V A B T S Bi 3 2 206 63230 216 219 B1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric DE52166 Installation a CCA612 ACE969TP and ACE969FO Multi Protocol Interfaces Connection out Supply and Sepam The ACE969 interface connects to connector C on the Sepam base unit using a CCA612 cable length 9 8 ft or 3 m green RJ45 fittings m The ACE969 interface must be supplied with 24 to 250 V DC or 110 to 230 V AC in order to operate A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOC
40. m the master then reads a reply zone to find the required information by means of a reply frame Each function has its own particular reply zone contents The time needed between the request and the reply is linked to Sepam s low priority cycle time and may vary from a few tens to several hundreds of milliseconds m setting zone 1 o read 1E00h 1E7Ch O read request 1E80h o remote setting 1FOOh 1F7Ch m setting zone 2 o read 2000h 207Ch O read request 2080h o remote setting 2100h 217Ch 144 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider Remote Settings Access Request Frame The request is made by the master using a write word operation function 6 or 16 at the address 1E80h or 2080h of a 1 word frame consisting of the following 1E80h 2080h B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 BO9 BO8 BO7 BO6 BOS B04 BOS BO2 BO1 BOO Function code Unit number The content of the address 1E80h 2080h can be read using a Modbus read word operation function 3 The function code field may have the following values m 01h to 99h BCD encoding for protection functions The unit number field is used as follows m for protection functions it indicates the unit involved varying from 1 to N N being the maximum number of relays available in the Sepam m when only one unit of a protection function is available this number field is not controlled Exception Replies In addit
41. pre trig for disturbance recording 36 cycles Protection Functions all protections are off the settings comprise values and choices that are informative and consistent with the general characteristics by default in particular rated current and voltage IN and V p tripping behavior o latching 50 51 50N 51N 50V 51V 67 67N 46 32P 32Q 40 48 51LR 14 27D 38 49T 49RMS o participation in circuit breaker control 50 51 50N 51N 50V 51V 67 67N 46 32P 32Q 40 48 51LR 14 27D 49RMS 38 49T 37 disturbance recording triggering with Control Matrix activation of signal lamps according to front panel markings watchdog on output O4 disturbance recording triggering upon activation of pick up signal 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 231 lectric Use and Commissioning Principles and Methods A DANGER Sepam Commissioning Tests i TM awe ac go HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION The preliminary Sepam commissining tests may be limited to commissioning checks OR ARC FLASH 3 F m Only qualified personnel should m checking compliance with BOMs and hardware installation diagrams and rules commission this equipment Such work during a preliminary general check should be performed only after reading this m checking the compliance of the general settings and protection settings entire set of instructions entered with the setting sheets NEVER work alone m checking c
42. values m apply the generator V voltage set to V3 V s 2 in parallel between terminals 1 3 and 2 3 of Sepam s voltage inputs via the test box m inject an current set to 1A or 5A and in phase opposition with the V_ voltage a V_ 1 180 to Sepam s phase b current input via the test box m obtain Ib INp Von V p V p V3 and ob 0 7 Check the Ic Ven pc Ven Ic values as well m apply the generator V voltage set to V3 V s 2 between terminals 2 3 of Sepam s voltage inputs via the test box m inject a current equal to 1A or 5A and in phase with the V_ voltage a V I 0 to Sepam s phase c current input via the test box m obtain Ic INp Ven V p Viip V3_ and gc 0 8 Turn the generator off 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 239 lectric Use and Commissioning Description Check to be performed when phase currents are measured by LPCT type current sensors Phase Current Measurement by LPCT Sensors m The three LPCT current sensors are connected through an RJ45 plug to the CCA670 connector that is mounted on the rear panel of Sepam identified as B m Connecting only one or two LPCT sensors will cause Sepam to go into the fail safe position m The rated primary current IN measured by the LPCT sensors is entered as a Sepam general setting and configured by microswitches on the CCA670 connector 240 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider Checking
43. 0 0217 0 0193 0 0173 0 0156 0 0100 0 0069 0 0051 0 0039 160 0 0720 0 0661 0 0543 0 0455 0 0386 0 0332 0 0289 0 0253 0 0224 0 0200 0 0179 0 0161 0 0103 0 0071 0 0052 0 0040 165 0 0743 0 0683 0 0561 0 0469 0 0398 0 0343 0 0298 0 0261 0 0231 0 0206 0 0185 0 0166 0 0106 0 0074 0 0054 0 0041 170 0 0766 0 0704 0 0578 0 0484 0 0411 0 0353 0 0307 0 0269 0 0238 0 0212 0 0190 0 0171 0 0109 0 0076 0 0056 0 0043 175 0 0790 0 0726 0 0596 0 0498 0 0423 0 0364 0 0316 0 0277 0 0245 0 0218 0 0196 0 0177 0 0113 0 0078 0 0057 0 0044 180 0 0813 0 0747 0 0613 0 0513 0 0435 0 0374 0 0325 0 0285 0 0252 0 0225 0 0201 0 0182 0 0116 0 0080 0 0059 0 0045 185 0 0837 0 0769 0 0631 0 0528 0 0448 0 0385 0 0334 0 0293 0 0259 0 0231 0 0207 0 0187 0 0119 0 0083 0 0061 0 0046 190 0 0861 0 0790 0 0649 0 0542 0 0460 0 0395 0 0344 0 0301 0 0266 0 0237 0 0213 0 0192 0 0122 0 0085 0 0062 0 0048 195 0 0884 0 0812 0 0666 0 0557 0 0473 0 0406 0 0353 0 0309 0 0274 0 0244 0 0218 0 0197 0 0126 0 0087 0 0064 0 0049 200 0 0908 0 0834 0 0684 0 0572 0 0485 0 0417 0 0362 0 0317 0 0281 0 0250 0 0224 0 0202 0 0129 0 0089 0 0066 0 0050 56 63230 216 219 B1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Protection Thermal Overload ANSI Code 49 RMS Setting Examples Hot Curves IB 1 00 1 05 1 10 1 15 1 20 1 25 1 30 1 35 1 40 1 45 1 50 1 5
44. 0 1 VA approx INr number of turns 0 3 Find the closest value of k in the table opposite to 020166 E4 ES PIERRE oN k 0 01136 0 02000 E3 E4 ACE990 range 1 0 1 VA 4 Check the mininum power required for the zero sequence 0 02632 E2 E3 ACE990 range 1 0 1 VA CT 2 VA zero sequence CT gt 0 1 VA V OK 0 04000 E1 E2 ACE990 range 1 0 2 VA 5 Connect the zero sequence CT secondary to ACE990 input terminals E2 and E4 6 Set Sepam up with 0 05780 E1 E5 ACE990 range 2 2 5 VA INr 0 0136 x 400 4 5 A 0 06757 E2 E5 ACE990 range 2 2 5 VA ana 5 ai i Tbal 0 08850 E1 E4 ACE990 range 2 3 0 VA is value of Inr can be used to monitor current between 0 45 A and 67 5 A 0 09091 E3 E5 ACE990 range 2 3 0 VA 0 11364 E2 E4 ACE990 range 2 3 0 VA Wiring of MV zero sequence CT secondary circuit 0 15873 E1 E3 ACE990 range 2 4 5 VA m MV zero sequence CT S1 output to ACE990 E2 input 0 16667 E4 E5 ACE990 range 2 4 5 VA terminal m MV zero sequence CT S2 output to ACE990 E4 input 9 20000 eb PIE A Senne neue terminal 0 26316 E2 E3 ACE990 range 2 7 5 VA Connecting to Sepam Series 20 and Series 40 To residual current Ir input on connector A terminals 19 and 18 shielding Connecting to Sepam Series 80 m To residual current Ir input on connector terminals 15 and 14 shielding m To residual current l r input on connector E terminals 18 and 17 shielding Recommended Cables m Cable between
45. 0 8449 0 7191 0 6244 0 5504 0 4908 0 4418 185 2 1665 1 4739 1 1394 0 9316 0 7872 0 6802 0 5974 0 5312 0 4772 190 2 7726 1 6946 1 2730 1 0264 0 8602 0 7392 0 6466 0 5733 0 5138 195 4 5643 1 9782 1 4271 1 1312 0 9390 0 8019 0 6985 0 6173 0 5518 200 2 3755 1 6094 1 2483 1 0245 0 8688 0 7531 0 6633 0 5914 IB 1 85 1 90 1 95 2 00 2 20 2 40 2 60 2 80 3 00 3 20 3 40 3 60 3 80 4 00 4 20 4 40 4 60 Es 105 0 0209 0 0193 0 0180 0 0168 0 0131 0 0106 0 0087 0 0073 0 0063 0 0054 0 0047 0 0042 0 0037 0 0033 0 0030 0 0027 0 0025 110 0 0422 0 0391 0 0363 0 0339 0 0264 0 0212 0 0175 0 0147 0 0126 0 0109 0 0095 0 0084 0 0075 0 0067 0 0060 0 0055 0 0050 115 0 0639 0 0592 0 0550 0 0513 0 0398 0 0320 0 0264 0 0222 0 0189 0 0164 0 0143 0 0126 0 0112 0 0101 0 0091 0 0082 0 0075 120 0 0862 0 0797 0 0740 0 0690 0 0535 0 0429 0 0353 0 0297 0 0253 0 0219 0 0191 0 0169 0 0150 0 0134 0 0121 0 0110 0 0100 125 0 1089 0 1007 0 0934 0 0870 0 0673 0 0540 0 0444 0 0372 0 0317 0 0274 0 0240 0 0211 0 0188 0 0168 0 0151 0 0137 0 0125 130 0 1322 0 1221 0 1132 0 1054 0 0813 0 0651 0 0535 0 0449 0 0382 0 0330 0 0288 0 0254 0 0226 0 0202 0 0182 0 0165 0 0150 135 0 1560 0 1440 0 1334 0 1241 0 0956 0 0764 0 0627 0 0525 0 0447 0 0386 0 0337 0 0297 0 0264 0 0236 0 0213 0 0192 0 0175 140 0 1805 0 1664 0 1540 0 1431 0 1100 0 0878 0 0720 0 0603 0 0513 0 0443 0 0386 0 0340 0 0302 0 0270 0 0243 0 0220 0 0200 145 0 2055 0 1892 0 1750 0 1625 0 1246 0 0993 0 0813 0 0681 0 0579 0 0499 0 0435 0 0384 0 0341 0 0305
46. 00 1 Continuation frame flag none for Sepam 4 ProductName Sepam Series 40 00 1 Reserved 5 ModelName Application name n 1 Number of objects according to read type M41 Motor Obj1 1 Number of first object 6 UserAppName Sepam marking Ig1 1 Length first object txt Ig1 ASCII string of first object objn 1 Number n object Ign 1 Length n object txtn Ign ASCII string of n object CRC16 2 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Exception Frame If an error occurs during request processing a special exception frame is sent Field Size bytes Slave number 1 171 ABh 1 Generic access exception 2Bh 80h 14 OEh 1 Read device identification 01 or 03 1 Type of error CRC16 2 Schneider amp Electric 63230 216 219 B1 161 162 63230 216 219 B1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Installation 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Contents Safety Instructions Precautions Base Unit Voltage Transformers 1A 5A Current Transformers LPCT Type Current Sensors CSH120 and CSH200 Zero Sequence CTs CSH30 Interposing Ring CT ACE990 Zero Sequence CT Interface MES114 Modules Optional Remote Modules MET1482 Temperature Sensor Module MSA141 Analog Output Module DSM303 Remote Advanced UMI Module Communication Accessories Selection Guide Communication Interface Connection ACE9492 2 wire RS485 Network Interface ACE959 4 wire RS485
47. 010B Logic input status bit address 10B0 to 10BF Bit F E D C B A 9 8 TA 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Inputs 126 125 124 123 122 121 114 113 112 111 Address word 010C Logic equation bit status bit address 10C0 to 10CF Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Equation V8 V7 V6 V5 V4 V3 V2 V1 Bit F E D C B A 9 8 Equation V_FLAGREC V_INHIBCLOSE V_CLOSECB V_TRIPCB V10 v9 Address word 010D Logic output status bit address 10D0 to 10DF Bit F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Output 014 013 012 011 04 03 02 01 Address word 010E LED status bit address 10E0 a 10EF Bit F E D Cc B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LED LD L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1 LD red LED indicating Sepam unavailable 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider 128 amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Modbus Communication Data Addresses and Encoding Measurement Zone x 1 Measurements x 1 Word Address Access Modbus Function Format Unit Enabled Phase current la x 1 0113 R 3 4 16NS 0 1A Phase current Ib x 1 0114 R 3 4 16NS 0 1A Phase current Ic x 1 0115 R 3 4 16NS 0 1A Residual current Ir Sum x 1 0116 R 3 4 16NS 0 1A Residual current measured x 1 0117 R 3 4 16NS 0 1A Average phase current Ima x 1 0118 R 3 4 16NS 0 1A Average phase current Imb x 1 0119 R 3 4 16NS 0 1A Average phase current Imc x 1 011A R 3 4 16NS 0 1 A Peak demand phase curren
48. 1 group B or by forcing the use of the group Operation The phase overcurrent protection function is three pole It picks up if one two or three of the phase currents reach the operation set point The alarm connected to protection function operation indicates the faulty phase or phases It is time delayed The time delay may be definite time DT or Inverse Definite Minimum Time IDMT according to the curves opposite Confirmation The phase overcurrent protection function includes a selectable confirmation component The output is confirmed as follows m by phase to phase undervoltage protection unit 1 m by negative sequence overvoltage protection m no confirmation Definite Time Protection Is is the operation set point expressed in Amps and T is the protection operation time delay gt a Definite time protection principle IDMT protection In addition to ANSI standards IDMT protection operates in accordance with IEC 60255 3 BS 142 and IEEE C 37112 standards IDMT protection principle 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Phase Overcurrent ANSI Code 50 51 The Is setting is the vertical asymptote of the curve and T is the operation time delay for 10 Is The tripping time for I Is values of less than 1 2 depends on the type of curve chosen Name of Curve Standard inverse time SIT Type 1 2 Very inverse time VIT or LTI 1 2 Extremely inverse time EIT 1
49. 1000 m 10 590 ft 180 m 2500 ft 750 m 20 520 ft 160 m 1500 ft 450 m 25 410 ft 125 m 1200 ft 375 m Description and Dimensions A and B Terminal blocks for network cable RJ45 socket to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cable Grounding terminal 1 2 8 in 70 mm with CCA612 cable connected 1 Link activity LED flashes when communication is active sending or receiving in progress 2 Jumper for RS485 network line end impedance matching with load resistor F ACE9492 Re 150 Q to be set to 2 Power suppl z 4 ee S RS 485 1207 SRP m N if the module is not at one end of the network default position g network 24 V DC uF if the module is at one end of the network BIB AIA V 3 Network cable clamps inner diameter of clamp 0 24 in or 6 mm Connection m Connection of network cable to screw type terminal blocks A and m Connection of the grounding terminal by tinned copper braid with cross section gt AWG 10 6 mm or cable with cross section gt AWG 12 2 5 mm and length lt 7 9 in 200 mm fitted with a 0 16 in 4 mm ring lug Check the tightness maximum tightening torque 19 5 Ib in or 2 2 Nm m The interfaces are fitted with clamps to hold the network cable and recover shielding at the incoming and outgoing points of the network cable o the network cable must be stripped o the cable shielding braid must be around and in contact
50. 124448 5 o 7 Dis 12347 2 4 yo S z 122 lt 6 2 icles 4 R I ES 1 5 o 3 Dn Lalo oli o o 2 2 o of Dm4 a gZ a 170 63230 216 219 B1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric DE51131 Installation Base Unit Connection Connection of the Base Unit The Sepam connections are made to the removable connectors located on the rear panel Allthe connectors are screw lockable LOSS OF PROTECTION OR RISK OF HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH NUISANCE TRIPPING m Only qualified personnel should install this equipment Such work If the Sepam is no longer supplied with power should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions or is in fail safe position the protection functions m NEVER work alone are no longer active and all the Sepam output m Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside relays are dropped out Check that this operating it Consider all sources of power including the possibility of mode and the watchdog relay wiring are backfeeding compatible with your installation m Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all Failure to follow this instruction can result in power is off equipment damage and unwanted shutdown m Start by connecting the device to the protective ground and to the of the electrical installation functional ground m Screw tight all terminals even thos
51. 225 226 228 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 236 238 238 240 242 244 245 246 248 213 Use and Commissioning 214 63230 216 219 B1 User Machine Interfaces Sepam User Machine Interfaces Two different levels of user machine interface UMI are offered on the front panel of Sepam m Basic UMI with LEDs for installations operated via a remote system with no need for local operation m Advanced UMI with keypad and graphic LCD display giving access to all the information necessary for local operation and Sepam parameter setting SFT2841 Setting and Operating Software The UMI on the front panel of Sepam can be completed by the SFT2841 PC software tool which can be used for all Sepam parameter setting local operation and customization functions The SFT2841 setting and operating software is supplied on CD ROM along with the SFT2826 program for recovering disturbance recording files the interactive introduction to the Sepam range and all the Sepam documentation in PDF format The CCA783 PC connecting cable comes with SFT2841KIT connects the PC to the port on the Sepam front panel to provide point to point connection between Sepam and the SFT2841 software PE50336 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved dp Electric Use and Commissioning 2 E SFT2841 PE50426 EEE English US Welcome to SFT2841 your Sepam configuration software
52. 3 LEDs m ON OFF on if ACE9092 is energized m Tx on if RS232 sending by ACE9092 is active m Rx on if RS232 receiving by ACE9092 is active 4 SW1 parameter setting of 2 wire RS485 network polarization and line impedance matching resistors Function swi 1 SW1 2 SW1 3 Polarization at 0 V via Rp 470 Q ON Polarization at 5 V via Rp 470 Q ON 2 wire RS 485 network impedance ON matching by 150 Q resistor 5 SW2 parameter setting of asynchronous data transmission rate and format same parameters as for RS232 link and 2 wire RS485 network Rate baud SW2 1 SW2 2 SW2 3 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 lolo olo 1 oo 0 0 38400 Format Sw2 4 SW2 5 With parity check 0 Without parity check 1 1 stop bit compulsory for Sepam 0 2 stop bits 1 Converter Configuration when Delivered m 12 V DC distributed power supply m 11 bit format with parity check m 2 wire RS485 network polarization and impedance matching resistors activated Connection RS232 link m To AWG 12 2 5 mm screw type terminal block a m Maximum length 33 ft 10 m m Rx Tx RS232 receiving sending by ACE9092 m OV Rx Tx common do not ground 2 wire RS485 link with distributed power supply m To connector female 9 pin sub D m 2 wire RS485 signals L L m Distributed power supply V 12 V DC or 24 V DC V 0 V Power supply m To AWG 12 2 5 mm screw type terminal block
53. 3 significant digits Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Refresh interval 1 second typical Starting Overload Current Measurement range 1 2 IB to 24 IN Unit Aor kA Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 0 1 Aor 1 digit Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 Or 65 5 kA Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 27 amp Electric Metering Machine Operation Assistance Functions Number of Starts Before Blocking Start Block Time Delay Number of Starts before Blocking Operation The number of starts allowed before inhbition is calculated by the number of starts protection function The number of starts depends on the thermal state of the motor Readout The measurements can be accessed via m advanced UMI display unit by pressing the key m aPC with SFT2841 software m acommunication link Resetting to Zero The number of starts counters can be reset to zero after entering a password as follows oa m onthe advanced UMI display unit by pressing the key m ona PC with SFT2841 software Characteristics Measurement range 0 to 60 Unit none Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1 Refresh interval 1 second typical Block Start Time Delay Operation The time delay is calculated by the number of starts protection function If the number of starts protection function indicates that starting is blocked the time given represents the waiting time before starting is allowed Readout The number of starts and
54. 4 m cables m Two modules for each Sepam Series 40 or Series 80 base unit to be connected by CCA770 0 6 or 2 ft CCA772 6 6 ft or 2 m or CCA774 13 1 ft or 4 m cables The temperature measurement as in a transformer or motor winding is used by the following protection functions m Thermal overload to take ambient temperature into account m Temperature monitoring Characteristics Weight Assembly Operating temperature Environmental characteristics 0 441 Ib 0 2 kg On symmetrical DIN rail 13 F to 158 F 25 C to 70 C Identical to Sepam base units Isolation from ground Current injected in RTD 4mA Description and Dimensions A Terminal block for RTDs 1 to 4 B Terminal block for RTDs 5 to 8 RJ45 connector to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cable RJ45 connector to link up the next remote module with a CCA77x cable according to application Grounding grounding terminal 1 Jumper for impedance matching with load resistor Rc to be set to m Be if the module is not the last interlinked module default position m Rec if the module is the last interlinked module 2 Jumper used to select module number to be set to m MET1 First MET1482 module to measure temperatures T1 to T8 default position m MET2 Second MET1482 module to measure temperatures T9 to T16 for Sepam Series 40 and Series 80 only Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Righ
55. 65 Protection 38 49T module 1 alarm set point sensor 1 E E E 66 Protection 38 49T module 1 tripping set point sensor 1 E E 8 E 67 Protection 38 49T module 1 alarm set point sensor 2 E E 8 E 68 Protection 38 49T module 1 tripping set point sensor 2 E E 8 E 69 Protection 38 49T module 1 alarm set point sensor 3 E E 8 E 70 Protection 38 49T module 1 tripping set point sensor 3 E E 8 E 71 Protection 38 49T module 1 alarm set point sensor 4 E E 8 E 72 Protection 38 49T module 1 tripping set point sensor 4 E E 8 E 73 Protection 38 49T module 1 alarm set point sensor 5 E E E 74 Protection 38 49T module 1 tripping set point sensor 5 E E 8 E 75 Protection 38 49T module 1 alarm set point sensor 6 E E 8 E 76 Protection 38 49T module 1 tripping set point sensor 6 E E 8 E 77 Protection 38 49T module 1 alarm set point sensor 7 E E 8 E 78 Protection 38 49T module 1 tripping set point sensor 7 E E 8 E 79 Protection 38 49T module 1 alarm set point sensor 8 E E 8 E 80 Protection 38 49T module 1 tripping set point sensor 8 E E 8 E Address Word 0106 TS81 to TS96 Bit Address 1060 to 106F TS Application S40 S41 S42 T40 T42 M41 G40 81 Protection 38 49T module 2 alarm set point sensor 1 E E 8 E 82 Protection 38 49T module 2 tripping set point sensor 1 E E 8 E 83 Protection 38 49T module 2 alarm set point sensor 2 E E 8 E 84 Protection 38 49T module 2 tripping set point sensor 2 E E E E 85 Protection 38 49T module 2 alarm set point sensor 3 E E E E 86 Protection 38 49T
56. 8075 0 7465 0 6931 0 5331 0 4265 0 3508 0 2945 0 2513 0 2173 0 1900 0 1676 0 1491 0 1335 0 1203 0 1090 0 0993 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 55 amp Electric Protection Thermal Overload ANSI Code 49 RMS Setting Examples Cold Curves for Es0 0 VB 4 80 5 00 5 50 6 00 6 50 7 00 7 50 8 00 8 50 9 00 9 50 10 00 12 50 15 00 17 50 20 00 Es 50 0 0219 0 0202 0 0167 0 0140 0 0119 0 0103 0 0089 0 0078 0 0069 0 0062 0 0056 0 0050 0 0032 0 0022 0 0016 0 0013 55 0 0242 0 0222 0 0183 0 0154 0 0131 0 0113 0 0098 0 0086 0 0076 0 0068 0 0061 0 0055 0 0035 0 0024 0 0018 0 0014 60 0 0264 0 0243 0 0200 0 0168 0 0143 0 0123 0 0107 0 0094 0 0083 0 0074 0 0067 0 0060 0 0038 0 0027 0 0020 0 0015 65 0 0286 0 0263 0 0217 0 0182 0 0155 0 0134 0 0116 0 0102 0 0090 0 0081 0 0072 0 0065 0 0042 0 0029 0 0021 0 0016 70 0 0309 0 0284 0 0234 0 0196 0 0167 0 0144 0 0125 0 0110 0 0097 0 0087 0 0078 0 0070 0 0045 0 0031 0 0023 0 0018 75 0 0331 0 0305 0 0251 0 0211 0 0179 0 0154 0 0134 0 0118 0 0104 0 0093 0 0083 0 0075 0 0048 0 0033 0 0025 0 0019 80 0 0353 0 0325 0 0268 0 0225 0 0191 0 0165 0 0143 0 0126 0 0111 0 0099 0 0089 0 0080 0 0051 0 0036 0 0026 0 0020 85 0 0376 0 0346 0 0285 0 0239 0 0203 0 0175 0 0152 0 0134 0 0118 0 0105 0 0095 0 0085 0 0055 0 0038 0 0028 0 0021 90 0 0398 0 0367 0 0302 0 0253 0 0215 0 0185 0 0161 0 0142 0 0125 0 0112 0 0100 0 0090 0 0058 0 0040 0 0029 0 0023 95 0 0421 0 0387 0 031
57. CT 1A 2 turns CT 5A 4 turns 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 187 ectric PE50037 Installation ACE990 Zero Sequence CT Interface Function The ACE990 is used to adapt measurements between an MV zero sequence CT with a ratio of 1 n 50 lt n lt 1500 and the Sepam residual current input Characteristics Weight 1 41 Ib 0 64 kg Assembly Mounted on symmetrical DIN rail Amplitude accuracy 1 Phase accuracy lt 2 Maximum permissible current 20kA 15s on the primary winding of an MV zero sequence CT with a ratio of 1 50 that does not saturate ACE990 zero sequence CT interface Operating temperature 23 F to 131 F 5 C to 55 C Storage temperature 13 F to 158 F 25 C to 70 C Description and Dimensions ACE990 input terminal block for connection of the zero sequence CT ACE990 output terminal block for connection of the Sepam residual current E1 E2E3E4E5 1 DE80040 ao S1S2 m 188 63230 216 219 B1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric DE51682 Installation ACE990 Zero Sequence CT Interface Connection Connecting Zero Sequence CT ACE990 Only one zero sequence CT can be connected to the ACE990 interface The secondary circuit of the MV zero sequence CT is connected to 2 of the 5 ACE990 interface input terminals To define the 2 input terminals it is necessary to kno
58. CT 2A 5 Aor 20 A rating 1 A 5 ACT 1 A to 6250 A Inr IN 1 A 5 ACT 0 1 A to 625 A INr IN 10 Sensitivity x 10 Zero sequence CT ACE990 the zero According to current monitored and use sequence CT ratio of ACE990 1 n must be such that 50 lt n lt 1500 VLP Rated primary phase to phase voltage 220 V to 250 kV V_ P rated primary phase to neutral voltage Viinp Viinp v3 Vs Rated secondary phase to phase voltage 3 VTs Van Vbn Ven 100 110 115 120 200 230 V 2 VTs Vab Vbc 100 110 115 120 V 1 VT Vab 100 110 115 120 V Vsr Secondary zero sequence voltage for primary zero V ns 3 or V ns V3 sequence voltage V np V3 Rated frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz Integration period for demand current and peak demand current and power 5 10 15 30 60 mn Pulse type accumulated energy meter Increments active energy 0 1 kW h to 5 MWh Increments reactive energy 0 1 kVAR to 5 MVARh 1 IN values for LPCT in Amps 25 50 100 125 133 200 250 320 400 500 630 666 1000 1600 2000 3150 2 Inr should be thought of as a relay input port for ground fault protection This port can accept residually connected phase ct s and therefore measure positive negative and zero sequence components This port can also accept a zero sequence CT which measures only true zero sequence no positive or negative sequence So the port name Inr is just that a port name What kind of current positive negative
59. Delay T Setting 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic Times Operation time pick up lt 55 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 55 ms 1 IN reference conditions IEC 60255 6 48 63230 216 219 B1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric MT10867 MT10869 MT10868 DE50561 Protection 0 118 excessive ST starting time locked i rotor Li 0 118 gt excessive ne ti C CS starting time locked n rotor me o O Case of excessive starting time excessive starting ine Case of locked rotor 0 1 lB excessive starting time m locked rotor output EEE H rotor rotation anaa Case of starting locked rotor 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Excessive Starting Time Locked Rotor ANSI Code 48 51LR 14 Operation This function is three phase 1 Excessive starting time ST During start sequence the protection enables when one of the three phase currents is greater than the set point Is for a period of time that is longer than the starting time delay ST normal starting time 2 Locked Rotor LT At the normal operating rate after starting the protection enables when one of the three phase currents is greater than the set point Is for a period of time that is longer than the LT time delay of the definite time type 3 If t
60. Drop out pick up ratio 93 5 5 Min return variance 0 004 SN Time Delay T Setting 100 ms to 300 s Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Accuracy 2 or from 10 ms to 35 ms Characteristic Times Operation time lt 80 ms Overshoot time lt 90 ms Reset time lt 80 ms 1 SN V3 V p IN 2 IN reference conditions IEC 60255 6 42 63230 216 219 B1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric MT11167 Protection Operating zone 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved overpower reverse power Directional Reactive Overpower ANSI Code 32Q 40 Operation This protection function detects field loss on synchronous machines generators or motors connected to the network The machine undergoes additional temperature build up which may damage it The directional reactive overpower function enables if the reactive power flowing in one direction or the other supplied or absorbed is greater than the Qs set point It includes a definite time delay T and is based on the two wattmeter method The function enables if the condition Q gt 3 1 P is met This condition provides a high level of sensitivity and high stability in the event of short circuits The power sign is determined by one of the following parameters m for the feeder circuit O power exported by the bus is positive o power supplied to the bus is negative MT11183 lt a gt 26 ne ro 5 m forthe main circuit o p
61. E E E 8 E 108 Control fault E E E E E E E 109 Disturbance recording blocked E E E E E 8 E 110 Thermal protection blocked E E E E E 8 E 111 MET148 1 module sensor fault E E E 112 MET148 2 module sensor fault E E E E Address Word 0108 TS113 to TS128 Bit Address 1080 to 108F TS Application S40 S41 S42 T40 T42 M41 G40 113 Thermistor tripping E E E E E E E 114 Thermistor alarm E E E E E 8 E 115 External tripping 1 E E E E 8 E E 116 External tripping 2 E E E E E E E 117 External tripping 3 E E E E E 8 3 118 Buchholz tripping E E 119 Thermostat tripping E E 120 Pressure tripping E E 121 Buchholz alarm E E 122 Thermostat alarm E E 123 Pressure alarm E E 124 SF6 alarm E E E E E 8 3 125 Recloser ready E E E 126 Inductive E E E E 5 127 Capacitive E E E E E 8 E 128 Phase inverse rotation E E E Address Word 0109 TS129 to TS144 Bit Address 1090 to 109F TS Application S40 S41 S42 T40 T42 M41 G40 129 Send blocking input 2 130 Reserved 131 Reserved 132 Reserved 133 Reserved 134 Reserved 135 Reserved 136 Reserved 137 Reserved 138 Reserved 139 Reserved 140 Reserved 141 Reserved 142 Reserved 143 Reserved 144 Reserved 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 137 ectric Modbus Communication Data Addresses and Encoding Address Word 00F0 TC1 to TC16 Bit Address OF00 to OFOF TC Application S40 S41 S42 T40 T42 M41 G
62. E E E E 8 E 26 Protection 81H unit 1 E E E E E E E 27 Protection 81H unit 2 E E E E E 8 E 28 Protection 81L unit 1 E E E E E E E 29 Protection 81L unit 2 E E E E E E E 30 Protection 81L unit 3 E E E E E 8 E 31 Protection 81L unit 4 E E E E E E E 32 Protection 66 Address Word 0103 TS33 to TS48 Bit Address 1030 to 103F TS Application S40 S41 S42 T40 T42 M41 G40 33 Protection 67 unit 1 34 Protection 67 unit 2 35 Protection 67N unit 1 E E 36 Protection 67N unit 2 E E 37 Protection 47 E E E E E E E 38 Protection 32P E E E 39 Protection 50BF E E E E E E E 40 Protection 32Q E E 41 Protection 51V 42 TC fault E E 43 TP Phase fault E E E E E E E 44 TP VO fault E E E E E E 3 45 Reserved 46 Reserved 47 Reserved 48 Reserved 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 135 ectric Modbus Communication Data Addresses and Encoding Address Word 0104 TS49 to TS64 Bit Address 1040 to 104F TS Application S40 S41 S42 T40 T42 M41 G40 49 Reserved 50 Reserved 51 Reserved 52 Reserved 53 Reserved 54 Reserved 55 Reserved 56 Reserved 57 Reserved 58 Reserved 59 Reserved 60 Reserved 61 Reserved 62 Reserved 63 Reserved 64 Reserved Address Word 0105 TS65 to TS80 Bit Address 1050 to 105F TS Application S40 S41 S42 T40 T42 M41 G40
63. Function The ACE969 multi protocol communication interfaces are for Sepam Series 20 Series 40 and Series 80 They have two communication ports to connect Sepam Rene an ee to two independent communication networks E m The S LAN Supervisory Local Area Network port is used to connect Sepam to a communication network dedicated to supervision using one of the three following protocols o IEC 60870 5 103 o DNP3 o Modbus RTU The communication protocol is selected at the time of Sepam parameter setting ACE969TP communication interface m The E LAN Engineering Local Area Network port reserved for Sepam remote parameter setting and operation using the SFT2841 software PE50470 Buice Eee There are two versions of the ACE969 interfaces which are identical except for the S LAN port m ACE969TP Twisted Pair for connecting to an S LAN network using a 2 wire eero RS 485 serial link rian Pe en m ACES969FO Fiber Optic for connection to an S LAN network using a fiber Fe s optic connection star or ring TE The E LAN port is always a 2 wire RS485 type port 4 IE PE50471 Rete co SR TI ACE969FO communication interface 204 63230 216 219 B1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Installation ACE969TP and ACE969FO Multi Protocol Interfaces Characteristics Technical Characteristics Weight 0 629 Ib 0 285 kg Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail Oper
64. Function number 0401 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 6 3 Activity Q 4 Negative sequence factor K 0 without 1 low 2 25 2 average 4 5 3 high 9 5 Current threshold Is switching from rate 1 rate 2 IB 6 Accounting for ambient temperature 0 no 1 yes 7 Maximum equipment temperature C 8 Additional settings taken into account rate 2 0 no 1 yes 9 Learned cooling time constant T2 learnt taken into 0 no account 1 yes 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Rate 1 heatrise alarm set point 13 Rate 1 heatrise tripping set point 14 Rate 1 heating time constant mn 15 Rate 1 cooling time constant mn 16 Rate 1 initial heatrise 17 Reserved 18 Reserved 19 Reserved 20 Reserved 21 Reserved 22 Rate 2 heatrise alarm set point 23 Rate 2 heatrise tripping set point 24 Rate 2 heating time constant mn 25 Rate 2 cooling time constant mn 26 Rate 2 initial heatrise 27 Rate 2 base current for rate 2 0 1A 28 Reserved 29 Reserved 30 Reserved 31 Reserved Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 amp Electric 151 Modbus Communication Remote Settings Access ANSI 50 51 Phase Overcurrent Function number 01xx relay 1 xx 01 to relay 4 xx 04 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 6 3 Activity O 4 Confirmation 0 none 1 neg seq overvoltage 2 undervoltage 5 Reserved 6 Reserved 7 Gro
65. Inr IDMT time setting 0 1 Inr lt Isr lt Inr expressed in Amps Sum of CTs 0 1 INr lt Isr lt INr With CSH sensor 2 A rating 0 2Ato2A 5Arating 0 5Ato5A 20 A rating 2Ato20A CT 0 1 Inr lt Isr lt INr min 0 1 A Zero sequence CT with ACE990 0 1 INr lt Isr lt Inr Resolution 0 1 Aor 1 digit Accuracy 5 or 0 01 INr Drop out pick up ratio Harmonic 2 Restraint 93 5 5 with CSH sensor CT or zero sequence CT ACE990 93 5 5 or gt 1 0 015 INr Isr x 100 sum of CTs Fixed threshold 17 5 Time Delay T Operation Time at 10 Isr Setting Definite time inst 50 ms lt T lt 300s IDMT 100 ms lt T lt 12 5 s or TMS Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Accuracy 2 Definite time 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms IDMT class 5 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Timer Hold Delay T1 Definite time timer hold 0 0 05 to 300 s IDMT 4 0 5 to 20s Characteristic Times Operation time Pick up lt 35 ms at 2 Isr typically 25 ms Confirmed instantaneous m inst lt 50 ms at 2 Isr for Isr gt 0 3 Inr typically 35 ms m inst lt 70 ms at 2 Isr for Isr lt 0 3 INr typically 50 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 40 ms for T1 0 Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved MT11030 MT10211 Protection Operation The voltage restrained phase overcurrent protection function is used to protect
66. N i H t A 4 i 3 CT s f SL BS B2 4 A L d ft NA B4 B1 n in Di Shorting TB Oe Ht 67 Trip Dir ia Test 11 Sepam PowerLogic with Line Sw Ser 40 or 20 CM or PM selected and Gy neue see lan CT common ot toward Source N B4 as shown B3 Ot 52 Note Typical Catalog Number for 42 use SP1S42A NOTES 1 IF 2 VT s connect a b c to Sepam Series 40 at E1 E2 E3 the wrong phase sequence will cause Rotation alarm and 47 Neg Seq O V operation 7 r f jus N 11 Sepam 11 Sepam SER20 SER40 PowerLogic T p B21 or 22 ALL CM oERM 2VT s PowerLogic CM or PM 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider GH Electric 63230 216 219 B1 102 Circuit Breaker Contactor Control AC Main 3 Line ANSI Typical Control and Monitoring Functions SEPAM SERIES 20 40 AC MAIN 3 LINE ANSI Typical SOURCE ALT GND FAULT CKT 2 ab c Relay Sepam Series 20 EXCEPT B21 or B22 Or 40 ALL xxxx 5A ZSCT zero sequence CT 11 Sepam Ser 40 or 20 PowerLogic CM or PM lest Sw X X LA 4 Ao q Xxxx 5A 3CTs d 67 Trip Dir with Line Motor Transformer Generator Bus Characteristics Application O C Protection Metering Series 20 Series 40 Non Dir O C I Non Dir O C
67. Operation SFT2841 software displays the following information m all metering and operation data mall alarm messages with the time of appearance date hour mn s ms m diagnosis data such as tripping current number of switchgear operations and cumulative breaking current m all protection and parameter settings Zt m logic status of inputs outputs and signal lamps Voltages Phasetoneutral vollages Phasetophase voltages Positive sequence voltage The SFT2841 software is the solution suited to Pe cee fc Jif A occasional local operation for fast access to Example of a measurement display screen information Parameter and Protection Setting m display and setting of all the parameters of each 5 Hi Ee Est Opmson Sepam Appicaten Ostons Widow 2 l8j x protection function in the same page JOLLES EAEE m program logic parameter setting parameter S051 SON SIN S0BF 46 67N 32P 320740 49AMS 37 48 51LR 6 270 27A 277275 89 SIN ie setting of general installation and Sepam data 67N Directional earth fault Cancel m input data may be prepared ahead of time and On Latchng TipC8 Type Residual curent type transferred into the corresponding Sepam Element 1 d d F fsa f ed units in a single operation downloading Element 2 r 4 r Ba fee 3 function reer cle cole Tripping curve Iso theeshold Delay Ange Vso Theethold Direction Deas we Jema mehr e ho fm el ri inte tme hd mS jo u
68. Phase Current amp Voltage Input Connection LPCT Type Current Sensors Procedure The tests for checking phase current input connections are the same whether the phase currents are measured by CTs or LPCT sensors Only the Sepam current input connection procedure and current injection values change To test current inputs connected to LPCT sensors with a standard injection box the ACE917 injection adapter is required The ACE917 adapter is inserted between m the standard injection box m the LPCT test plug O integrated in the Sepam CCA670 connector o or transferred by means of the CCA613 accessory The ACE917 injection adapter should be set according to the currents selected on the CCA670 connector the ACE917 setting should be equal to the number of the microswitch that is set to 1 on the CCA670 The injection value depends on the rated primary current selected on the CCA670 connector and entered in the Sepam general settings m 1A for the following values in Amps 25 50 100 133 200 320 400 630 m 5A for the following values in Amps 125 250 500 666 1000 1600 2000 3150 Block Diagram Without CCA613 Accessory DE52314 12345678 1 FaTTETIK 0 82 Check 28 plug ACE917 4 5 3 6 2 a 1 8 Input Li L2 L3 la g Single phase or 3 phase generator 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Res
69. Reserved Optional Remote Modules Connection The optional MET1482 MSA141 or DSM303 modules are connected to the base unit connector D by a series of links using prefabricated cables which come in 3 different lengths with black fittings m CCA770 L 2 ft or 0 6 m m CCA772 L 6 6 ft or 2 m m CCA774 L 13 1 ft or 4 m The DSM303 module may only be connected at the end of the series Maximum Configuration A maximum of three modules can be connected to the base unit in compliance with the module order and maximum connection lengths indicated in the table CCA772 MSA141 CCA770 MET1482 CCA774 DSM303 CCA772 MSA141 CCA770 MET1482 CCA772 MET1482 CCA772 MET1482 CCA770 MET1482 CCA774 DSM303 x MAAA AAAA AAAA CCA612 MSA141 module MET1482 CCA772 module or A CCA774 ACE9492 2 wires or ACE959 4 wires or ACE937 fiber optic module Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 193 amp Electric PE50021 DE80031 Installation 1 2 8 in 70 mm with CCA77x cable connected 194 63230 216 219 B1 MET1482 Temperature Sensor Module Function The MET1482 module can be used to connect 8 temperature sensors RTDs of the same type m Pt100 Ni100 or Ni120 type RTDs according to parameter setting m 3 wire temperature sensors m A single module for each Sepam Series 20 base unit to be connected by one of the CCA770 2 ft or 0 6 m CCA772 6 6 ft or 2 m or CCA774 13 1 ft or
70. Seepage opened m Non kkarl Correns CEI potoan BE resi Mans Met asme ae ee ee Sepam Diagnosis screen CAUTION HAZARD OF DAMAGE TO SEPAM m Do not open the Sepam base unit m Donotattemptto repair any components in the Sepam range either in the base unit or an accessory Failure to follow these instructions can cause equipment damage 248 63230 216 219 B1 Maintenance Shutdown of the Base Unit in Fail Safe Position The base unit goes into the fail safe position in the following conditions m detection of an internal problem by the self tests m sensor interface connector missing CCA630 CCA634 or CCA670 m no connection of one of the three LPCT sensors to the CCA670 connectors L1 L2 and L3 MES module configured but missing The fail safe position is conveyed by ON indicator on indicator on the base unit steadily on relay O4 watchdog in fault position output relays dropped out all protection units blocked display showing fault message Q 01 N indicator on DSM303 module remote advanced UMI option flashing Downgraded Operation The base unit is in working order all the protection functions activated are operational and indicates that one of the optional modules such as DSM303 MET1482 or MSA141 is faulty or else that a module is configured but not connected According to the model this operating mode is conveyed by m Sepam with integrated advanced UMI M
71. The number of stop bits is always set at 1 If a configuration with parity is selected each character will contain 11 bits 1 start bit 8 data bits 1 parity bit 1 stop bit If ano parity configuration is selected each character will contain 10 bits 1 start bit 8 data bits 1 stop bit The configuration parameters for the physical layer of the Modbus port are m slave number Sepam address m transmission speed m parity check type Parameters Authorized Values Default Value Sepam address 1 to 247 1 Speed 4800 9600 19200 or 19200 baud 38400 baud Parity None Even or Odd Even Configuring the ACE969FO Fiber Optic Port The configuration for the physical layer of the ACE969FO fiber optic port is completed with the following two parameters m Link idle state light on or light off m Echo mode with or without Fiber Optic Parameters Authorized Values Default Value Link idle state Light Off or Light On Light Off Echo mode Yes fiber optic ring No or No fiber optic star Note In echo mode the Modbus master will receive the echo of its own request before the slave s reply The Modbus master must be able to disregard this echo Otherwise it is impossible to create a Modbus fiber optic ring Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Gf Electric PE50621 PE50622 Modbus Communication Modbus parameters Direct C Select Before Operate SFT2841 Modbus advanced param
72. Vinp Accuracy 2 or 0 002 V p Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 103 2 5 Time Delay T Setting 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 0 2 Or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic Times Operation time pick up lt 35 ms typically 25 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 40 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Connection Conditions Type of connection Van Vbn Ven Vab Vab Vbc Vab Vr Vab Vbc Vr Phase to neutral Yes No No No Yes operation Phase to phase Yes on Vab only Yes on Vab only Yes operation 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 39 lectric Protection 40 63230 216 219 B1 DE50461 Positive Sequence Undervoltage Phase Rotation Direction Check ANSI Code 27D 47 Operation Positive Sequence Undervoltage The protection picks up when the positive sequence component V1 of a three phase voltage system drops below the Vs1 set point with gt gt gt 2 gt V1 1 3 Van aVbn a Ven Va 1 3 Vab a Vbe 2n je LL 3 V with V and a e 3 m itincludes a definite time delay T m it allows drops in motor electrical torque to be detected Phase Rotation Direction This protection also allows the phase rotation direction to be detected The protection considers that the phase rotation direction is inverse when the positive sequence voltage is less than 10 of V p and when the phase to phase voltage is greater than 80 of V p
73. a peak demand is displayed m by using the clear command in the SFT2841 software m by using the communication link remote control command TC6 Characteristics Active Power P Reactive Power Q Measurement range 1 5 Sn at 999 MW 1 1 5 Sn at 999 MVAR 1 Unit kW MW kVAR MVAR Accuracy 1 typical 1 typical 2 Display format 3 significant digits 3 significant digits Resolution 0 1 kW 0 1 kvar Integration interval 5 10 15 30 60 mn 5 10 15 30 60 mn 1 SN V3V p IN 2 At IN Vip cos gt 0 8 in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Power Factor cos Operation Power factor is defined by the following equation cose P P2 Q It expresses the phase displacement between the phase currents and phase to neutral voltages The and signs and IND inductive and CAP capacitive indications give the direction of power flow and the type of load Readout The measurement may be accessed via m advanced UMI display unit by pressing the O key m aPC with the SFT2841 software m a communication link Characteristics Measurement range 1 to 1 IND CAP Accuracy 0 0 01 typical Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 0 01 Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 At IN V p cos gt 0 8 in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved G Electric Metering 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Rese
74. calculated Vca Van Vbn Vcn V1 V2 f Measurements available All Protection functions available by Sepam type All Parameters Voltages measured by VTs Vab Vbc Residual voltage None Functions Available Voltages measured Vab Vbc Values calculated Vea V1 V2 f Measurements available Vab Vbc Vca V1 V2 f Protection functions available by Sepam type All except 67N 67NC 59N Parameters Voltages measured by VTs Vab Residual voltage External VT Functions Available Voltages measured Vab Vr Values calculated f Measurements available Vab Vr f Protection functions available by Sepam type All except 67 47 27D 32P 32Q 40 27S 176 63230 216 219 B1 Parameters Voltages measured by VTs Vab Residual voltage None Functions Available Voltages measured Vab Values calculated f Measurements available Vab f Protection functions available by Sepam type All except 67 47 27D 32P 32Q 40 67N 67NC 59N 27S Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved GH Electric Installation A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Only qualified personnel should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device NEVER work alone Before performing visu
75. counter are conditioned by the presence of a current above the set point I gt Is Block Diagram activation by 50 51 50N 51N 46 67N 67 E I gt Is logic input circuit breaker closed time delayed output activation from logical equation editor pick up signal Setting without taking into account circuit breaker position with taking into account circuit breaker position 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 61 lectric Protection 62 63230 216 219 B1 Breaker Failure ANSI Code 50BF Example of Setting The example below illustrates how to determine the time delay setting for the 50BF function Overcurrent protection setting T inst Circuit breaker operating time 60 ms Auxiliary relay operating time to open the upstream breaker or breakers 10 ms fault 4 clearing of fault without breaker failure rising time output 50 51 ea Sepam output relay 40 ms circuit breaker Fuss margin 10 opening time overshoot time 20 ms Sapam output relay trip relay Time delay T of the 50BF protection function with 20 ms margin T 10 60 20 20 110 ms lt 4 gt Fault clearance time 40 110 10 10 60 230 ms 15 ms The time delay for the 50BF function is the sum of the following times m Sepam O1 output relay pick up time 10 ms m Circuit breaker opening time 60 ms m Overshoot time for the bre
76. current transformer 1 A or 5 A by the number of turns of the secondary wiring through the CSH30 interposing ring CT m 5A rating 4 turns m 1A rating 2 turns Connection to 5A secondary circuit Connection to 1A secondary circuit PE50033 PE50034 1 Plug into the connector l 1 Plug into the connector 2 Insertthe transformer secondary wire 2 Insertthe transformer secondary wire through the CSH30 interposing ring through the CSH30 interposing ring CT four times CT twice Connecting to Sepam Series 20 and Series 40 To residual current Ir input on connector A terminals 19 and 18 shielding Connection to Sepam Series 80 m To residual current Ir input on connector terminals 15 and 14 shielding m To residual current l r input on connector terminals 18 and 17 shielding Recommended Cable m Sheathed cable shielded by tinned copper braid Minimum cable cross section AWG 18 0 93 mm max AWG 12 or 2 5 mm Resistance per unit length lt 30 5 mQ ft 100 mQ m Minimum dielectric strength 1000 V 700 Vrms Maximum length 6 6 ft 2 m DE80118 CT1A 2turns CT 5A 4 turns The CSH30 interposing ring CT must be installed near Sepam Sepam CSH30 link less than 2 m 6 6 ft long DE80119 Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle The connection cable shielding is grounded in Sepam Do not ground the cable by any other means CSH30
77. delay for 10 Is For currents with a very large amplitude the protection function has a definite time characteristic m ifl2 gt 20 ls tripping time corresponds to 20 Is m if l2 gt 40 IN tripping time corresponds to 40 IN 46 63230 216 219 B1 DE50557 Schneider amp Electric Negative Sequence Current Unbalance ANSI Code 46 The following standardized tripping curves are proposed m IEC standard inverse time SIT A IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI B IEC extremely inverse time EIT C IEEE moderately inverse IEC D IEEE very inverse IEC E m IEEE extremely inverse IEC F The curve equations are given in the chapter entilled IDMT Protection Functions Inverse Definite Minimum Time IDMT Protection Schneider Curve For I2 gt Is the time delay depends on the value of I2 le IB is the basis current of the protected equipment It is defined when the general parameters are set T corresponds to the time delay for I2 IB 5 The tripping curve is defined according to the following equations m for Is IB lt l2 lB lt t 0 5 z 219 _ 5 12 18 15 m for0 5 lt l2 lB lt 5 _ 4 64 Tees r i T 0 96 pai i 12 1B na gt m forl2 B gt 5 Is 0 5lB 518 12 t T Schneider curve Block Diagram la Ib 12 gt 1s T 0 time delayed Ic output pick up signal Characteristics Curve Setting Definite standardized IDMT a choice of 6 Schneider IDMT Is Set Point Setting Definite
78. displacement a1 Van la a2 Vbn Ib 3 V3cn Ic 0 5 Use the SFT2841 software to check the following m the value indicated for each of the phase currents la Ib and Ic is approximately equal to the rated primary current of the CTs m the value indicated for each of the phase to neutral voltages Van Vbn and Ven is approximately equal to the rated primary phase to neutral voltage of the VT VinP V p V3 m the value indicated for each phase displacement pa Van la pb Vbn Ib and oc Ven Ic between currents la Ib or Ic and voltages Van Vbn or Ven respectively is approximately equal to 0 6 Turn the generator off Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 237 amp Electric MT11199 Use and Commissioning Checking Phase Current amp i terminal L current test Sepam Series 40 voltage test J Voltage Input Connection With Single Phase Generator amp Voltages Delivered by Three VTs Procedure 1 Connect the single phase voltage and current generator to the corresponding test terminal boxes using the plugs provided according to the block diagram below box A A terminal box N L P o single phase generator 238 63230 216 219 B1 ye Turn the generator on 3 Apply the generator V_ voltage set to the rated secondary phase to neutral voltage of the VTs V s V s V3 between Sepam s phase a voltage input term
79. each data item m numbers less than 100 correspond to the protection outputs that may be used as equation input variables m numbers between 100 and 199 correspond to the protection inputs that may be used as equation output variables m numbers greater than 200 correspond to the recloser outputs that may be used as equation input variables Table of Protection Function Input and Output Variables Outputs Instantaneous 7 mj m E output Pick up Protection u 7 output time delayed Drop out 4 Instantaneous 6 output inverse zone Phase a faut 7 m E m a Phase b faut 8 m E mja C C Phase c faut 9 m E mja E C Alarm 10 R Block closing 11 RTD fault 12 Locked rotor 13 Excessive 14 starting time Locked rotor at 15 start up Protection 16 mn m blocked Hot state 18 Positive active 19 u power Negative active 20 u power Instantaneous 21 output at 0 8 Is Starting in 22 progress Recloser in 201 service Recloser ready 202 Cleared fault 203 Final trip 204 Reclosing 211 E shot 1 Reclosing 212 shot 2 Reclosing 213 shot 3 Reclosing 214 shot 4 Inputs Reset 101 nu u nu mj u E E m mj u E E VT fault 103 Start 50BF 107 Block 113 E a mn m E 1 When the protection func
80. final trip output V1 may then control a signal lamp or relay output in the matrix 2 Latching a signal lamp without latching the protection function Certain operating conditions call for the latching of indications on the front panel of Sepam without latching of the trip output O1 LATCH V1 V2 V1 P50 51_1_1 OR P50 51_3_1 tripping units 1 and 3 of protection 50 51 V2 P50 51_2_1 OR P50 51_4_1 tripping units 2 and 4 of protection 50 51 V1 and V2 must be configured in the matrix to control 2 front panel signal lamps 3 Circuit breaker tripping if input 113 is present for more than 300 ms V_TRIPCB TON 113 300 4 Life Line Mode example 1 If work is underway with the power on indicated by input 125 and the user wishes to change the relay behavior as follows m circuit breaker tripping by the instantaneous outputs of protection functions 50 51 unit 1 or 50N 51N unit 1 AND if input 125 is present m Block Recloser P79_1_113 125 5 Life Line Mode example 2 The user can block protection functions 50N 51N and 46 by an input 124 P50N 51N_1_113 124 P46_1_113 124 6 Validation of a 50N 51N protection function by logic input 121 An 50N 51N protection function set with a very low set point must only trigger the tripping of the circuit breaker if it is validated by an input The input comes from a relay which accurately measures the current in the neutral point V_TRIPCB P50N 51N_1_3 AND 121 7 Blocking circui
81. generators The operation set point is adjusted according to the voltage in order to consider causes of faults close to the generator that cause voltage dips and short circuit current This protection function is three pole It enables if one two orthree phase currents reach the voltage adjusted operation set point Is The alarm linked to operation identifies the faulty phase or phases It is time delayed The delay may be definite time DT or IDMT according to the curves opposite The set point is adjusted according to the lowest of the phase to phase voltages measured The adjusted set point Is is defined by the following equation s Va 4 0 2 3 LLP Sls 0 2 gt 0 2 08 Vu Vup Definite Time Protection Is is the operation set point expressed in Amps and T is the protection operation time delay tA Dr Definite time protection principle IDMT Protection IDMT protection operates in accordance with the IEC 60255 3 BS 142 and IEEE C 37112 standards 42 10 20 Ig IDMT protection principle 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Voltage Restrained Phase Overcurrent ANSI Code 50V 51V The Isr setting is the vertical asymptote of the curve and T is the operation time delay for 10 Isr The tripping time for Ir Isr values less than 1 2 depends on the type of curve chosen Name of Curve Type Standard inverse time SIT 1 2 Very inverse tim
82. ground fault directional phase overcurrent and directional ground fault protection functions Switching from one group of settings to another makes it possible to adapt the protection characteristics to suit the electrical environment of the application such as change of grounding system transition to local production The switching of settings is global and applies to all the units of the protection functions mentioned above The setting switching mode is determined by parameter setting m switching according to the position of logic input 113 0 group A 1 group B m switching by remote control TC3 TC4 m forced group A or group B Block Diagram Group A forced DE50487 Choice via input 113 Group A Input 113 Choice via remote control Group A TC3 Group B TC4 Group B forced Choice via input 113 Group B Input 113 Choice via remote control Group B TC4 Group A TC3 0 Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 111 amp Electric Control and Monitoring Functions Events are displayed on the front panel of Sepam by m a message on the advanced UMI display m lighting one of the 9 yellow signal lamps Local Indication ANSI Code 30 Message Type Indication Predefined Messages All the messages connected to the standard Sepam functions are predefined and available in two language versions m in English factory messages not modifiable m inthe local language according to the vers
83. iis expressed as hour minute second o nisan integer n 1 repetition until the end of the day Example V1 PULSE 8 30 00 1 0 0 4 will generate 4 pulses at one hour intervals at 8 h 30 9 h 30 10 h 30 11 h 30 This will be repeated every 24 hours The pulses last for a 14 ms cycle V1 has the value of 1 during the cycle If necessary V1 may be extended using the TOF SR or LATCH functions Maximum Number of Functions m the total number of delay timers TON and TOF and time taggers PULSE taken together cannot exceed 16 m there is no limit on the number of bistable SR and latching LATCH functions Input Variables They come from protection functions or logic inputs They may only appear on the right of the assignment sign m 111 to 114 121 to 126 logic inputs m Pprotection_unit_data a protection output Example P50 51_2_1 overcurrent protection unit 2 data 1 time delayed output The data numbers are detailed in the table which follows Output Variables They are directed to the matrix or to the protection functions or to the program logic functions They may only appear on the left of the assignment sign The output variables should only be used once otherwise the last assignment is taken into account m outputs to the matrix V1 to V10 The outputs are included in the matrix and may therefore control signal lamps relay outputs or messages m outputs to a protection input Pprotection_unit_data Example P59_1_11
84. in four words see format below date of record 2 encoded in four words see format below date of record 19 least recent encoded in four words see format below m 28 reserve words These data are all consecutive Reading the Contents of the Different Files Request Frame The master makes the request by writing the date of the record to be transferred function 16 in four words starting at the address 2200h Requesting a new record amounts to stopping the transfers that are in progress This is not the case for an identification zone transfer request 2200h 2400h B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 BO9 BO8 BO7 BO6 BOS B04 BO3 BO2 BO1 BOO 0 Oo O O O O OO O Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y O O O O M M M M O O O D D D D D 6 oO O H H H H H O O mn mn mn mn mn mn ms ms ms ms ms m ms m m m m MS ms ms ms ms Y 1 byte for years varies from 0 to 99 years The remote monitoring and control system must ensure that the year 00 is later than 99 M 1 byte for months varies from 1 to 12 D 1 byte for days varies from 1 to 31 H 1 byte for hours varies from 0 to 23 mn 1 byte for minutes varies from 0 to 59 ms 2 bytes for milliseconds varies from 0 to 59999 Reply Frame Reading of each portion of configuration and data file records by a 125 word read frame function 3 starting at the address 2300h
85. is used for m detection of restriking faults DT curve m coordination with electromechanical relays IDMT curve m Timer hold may be blocked if necessary IDMT Timer Hold Curve Equation fot re wheres TMS 1 Ly p Equation t l where value of internal time delay counter lt gt T1 Detection of restriking faults with adjustable timer hold DE50755 T1 i 0 1 Timer hold dependent on current I Ws 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved T1 timer hold setting timer hold for reset 0 and TMS 1 T tripping time delay setting at 10 Is b basic tripping curve value at 10 1 tr T1 i gt 0 1 Is Constant timer hold Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 89 amp Electric Protection Implementing IDMT Curves Examples of Problems to be Solved Problem 1 Given the type of IDMT determine the Is current and time delay T settings Theoretically the Is current setting corresponds to the maximum continuous current It is usually the rated current of the protected equipment cable transformer The time delay T corresponds to operation at 10 Is on the curve This setting is determined by evaluating the constraints involved in discrimination with the upstream and downstream protection devices The discrimination constraint leads to the definition of point A on the operation curve IA tA that is the point corresponding to the
86. is used to supervise the complete phase current measurement chain m phase current sensors 1 A 5 A CTs or LPCTs m phase current sensor connection to Sepam m Sepam phase current analog inputs The function detects the loss of a phase current when the three phase currents are measured The function is inactive if only two phase current sensors are connected The CT fault information disappears automatically when the situation returns to normal i e as soon as the three phase currents are measured and have values greater than 10 of In In the event of the loss of a phase current the following protection functions may be blocked to avoid nuisance tripping m 46 32P and 32Q 40 m 51N and 67N if Ir is calculated by the sum of the phase currents Block Diagram la lt 1 In Lo lt 1 2 IN MT 11136 phase a loss Ic fault Ib 110 lt angle Ic Ib lt 130 c phase c loss Characteristics Time Delay Setting 0 15 sto 300 s Accuracy 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms Blocking Protection Functions 46 32P 32Q 40 51N 67N Setting No action block Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 33 amp Electric 34 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Protection Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Contents Setting Ranges Undervoltage Positive Sequence Und
87. less recent unacknowledged alarm Sepam is not reset In the metering or diagnosis or alarm menus the clear key may be used to reset the average currents peak lam ax 1 80A demand currents running hours counter and alarm stack when they are shown on the display bmax 1 81 A Icmax 180A on BS 551 b gt 5iN bo gt gt SIN ext YO off Ylon Trip MT10284 w Kv A pera N Roe ent Press the lamp test key for 5 seconds to start up a LED and display test sequence When an alarm is present the lamp test key is disabled MT10283 la 162A ans lb 161A ans Ic 163A RMS gt eo E N 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 227 lectric Use and Commissioning Advanced UMI Blue Keys for Parameter and Protection Setting key The status key is used to display and enter the Sepam general settings They define the protected equipment characteristics and the different optional modules on A b51 1 gt gt 51 b gt 51N b gt gt 5iN ext yo off Ylon Trip MT10810 General Settings m Language Frequency UK English 50 Hz O US English 60 Hz O fa A B Selection Active rae clear wy w The protection key is used to display set and enable or disable the protection units I gt gt 51 b gt 5IN b gt 5IN ext 0 off lon Trip MT10811 Off D 50 51 On cS Trip Curve L__ Threshold Dela
88. m Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off ailure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury la Slot Present the product as indicated making sure the metal plate is correctly entered in the groove at the bottom Tilt the product and press on the top part to clamp it with the clips 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 169 ectric Installation Base Unit Connection Sepam Components m base unit 1 o A base unit connector power supply output relay CSH30 120 200 or ACE990 input Screw type connector shown CCA620 or ring lug connector CCA622 o 1 5 CT A current input connector CCA630 or CCA634 or LPCT current input connector CCA670 o communication module link connection green o D remote inter module link connection black o voltage input connection screw type connector shown CCA626 or ring lug connector CCA627 m optional input output module 2 MES114 o DM MES114 module connectors o K MES114 module connector g d al a ge 125 o a 41 1 014 o 9 o 3 708 z 9 Hao 6 012 2 5 wt CSH 2 Ra ye 220 8 o Ors A 5 S SssossoSsSgsngosgnoSsgegsosgSgsSs 3 K Q g 2 Bi on 11 126 lt 10 I o2 ho gt 14 ES ic 74 ol Is
89. m Battery for storing logs and recording data 9 m Mimic based User z Machine Interface for local control of the device in complete safety m Optional Logipam programming software for programming dedicated functions 2 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Introduction Overview Specific Substation Bus Transformer Motor Generator Capacitor T20 M20 Breaker failure 23 T23 B21 Rate of Change of B22 Frequency ROCOF B a a S40 T40 G40 Directional ground fault S41 M41 Directional ground fault S42 T42 and phase overcurrent 80 B80 Directional ground fault S81 T81 M81 Directional ground fault S82 T82 G82 and phase overcurrent Rate of Change of 584 Frequency ROCOF Transformer or machine T87 M88 G88 transformer unit differential Machine differential M87 G87 Voltage and frequency B83 protection for two sets of buss Capacitor bank C86 unbalance 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 3 ectric Introduction Presentation The Sepam Series 40 family of protection and metering units is designed to operate machines and electrical distribution networks of industrial installations and utility substations for all levels of voltage It consists of simple high performing solutions suited to demanding applications that call for current and voltage metering PE50297
90. m Reversible phase and neutral m Grounded via terminal block and metal case ring lug on back of case 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric PE50036 Installation use ACE919CC RS485 RS485 converter DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Only qualified personnel should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device NEVER work alone Before performing visual inspections tests or maintenance of the equipment disconnect all sources of electric power Assume that all circuits are live until they have been completely de energized tested and tagged Pay particular attention to the design of the power system Consider all sources of power including the possibility of backfeeding Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off Start by connecting the device to the protective ground and to the functional ground Screw tight all terminals even those not in use Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury ACE919CA and ACE919CC RS 485 RS485 Converters Function The ACE919 converters are used to connect a master central computer equipped with an RS485 type serial port as a standard feature to stations connected to a 2 wire RS485 network Without requiring any flow control s
91. m check the auxiliary power supply connection for the ACE969 Checking the ACE Interface Operation You can use the following to check that an ACE interface is operating correctly m the indicator LEDs on the front panel of the ACE m the information provided by the SFT2841 software connected to Sepam o onthe Diagnosis screen O onthe Communication configuration screens Link Activity LED for ACE9492 ACE959 and ACE937 The link activity LED for ACE9492 ACE959 and ACE937 interfaces flashes when Sepam transmission or reception is active Indicator LEDs on the ACE969 m green on LED ACE969 energized m red key LED ACE969 interface status o LED off ACE969 configured and communication operational o LED flashing ACE969 configuration error or ACE969 not configured o LED on ACE969 error m link activity LED S LAN Tx flashing Sepam transmission active m link activity LED S LAN Rx flashing Sepam reception active Diagnosis Using SFT2841 Software Sepam Diagnosis Screen When connected to Sepam the SFT2841 software informs the operator of the general Sepam status and of the Sepam communication status in particular All Sepam status information appears on the Sepam diagnosis screen Sepam Communication Diagnosis The operator is provided with the following information to assist with identifying and resolving communication problems m name of the protocol configured m Modbus interface version number m nu
92. m pick up of watchdog contact The first screen displayed is the phase current measurement screen Implementing the SFT2841 Software for PC 1 Start up the PC 2 Connect the PC RS232 serial port to the communication port on the front panel of Sepam using the CCA783 cord 3 Start up the SFT2841 software by clicking on the related icon 4 Choose to connect to the Sepam to be checked Identification of Sepam 1 Note the Sepam serial number given on the label stuck to the right side plate of the base unit 2 Note the Sepam type and software version using the SFT2841 software Sepam Diagnosis screen 3 Enter them in the test sheet Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved G Electric Use and Commissioning 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Checking Parameter amp Protection Settings Determining Parameter and Protection Settings All Sepam parameter and protection settings are determined beforehand by the design department in charge of the application and should be approved by the customer It is presumed that the study has been carried out with all the attention necessary or even consolidated by a network coordination study All Sepam parameter and protection settings should be available at the time of commissioning m in hard copy format with the SFT2841 software the parameter and protection setting file for a Sepam can be printed directly or exported to a text
93. maximum fault current for the downstream protection device 90 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider General Trip Curves Problem 2 Given the type of IDMT the Is current setting and a point k Ik tk on the operation curve determine the time delay setting T On the standard curve of the same type read the operation time tsk that corresponds to the relative current Ik Is and the operation time Ts10 that corresponds to the relative current I Is 10 The time delay setting to be used so that the operation curve passes through the point k Ik tk is MT10215 tk T Ts10 x isk Another practical method The table below gives the values of K ts ts10 as a function of I Is In the column that corresponds to the type of time delay read the value K tsk Ts10 on the line for Ik Is The time delay setting to be used so that the operation curve passes through point k Ik tk is T tk k Example Data m type of time delay standard inverse time SIT m setpoint Is m a point k on the operation curve k 3 5 Is 4 s Question What is the time delay T setting operation time at 10 Is Reading the table SIT column line I Is 3 5 therefore K 1 858 Answer The time delay setting is T 4 1 858 2 15 s 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Protection General Trip Curves Problem 3 Another Practical Method Given the Is current and time delay T settings foratype The table below g
94. module 2 tripping set point sensor 3 E E 8 8 87 Protection 38 49T module 2 alarm set point sensor 4 E E 8 E 88 Protection 38 49T module 2 tripping set point sensor 4 E E 8 E 89 Protection 38 49T module 2 alarm set point sensor 5 E 8 E 90 Protection 38 49T module 2 tripping set point sensor 5 E E 8 E 91 Protection 38 49T module 2 alarm set point sensor 6 E E 8 E 92 Protection 38 49T module 2 tripping set point sensor 6 E E 8 E 93 Protection 38 49T module 2 alarm set point sensor 7 E E E E 94 Protection 38 49T module 2 tripping set point sensor 7 E E E E 95 Protection 38 49T module 2 alarm set point sensor 8 E E 8 E 96 Protection 38 49T module 2 tripping set point sensor 8 E E 8 E 136 63230 216 219 B1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Modbus Communication Data Addresses and Encoding Address Word 0107 TS97 to TS112 Bit Address 1070 to 107F TS Application S40 S41 S42 T40 T42 M41 G40 97 Recloser in service E E 98 Recloser in progress E E E 99 Recloser final trip E E E 100 Recloser successful reclosing E E E 101 Send blocking input 1 E E E E E 8 E 102 Remote setting blocked E E E E E E E 103 Remote control blocked E E E E E 8 E 104 Sepam not reset after fault E E E E E 8 E 105 TC position discrepancy E E E E E 8 E 106 Matching fault or Trip Circuit Supervision E E E E E 8 E 107 Disturbance recording stored E E
95. normal operation will not disturb Sepam but will reset the communication port 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 123 lectric Modbus Communication SFT2041 Sepam s rie 40 Connection window Sepam diagnosis Spam garens characteris hechen yoa Sapar earth shor Sefin versen vaw er Tale Status Number of frames received Number of frames received with errors SFT2841 Sepam series 40 diagnosis screen 124 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider Commissioning and Diagnosis Installing the Communication Network Preliminary Study The communication network must first be the subject of a technical study to identify the installation characteristics and constraints geography amount of information processed etc in order to determine the following requirements m the type of medium electrical or fiber optic m the number of Sepam units per network m the transmission speed m the ACE interfaces configuration m the Sepam parameter settings Sepam User Manual The communication interfaces must be installed and connected in accordance with the instructions in the Installation chapter of this manual Preliminary Checks The following preliminary checks must be made m check the CCA612 cord connection between the ACE interface and the Sepam base unit m check the ACE Modbus communication port connection m check the complete ACE configuration
96. of application S40 S41 T42 02CD 02D2 R 3 ASCII 12c Sepam marking 02D3 02DC R 3 ASCII 20c Sepam application version 02DD 02DF R 3 ASCII 6c Modbus address slave number for Level2 02E0 R 3 Modbus address slave number for RHM 02E1 R 3 Marking type of equipment 3 02E2 R 3 Type of connection 0 Modbus 02E3 R 3 Communication version 02E4 R 3 NG MET1482 n 1 module version 02E5 02E7 R 3 ASCII 6c MET1482 n 2 module version 02E8 02EA R 3 ASCII 6c MSA141 module version 02EB 02ED R 3 ASCII 6c DSM303 module version 02EE 02F0 R 3 ASCII 6c Name of language 02F1 02FA R 3 ASCII 20c Customized languaged version number 2 02FB R 3 English language version number 2 02FC R 3 Boot version number 02FD R 3 Extension word 4 02FE R 3 1 40 not configured 42 S41 44 T40 46 M41 41 S40 43 S42 45 T42 47 G40 2 MSB major index LSB minor index 3 2E2 word MSB 10 h Sepam LSB hardware configuration Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Option MD MX Extension MET1482 2 DSM303 MSA141 MET1482 1 MES114 MES108 Mod MX 0 Z X x x x y y Mod MD 1 Zz x 0 x x y y Accuracy Measurement accuracy depends on the weight of the unit it is equal to the value of the point divided by 2 132 63230 216 219 B1 x 1 if option included y 1 if option included exclusive options z 1 if extension in 2FE word 4 Bit 0 1 if MES114E or MES114F Vac set up Examples la
97. of groups of settings E u a m n a Annunciation 30 E E E E E E Logic equation editor u E m Additional Modules 8 temperature sensor inputs MET1482 module 2 o o o o 1 low level analog output MSA141 module o o o o oO o o Logic inputs outputs o o o o o o o MES114 MES114E MES114F 101 40 module Communication interface o o T o o o o ACE9492 ACE959 ACE937 ACE969TP or ACE969FO m standard D according to parameter setting and MES114 MES114E MES114F or MET1482 input output module options 1 For NO or NC trip contacts 2 Two modules possible 3 Exclusive choice phase to neutral voltage or phase to phase voltage for each of the two relays 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider amp Electric 63230 216 219 B1 Technical Characteristics Introduction Minimum weight base unit with basic UMI and without MES114 3 09 Ib 1 4 kg Maximum weight base unit with advanced UMI and MES114 4 19 Ib 1 9 kg Current transformer Input impedance lt 0 02 2 1 A or 5 ACT with CCA630 or CA634 Burden lt 0 02 VAat1A 1 A to 6250 A ratings lt 0 5VAat5A Rated thermal withstand 4IN 1 second overload 100 IN Voltage transformer Input impedance gt 100 KQ 220 V to 250 kV ratings Input voltage 100 to 250 3 V Rated thermal withstand 240 V 1 second overload 480 V Type of sensor Pt 100 Ni 100 120 Isolation from ground None None Current injected in s
98. or 67 to avoid the detection of a VT loss of voltage fault triggered by a 3 phase short circuit The time delay for the 51V protection function must be longer than the T1 and T2 time delays used for the detection of voltage losses Characteristics Validating the Detection of Partial Loss of Phase Voltages Setting Yes No Vs2 Set Point Setting 2 to 100 of Vnp Accuracy 2 for V2 gt 10 V yp 5 for V2 lt 10 V_ p Resolution 1 Pick up drop out ratio 95 2 5 for V2 gt 10 Vrp Is2 Set Point Setting 5 to 100 of IN Accuracy 5 Resolution 1 Pick up drop out ratio 105 2 5 Time Delay T1 Partial Loss of Phase Voltages Setting 0 1 sto 300s Accuracy 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms Validating the Detection of Losing all Phase Voltages Setting Yes No Detecting the Loss of all Voltages and Verifying the Presence of Current Setting Yes No Time Delay T2 All Voltages Lost Setting 0 1 sto 300s Accuracy 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms Voltage and Power Protection Behavior Setting No action block Protection 67 Behavior Setting Non directional block Protection 67N 67NC Behavior Setting Non directional block Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved G Electric Metering 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Switchgear Diagnosis Functions CT Supervision ANSI Code 60C Operation The Current Transformer CT supervision function
99. or zero sequence depends on the type of CTs used Schneider ES Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 63230 216 219 B1 11 Metering 12 63230 216 219 B1 Phase Current Residual Current Phase Current Operation This function gives the RMS value of the phase currents m la phase a current m b phase b current m c phase c current It is based on RMS current measurement and considers up to 17th level harmonics Readout The measurements may be accessed via m advanced UMI display unit by pressing the O key m aPC operating with SFT2841 software m acommunication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Measurement range 0 1 to 1 5 IN Unit Aor kA Accuracy 0 5 typical 2 from 0 3 to 1 5 IN 5 if lt 0 3 IN Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 0 1A Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 In rated current set in the general settings 2 At IN in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 3 Display of values 0 02 to 40 IN Residual Current Operation This operation gives the RMS value of the residual current Ir and is based on measuring the fundamental component Inr should be thought of as a relay input port for ground fault protection This port can accept residually connected phase CTs and therefore measure positive negative and zero sequence components This port can also accept a zero sequence CT which measures only true zero seque
100. qualification generator m an internal self testing system provides continuous information on the state of the The different possible tests are described further on by electronic components and the integrity of the m a detailed test procedure functions e g automatic tests diagnose the m the connection diagram of the associated test generator level of component polarization voltages the continuity of the analog value acquisition The table below specifies the tests to be carried out according to the type of chain non alteration of RAM memory measurement sensors and type of generator used and indicates the page on which absence of settings outside the tolerance each test is described range and thereby guarantees a high level of availability 3CTs 3CTs 1zero 3CTs 3 CTs 1 zero sequence CT sequence CT Sepam is therefore ready to operate without 3 VTs 3 VTs 2 phase VTs 2 phase VTs requiring any additional qualification testing 1 residual VT 1 residual VT that concerns it directly hree phase Page 7 236 Page 7 236 Page 7 237 Page 7 237 penerator Page 7 241 Page 7 242 Page 7 243 Single phase Page 7 238 Page 7 238 Page 7 238 Page 7 238 penerator Page 7 241 Page 7 242 Page 7 243 232 63230 216 219 B1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Use and Commissioning 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Required Testing amp Metering Equipment Generators m dual sinusoidal AC current an
101. see Figure 2 in which a lower Sepam hot curve would intersect the starting curve with Vu 0 9 Va The Es0 parameter is a setting that is used to solve these differences by lowering the Sepam cold curve without moving the hot curve In this example the thermal overload protection should trip after 400 s starting from the cold state The following equation is used to obtain the EsO value 2 thecessary 2 T Eso Iprocessed e 1 2 l processed Es2 B B with t necessary tripping time necessary starting from a cold state I processed equipment current motor cold curve 1 When the machine manufacturer provides both a time constant T1 and the machine hot cold Sepam cold curve curves the use of the curves is recommended since they are more accurate 2 The charts containing the numerical values of the Sepam hot curve may be used or else v gt the equation of the curve which is given on page 50 2 6657 motor hot curve o 2 z zo AN Sepam hot curve 2 u gt 1 05 2 WB 52 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric DE50511 DE50512 Protection In numerical values the following is obtained 400 sec Es0 4 e 24x60sec 4 _4 5 0 3035 31 By setting EsO 31 point 2 is moved downward to obtain a shorter tripping time that is compatible with the motor s thermal resistance when cold see Figure 3 Please note A setting EsO 100 therefore means
102. sequence CT with a ratio DE80103 of 1 n 50 lt n lt 1500 and the Sepam residual current input This arrangement allows the continued use of existing zero sequence CTs on the installation Parameters Residual Current Rated Residual Current Measuring Range ACE990 range 1 Inr Ik n 0 1 to 20 Inr 0 00578 lt k lt 0 04 ACE990 range 2 Inr Ik n 0 1 to 20 Inr 0 0578 lt k lt 0 26316 1 n number of zero sequence CT turns k factor to be determined according to ACE990 wiring and setting range used by Sepam 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 175 ectric DE51836 DE51837 DE51838 DE51839 DE51840 Installation Base Unit Other Voltage Input Connection Schemes The phase and residual voltage transformer secondary circuits connect directly to connector item The three impedance matching and isolation transformers are integrated in the base unit of Sepam Series 40 Parameters Voltages measured by VTs Van Vbn Ven Residual voltage None Functions Available Voltages measured Van Vbn Ven Values calculated Vab Vbc Vac Vr V1 V2 f Measurements available All Protection functions available by Sepam type All Dual Secondary i VTs Parameters Voltages measured by VTs Vab Vbc Residual voltage External VT Functions Available Voltages measured Vab Vbc Vr Values
103. state used by the number of starts function The value of the fixed set point is 50 Heat Rise and Cooling Time Constants Heat rise time constant Cooling time constant 50 63230 216 219 B1 T2 t Schneider Thermal Overload ANSI Code 49 RMS For self ventilated rotating machines cooling is more effective when the machine is running than when it is stopped The current value is used to determine running and stopping the equipment m running if gt 0 1 IB m stopped if lt 0 1 IB Two time constants can be set m T1 heat rise time constant concerns equipment that is running m T2 cooling time constant concerns equipment that is stopped Accounting for Harmonics The current measured by the thermal protection is a 3 phase RMS current that considers 17th level harmonics Ambient Temperature Considerations Most machines are designed to operate at a maximum ambient temperature of 104 F 40 C The thermal overload function takes into account the ambient temperature Sepam equipped with the temperature sensor module option with sensor no 8 assigned to measurement of ambient temperature to increase the calculated heat rise value when the temperature measured exceeds 40 C 104 F Tmax 40 C Tmax Tambient where T max is the equipment s maximum temperature according to insulation class T ambient is the measured temperature Adaptating the Protection to Motor Thermal Withstand Motor thermal
104. that the hot and cold curves are the same Figure 2 Hot cold curves not compatible with the motor s thermal resistance A motor cold curve Thermal Overload ANSI Code 49 RMS Setting Examples Using the Additional Setting Group When a motor rotor is locked or turning very slowly its thermal behavior differs from one with a rated load In such conditions the motor is damaged by overheating the rotor or stator For high power motors rotor overheating is most often a limiting factor The thermal overload parameters chosen for operation with a low overload are no longer valid Excessive starting time protection can be used to protect the motor in this case Motor manufacturers provide the thermal resistance curves for different voltages at the time of starting when the rotor is locked Figure 4 Locked rotor thermal resistance A motor running locked rotor MT10863 513 i 2 400 amp motor hot curve 5 o i g F o n 1 3 100 Sepam hot curve 1 o 4 lt starting at Vi starting at 0 9 Vi 165 2 ig gt VIB Figure 3 Hot cold curves compatible with the thermal resistance motor running motor s thermal resistance via the setting of an a ee motor stopped En as E Sepam tripping curve initial heat rise EsO starting at 65 Vi A starting at 80 Vi starting at 100 Vi adjusted Sepam cold curve A second overload relay can be used to co
105. the direction cannot be determined and the protection does not trip In such cases a backup 50 51 protection function should be used 70 63230 216 219 B1 Directional Phase Overcurrent ANSI Code 67 MT11128 Three phase function polarization currents and voltages line zone DE50667 6 30 Vbc bus zone Fault tripping in line zone with 30 line zone la DE50668 al bus 0 45 zone Vbc bus zone Vca Fault tripping in line zone with 0 45 DE50669 bus zone Fault tripping in line zone with 0 60 Schneider amp Electric bus zone line zone 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved DE52319 Protection Directional Phase Overcurrent ANSI Code 67 Block Diagrams phase a inst output er 90 lt a1 lt 8 90 0 90 lt o1 lt 0 270 lt al lt 8 270 phase a time delayed output Vab la phase a inst output inverse zone l gt 0 8 Is phase a inst output 0 8 Is Phase a current la processing phase b inst output phase b time delayed output bus line choice Vac Ib phase b inst output inverse zone phase b inst output Phase b current Ib processing 0 8 Is phase c inst output phase c time delayed output 0 90 lt a3 lt 0 90 0 90 lt a3 lt 0 270 bus line choice os LH Vab Ic phase c inst output inver
106. the Sepam range can be found in the following applications Characteristics Sepam Series 20 10 logic inputs 8 relay outputs 1 communication port 8 temperature sensor inputs DE51730 DE51731 leel Sepam Series 40 documents For demanding applications m Sepam catalog Characteristics g m 10 logic inputs a reference 63230 216 238 3 m 8 relay outputs E m Sepam Series 20 User s Manual m Logic equation editor reference 63230 216 208 m 1 communication m Sepam Series 40 User s Manual E a a ae reference 63230 216 219 as m Sepam Series 80 Reference Manual reference 63230 216 230 Sepam Series 80 TM ji m Sepam Ser ies 80 Modbus For custom applications Communication Manual Characteristics reference 63230 216 231 3 m 42 logic inputs 8 m Sepam Series 80 Installation Manual m 23relayoutputs 5 reference 63230 216 229 a DNP3 Communication User s ports for multimaster anual or redundant reference 63230 216 236 architecture m Sepam IEC 60870 5 103 ae Communication User s Manual z m Removable memory reference 63230 216 237 i cartridge with a parameters and settings for quick return to service after replacement
107. time 10 IB lt Is lt 500 IB Standardized IDMT 10 IB lt Is lt 100 IB IEC IEEE Schneider IDMT 10 IB lt Is lt 50 IB Resolution 1 Accuracy 5 Time Delay T Setting Definite time 100 ms lt T lt 300 s IDMT 100ms lt T lt 1s Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Accuracy 1 Definite time 2 or 25 ms IDMT 5 or 35 ms Characteristic Times Operation time pick up lt 55 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 55 ms 1 IN reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Protection Negative Sequence Current Unbalance ANSI Code 46 Determining the tripping time for different negative sequence current values for a given Schneider curve t s Use the table to find the value of K that corresponds to 10009 the required negative sequence current The tripping 5000 time is equal to KT Example 2000 Given a tripping curve with the setting T 0 5 s 1000 What is the tripping time at 0 6 IB 500 Use the table to find the value of K that corresponds to 200 60 of IB 100 The table reads K 7 55 The tripping time is equal to 50 0 5 x 7 55 3 755 s IDMT Tripping Schneider Curve 20 max curve T 1s 10 5 2 1 0 5 0 2 0 1 0 05 min curve T 0 1s 0 02 0 01 0 005 0 002 0 001 Vie 0 05 0 1 02 03 0507 1 2 3 5 7 20 12 IB 10 15 20 25 30 33 33 35 40 45 50 55 57 7 60 65 70 75 K 99 95 54 50 35 44 25 38
108. to 110 to 110 VAC 220 to 220 to 250 V DC 125 V DC 250VDC 240 VAC Range 19 2 to 88 to 88 to 176 to 176 to 275 V DC 150 V DC 132VAC 275VDC 264VAC Frequency 47 to 63 Hz 47 to 63 Hz Typical burden 3 mA 3 mA 3 mA 3 mA 3 mA Typical switching 14V DC 82 V DC 58 VAC 154VDC 120VAC threshold Input limit Atstate1 219V DC 2 88 V DC 288 VAC 2176VDC 2176VAC voltage Atstate0 26VDC lt 75V DC lt 22VAC lt 137VDC lt 48VAC Isolation of inputs from Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced other isolated groups Voltage DC 24 48 VDC 127VDC 220VDC AC 100 to 47 5 to 240 V AC 63 Hz Continuous current 8A 8A 8A 8A Breaking capacity Resistive 8 4 A 0 7 A 0 3 A 8A load L R load 6 2 A 0 5 A 0 2 A lt 20 ms L R load 41A 0 2 A 0 1 A lt 40 ms p f load gt 0 3 5A Making capacity lt 15 A for 200 ms Isolation of outputs from Enhanced other isolated groups Voltage DC 24 48 VDC 125VDC 250VDC AC 100 to 47 5 to 240 V AC 63 Hz Continuous current 2A 2A 2A 2A Breaking capacity L R load 2 1 A 0 5A 0 15 A lt 20 ms p f load gt 0 3 1A Making capacity lt 15 A for 200 ms Isolation of outputs in Enhanced relation to other isolated groups Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved G Electric DE52153 DE51683 N Installation OTOOTO SOSO9O9S9D 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
109. tripping curve 22 Group B Is set point 0 1A 23 Group B tripping time delay 10 ms 24 Group B timer hold curve 25 Group B timer hold delay 10 ms 26 Reserved 27 Reserved 28 Reserved 29 Reserved 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 155 relay 1 xx 01 relay 2 xx 02 amp Electric Modbus Communication Remote Settings Access ANSI 67N 67NC Directional Ground Fault Function number 22xx relay 1 xx 01 relay 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 3 Activity 4 Type 0 projection 1 directionalized 5 Type of Ir Sum or Zero Sequence CT 0 calculated 1 measured 6 Reserved 7 Reserved 8 Group A direction 0 line 1 bus 9 Group A types 1 and 2 characteristic angle 0 45 angle 1 0 angle 2 15 angle 3 30 angle 4 45 angle 5 60 angle 6 90 angle Group A type 3 limit 1 0 to 359 10 Group A type 1 sector 2 76 sector 3 83 sector 4 86 sector Group A type 3 limit 2 0 to 359 11 Group A tripping curve 12 Group A types 1 and 2 Isr set point 0 1 A Group A type 3 Isr set point 0 01 A 13 Group A tripping time delay 10 ms 14 Group A types 1 and 2 Vsr V
110. waiting time can be accessed via m advanced UMI display unit by pressing the key m aPC with SFT2841 software m acommunication link Characteristics Measurement range 0 to 360 mn Unit mn Display format 3 significant digits Resolution imn Refresh interval 1 second typical 28 63230 216 219 B1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Metering 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Switchgear Diagnosis Functions Cumulative Breaking Current amp Number of Operations Cumulative Breaking Current Operation This function gives the cumulative breaking current in kA for five current ranges It is based on measurement of the fundamental component The current ranges displayed are m 0 lt I lt 2IN m 2IN lt I lt 5IN m SIN lt I lt 10IN m 10IN lt I lt 40IN m gt 40IN This function gives the cumulative breaking current in kA for five current ranges Each value is saved in case auxiliary power is lost Refer to switchgear documentation for use of this information Number of Operations The function also gives the total number of breaking device operations It is activated by tripping commands O1 relay The number of operations is saved in case auxiliary power is lost Readout The measurements may be accessed via m advanced UMI display unit by pressing the key m aPC with SFT2841 software m acommunication link The initial values can be introduced using the SFT28
111. with the clamp m The interface is to be connected to connector on the base unit using a CCA612 cable length 9 8 ft or 3 m green fittings m The interfaces are to be supplied with 12 V DC or 24 V DC B B A A V V 2 wire Power supply RS485 12 or network 24 V DC 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 201 ectric PE50023 DE80036 DE80129 Installation 1 2 8 in 70 mm with CCA612 cable connected 4 wire Power supply ACE959 RS 485 120r network 24V DC 4 wire Power supply RS 485 120r network 24V DC 1 Distributed power supply with separate wiring or included in the shielded cable 3 pairs 2 Terminal block for connection of the distributed power supply module 202 63230 216 219 B1 ACE959 4 wire RS485 Network Interface Function The ACE959 interface performs two functions m Electrical interface between Sepam and a 4 wire RS485 communication network m Main network cable branching box for connecting a Sepam with a CCA612 cable Characteristics Weight Assembly Operating temperature Environmental characteristics 0 441 Ib 0 2 kg On symmetrical DIN rail 13 F to 158 F 25 C to 70 C Same as Sepam base units Standard Distributed power supply Power consumption EIA 4 wire RS485 differential External 12 V DC or 24 V DC 10 16 mA in rece
112. with the results of this study Failure to follow these instructions can cause equipment damage Operating Mode 1 Create a Sepam file for the type of Sepam being set up The newly created file contains the Sepam factory set parameter and protection settings 2 Modify the Sepam general settings and protection function settings m allthe data relating to the same function are grouped together in the same screen m itis advisable to enter all the parameters and protection settings in the natural order of the screens proposed by the guided navigation mode Entering Parameter and Protection Settings The parameter and protection setting input fields are suited to the type of value m choice buttons m numerical value input fields m dialogue box Combo box The user must Apply or Cancel the new values entered before going on to the following screen where the consistency of the new values applied is checked An explicit message identifies inconsistent values and specifies the authorized values Values that have become inconsistent after a parameter modification are adjusted to the closest consistent value 218 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider amp Electric SFT2841 Setting amp Operating Software Software Use Connected to Sepam Mode Precaution Given the risks inherent to the accumulation of static electricity the customary precaution when using a laptop consists of discharging in contact wit
113. 0 0150 R 3 4 16S 0 01 Positive active energy Ea x 1 0151 0152 R 3 4 2x 16NS 100 kW h Energie active n gative Ea x 1 0153 0154 R 3 4 2x 16NS 100 kW h Positive reactive energy Er x 1 0155 0156 R 3 4 2x 16NS 100 kvar h Negative reactive energy Er x 1 0157 0158 R 3 4 2x 16NS 100 kvar h 130 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Modbus Communication Data Addresses and Encoding Diagnosis Diagnosis Word Address Access Modbus Function Format Unit Enabled Reserved 0159 a Last tripping current Itripa 015A R 3 4 16NS 10A Last tripping current Itripb 015B R 3 4 16NS 10A Last tripping current Itripc 015C R 3 4 16NS 10A Reserved 015D Cumulative breaking current 015E R 3 4 16NS 1 kA Number of operations 015F R 3 4 16NS 1 Operating time 0160 R 3 4 16NS 1ms Charging time 0161 R 3 4 16NS 0 1s Running hours counter operation time 0162 R 3 4 16NS 1h Reserved 0163 Thermal capacity used 0164 R 3 4 16NS Time before tripping 0165 R 3 4 16NS 1 min Time before closing 0166 R 3 4 16NS 1 min Negative sequence unbalance 0167 R 3 4 16NS Ib Starting time overload 0168 R 3 4 16NS 0 18 Starting current overload 0169 R 3 4 16NS 1A Blocked start time delay 016A R 3 4 16NS 1 min Number of starts allowed 016B R 3 4 16NS 1 Te
114. 0 0274 0 0248 0 0226 150 0 2312 0 2127 0 1965 0 1823 0 1395 0 1110 0 0908 0 0759 0 0645 0 0556 0 0485 0 0427 0 0379 0 0339 0 0305 0 0276 0 0251 155 0 2575 0 2366 0 2185 0 2025 0 1546 0 1228 0 1004 0 0838 0 0712 0 0614 0 0535 0 0471 0 0418 0 0374 0 0336 0 0304 0 0277 160 0 2846 0 2612 0 2409 0 2231 0 1699 0 1347 0 1100 0 0918 0 0780 0 0671 0 0585 0 0515 0 0457 0 0408 0 0367 0 0332 0 0302 165 0 3124 0 2864 0 2639 0 2442 0 1855 0 1468 0 1197 0 0999 0 0847 0 0729 0 0635 0 0559 0 0496 0 0443 0 0398 0 0360 0 0328 170 0 3410 0 3122 0 2874 0 2657 0 2012 0 1591 0 1296 0 1080 0 0916 0 0788 0 0686 0 0603 0 0535 0 0478 0 0430 0 0389 0 0353 175 0 3705 0 3388 0 3115 0 2877 0 2173 0 1715 0 1395 0 1161 0 0984 0 0847 0 0737 0 0648 0 0574 0 0513 0 0461 0 0417 0 0379 180 0 4008 0 3660 0 3361 0 3102 0 2336 0 1840 0 1495 0 1244 0 1054 0 0906 0 0788 0 0692 0 0614 0 0548 0 0493 0 0446 0 0405 185 0 4321 0 3940 0 3614 0 3331 0 2502 0 1967 0 1597 0 1327 0 1123 0 0965 0 0839 0 0737 0 0653 0 0583 0 0524 0 0474 0 0431 190 0 4644 0 4229 0 3873 0 3567 0 2671 0 2096 0 1699 0 1411 0 1193 0 1025 0 0891 0 0782 0 0693 0 0619 0 0556 0 0503 0 0457 195 0 4978 0 4525 0 4140 0 3808 0 2842 0 2226 0 1802 0 1495 0 1264 0 1085 0 0943 0 0828 0 0733 0 0654 0 0588 0 0531 0 0483 200 0 5324 0 4831 0 4413 0 4055 0 3017 0 2358 0 1907 0 1581 0 1335 0 1145 0 0995 0 0873 0 0773 0 0690 0 0620 0 0560 0 0509 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 57 amp Electric Protection The
115. 0 8873 0 8099 0 7438 175 3 2244 2 2336 1 7858 1 5041 1 3035 1 1507 1 0294 0 9302 0 8473 0 7768 180 2 5055 1 9388 1 6094 1 3832 1 2144 1 0822 0 9751 0 8861 0 8109 185 2 8802 2 1195 1 7272 1 4698 1 2825 1 1379 1 0220 0 9265 0 8463 190 3 4864 2 3401 1 8608 1 5647 1 3555 1 1970 1 0713 0 9687 0 8829 195 2 6237 2 0149 1 6695 1 4343 1 2597 1 1231 1 0126 0 9209 200 3 0210 2 1972 1 7866 1 5198 1 3266 1 1778 1 0586 0 9605 54 63230 216 219 B1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Protection Cold Curves for Es0 0 Thermal Overload ANSI Code 49 RMS Setting Examples VB 185 1 90 19 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 420 440 4 60 Es 50 0 1579 0 1491 0 1410 0 1335 0 1090 0 0908 0 0768 0 0659 0 0572 0 0501 0 0442 0 0393 0 0352 0 0317 0 0288 0 0262 0 0239 55 0 1752 0 1653 0 1562 0 1479 0 1206 0 1004 0 0849 0 0727 0 0631 0 0552 0 0487 0 0434 0 0388 0 0350 0 0317 0 0288 0 0263 60 0 1927 0 1818 0 1717 0 1625 0 1324 0 1100 0 0929 0 0796 0 069 0 0604 0 0533 0 0474 0 0424 0 0382 0 0346 0 0315 0 0288 65 0 2106 0 1985 0 1875 0 1773 0 1442 0 1197 0 1011 0 0865 0 075 0 0656 0 0579 0 0515 0 0461 0 0415 0 0375 0 0342 0 0312 70 0 2288 0 2156 0 2035 0 1924 0 1562 0 1296 0 1093 0 0935 0 081 0 0708 0 0625 0 0555 0 0497 0 0447 0 0405 0 0368 0 0336 75 0 2474 0 2329 0 2197 0 2076 0 1684 0 1395 0 1176 0 1006 0 087 0 0761 0 0671 0 0596 0 0533 0 0480 0
116. 0 V AC Range 20 10 20 10 47 5 to 63 Hz Deactivated burden lt 6W lt 6VA Maximum burden lt 11W lt 25VA lt 10 A for 10 ms lt 28 A for 100 us Acceptable momentary outages 10 ms 10 ms Inrush current lt 15 A for first half cycle Current 4 20 mA 0 20 mA 0 10 mA Load impedance lt 600 Q wiring included Accuracy 0 50 1 According to configuration 2 Relay outputs O1 O2 O11 contact comply with clause 6 7 of standard C37 90 30 A 200 ms 2000 operations Schneider amp Electric 6 63230 216 219 B1 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Introduction Environmental Characteristics Emission Tests Disturbing field emission IEC 60255 25 EN 55022 A Conducted disturbance emission IEC 60255 25 EN 55022 B Immunity Tests Radiated Disturbances Immunity to radiated fields ANSI C37 90 2 1995 35 V m 25 MHz 1 GHz IEC 61000 4 3 Ill 10 V m 80 MHz 1 GHz IEC 61000 4 3 10 V m 80 MHz 2 GHz Electrostatic discharge ANSI C37 90 3 8 kV air 4 kV contact IEC 60255 22 2 8kV air 6kV contact Immunity to magnetic fields at network frequency IEC 61000 4 8 IV 30 A m continuous 300 A m 13 s Immunity Tests Conducted Disturbances Immunity to conducted RF disturbances IEC 60255 22 6 10V Fast transient bursts ANSI C37 90 1 4 kV 2 5 kHz IEC 61000 22 2 AorB 4 kV 2 5 kHz 2 IV 5kHz IEC 61000 4 4 IV 4kV 2 5 kHz 1 MHz damped oscilla
117. 0 ms lt T lt 12 5 s or TMS Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Accuracy Definite time t gt 100 ms 2 or from 10 ms to 25 ms IDMT Class 5 or from 10 ms to 25 ms Timer Hold Delay T1 Definite time timer hold 0 0 05 to 300 s IDMT 0 5 to 20 s Characteristic Times Operation time pick up lt 75 ms to 2 Is typically 65 ms inst lt 90 ms to 2 Is confirmed instantaneous typically 75 ms Overshoot time lt 40 ms 2 Setting ranges in TMS Time Multiplier Setting mode Inverse SIT and IEC SIT A Very inverse VIT and IEC VIT B Very inverse LTI and IEC LTI B Ext inverse EIT and IEC EIT C IEEE moderately inverse IEEE very inverse IEEE extremely inverse IAC inverse IAC very inverse IAC extremely inverse Reset time 0 04 to 4 20 lt 50 ms for T1 0 0 07 to 8 33 0 01 to 0 93 0 13 to 15 47 0 42 to 51 86 0 73 to 90 57 1 24 to 154 32 0 34 to 42 08 0 61 to 75 75 1 08 to 134 4 3 Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC IEEE and IAC types 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider Gf Electric 63230 216 219 B1 73 DE50454 DE50455 DE80150 Protection characteristic angle Or 0 tripping zone Tripping characteristic of protection function 67N type 1 00 0 tripping zone Protection function 67N type 1 00 0 tripping characteristics Van Vbn x external VT CSH ZSCT Ir Ir cos gr 8r
118. 00h no read requeste frame has yet been formulated This is especially true when Sepam is energized The other words are not significant m FFFFh the request frame has been processed but the results in the reply zone are not yet available It is necessary to repeat reply frame reading The other words are not significant The words that follow the exchange word make up the data zone Since the configuration and data files are adjacent a frame may contain the edn of the configuration and the beginning of the data file of a record The remote monitoring and control system software must reconstruct the files in accordance with the transmitted number of usable bytes and the size of the files indicated in the identification zone Acknowledging a Transfer To inform Sepam that a record block that it has just read has been received correctly the master must write the number of the last exchange that it has carried out in the exchange number field and set the number of usable bytes in the data zone of the exchange word to zero Sepam only increments the exchange number if new acquisition bursts are present Rereading the Identification Zone To ensure that the record has not been modified during its transfer by a new record the master rereads the contents of the identification zone and ensures that the date of the recovered record is still present Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Gf Electric M
119. 0266 R 3 4 32NS 1V Phase to neutral voltage Ven 0268 R 3 4 32NS 1V Residual voltage Vr 026A R 3 4 32NS 1V Positive sequence voltage V1 026C R 3 4 32NS 1V Negative sequence voltage V2 026E R 3 4 32NS 1V Frequency 0270 R 3 4 32NS 0 01 Hz Active power P 0272 R 3 4 325 1 kW Reactive power Q 0274 R 3 4 32S 1 kvar Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric 63230 216 219 B1 131 Modbus Communication Data Addresses and Encoding Switchgear Diagnosis Zone Switchgear Diagnosis Word Address Access Modbus Function Format Unit Enabled Initial value of cumulative breaking current 0290 R 3 4 32NS 1 kA Cumulative breaking current 0 lt I lt 2 IN 0292 R 3 4 32NS 1 KA Cumulative breaking current 2 IN lt I lt 5IN 0294 R 3 4 32NS 1 kA Cumulative breaking current 5 IN lt I lt 10 IN 0296 R 3 4 32NS 1 kA2 Cumulative breaking current 0298 R 3 4 32NS 1 kA 10 IN lt I lt 40 In Cumulative breaking current I gt 40 IN 029A R 3 4 32NS 1 kA Cumulative breaking current 029C R 3 4 32NS 1 kA2 Reserved 029E Number of operations 02A0 R 3 4 32NS 1 If MES114 Operating time 02A2 R 3 4 32NS 1 ms With MES114 Charging time 02A4 R 3 4 32NS 1ms With MES114 Configuration and Application Zone Configuration and Application Word Address Access Modbus Function Format Unit Enabled Type of application 02CC R 3 Name
120. 0434 0 0395 0 0361 80 0 2662 0 2505 0 2362 0 2231 0 1807 0 1495 0 1260 0 1076 0 0931 0 0813 0 0717 0 0637 0 0570 0 0513 0 0464 0 0422 0 0385 85 0 2855 0 2685 0 2530 0 2389 0 1931 0 1597 0 1344 0 1148 0 0992 0 0867 0 0764 0 0678 0 0607 0 0546 0 0494 0 0449 0 0410 90 0 3051 0 2868 0 2701 0 2549 0 2057 0 1699 0 1429 0 1219 0 1054 0 092 0 0811 0 0720 0 0644 0 0579 0 0524 0 0476 0 0435 95 0 3251 0 3054 0 2875 0 2712 0 2185 0 1802 0 1514 0 1292 0 1116 0 0974 0 0858 0 0761 0 0681 0 0612 0 0554 0 0503 0 0459 100 0 3456 0 3244 0 3051 0 2877 0 2314 0 1907 0 1601 0 1365 0 1178 0 1028 0 0905 0 0803 0 0718 0 0645 0 0584 0 0530 0 0484 105 0 3664 0 3437 0 3231 0 3045 0 2445 0 2012 0 1688 0 1438 0 1241 0 1082 0 0952 0 0845 0 0755 0 0679 0 0614 0 0558 0 0509 110 0 3877 0 3634 0 3415 0 3216 0 2578 0 2119 0 1776 0 1512 0 1304 0 1136 0 1000 0 0887 0 0792 0 0712 0 0644 0 0585 0 0534 115 0 4095 0 3835 0 3602 0 3390 0 2713 0 2227 0 1865 0 1586 0 1367 0 1191 0 1048 0 0929 0 0830 0 0746 0 0674 0 0612 0 0559 120 0 4317 0 4041 0 3792 0 3567 0 2849 0 2336 0 1954 0 1661 0 1431 0 1246 0 1096 0 0972 0 0868 0 0780 0 0705 0 0640 0 0584 125 0 4545 0 4250 0 3986 0 3747 0 2988 0 2446 0 2045 0 1737 0 1495 0 1302 0 1144 0 1014 0 0905 0 0813 0 0735 0 0667 0 0609 130 0 4778 0 4465 0 4184 0 3930 0 3128 0 2558 0 2136 0 1813 0 156 0 1358 0 1193 0 1057 0 0943 0 0847 0 0766 0 0695 0 0634 135 0 5016 0 4683 0 4386 0 4117 0 3270 0 2671 0 2228 0 1890 0 1625 0 1414 0 1242 0 1100 0 0982 0 0881 0 0796 0 0723 0 0659
121. 065 sec 34 min With a setting of T1 34 min the tripping time is obtained based on a cold state point 2 In this case it is equal to t T1 0 3216 gt t gt 665 sec i e 11 min which is compatible with the thermal resistance of the motor when cold The negative sequence factor is calculated using the equation defined on page 50 The parameters of the second thermal overload relay do not need to be set They are not considered by default Example 3 The following data are available m motor thermal resistance in the form of hot and cold curves see solid line curves in Figure 1 m cooling time constant T2 m maximum steady state current Imax IB 1 1 The thermal overload parameters are determined in the same way as in the previous example Setting Tripping Set Point Es2 Es2 Imax IB 120 Setting Alarm Set Point Es1 Es1 90 I IB 0 95 The time constant T1 is calculated to trip the thermal overload protection after 100 s point 1 With t T1 0 069 I IB 2 and Es2 120 gt T1 100s 0 069 1449 sec 24 min The tripping time starting from the cold state is equal to t T1 0 3567 t 24 min 0 3567 513 s point 2 This tripping time is too long since the limit for this overload current is 400 s point 2 If the time constant T1 is lowered the thermal overload protection will trip earlier below point 2 The risk that motor starting when hot will not be possible also exists in this case
122. 1 software can be used in English French or Spanish The language is selected at the top of the window Using SFT2841 in Disconnected Mode Disconnected mode allows you to prepare parameters and settings files for Sepam Series 20 Series 40 and Series 80 prior to commissioning The parameter and protection setting files prepared in disconnected mode will be downloaded later to the Sepam units in connected mode m To create a new setting file click onthe family Series 20 Series 40 or Series 80 icon for the relevant Sepam icon for the relevant Sepam a m To open an existing setting file click on the family Series 20 Series 40 or Series 80 Using SFT2841 Connected to a Single Sepam Unit The SFT2841 software is connected to a single Sepam unit mode during commissioning to upload download and modify Sepam parameters and settings This connection also provides all the measurements and supporting data available for commissioning The PC loaded with the SFT2841 software is connected to the port on the front panel of Sepam via an RS232 port using the CCA783 cable To open the parameter and protection setting file on the Sepam once it is connected to the PC click on the a icon Using SFT2841 Connected to a Sepam Network SFT2841 performs the following functions when connected to a Sepam network and used during operation m To manage the protection system m To che
123. 114 External tripping a a 121 External tripping b 122 External tripping c 123 Buchholz gas tripping E 121 Thermostat tripping 122 Buchholz gas alarm E 123 Thermostat alarm u 124 Block remote control u 125 SF6 u E 7 126 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 97 lectric Control and Monitoring Circuit Breaker Contactor Control Functions ANSI Code 94 69 Description Sepam is used to control breaking devices equipped with different types of closing and tripping contacts m circuit breakers with NO or NC trip contacts parameter setting of O1 in the front of the advanced UMI or using SFT2841 m latching contactors with NO trip contacts Integrated Circuit Breaker Contactor Control This function controls the breaking device It is coordinated with the recloser and zone selective interlocking functions and includes the anti pumping function It performs the following operations according to the parameter setting m trip output O1 by O protection unit units configured to trip the circuit breaker zone selective interlocking remote control via the communication link external protection open command by logic input m close output O11 by o recloser o remote control via the communication link remote control may be blocked by the block remote control logic input o closing control by logic input m Block output O2 closing by o trip circuit fault
124. 12 m Logic input output assignment 113 blocking reception 1 114 blocking reception 2 O3 send blocking information BI1 012 send blocking information Bl2 m 67 67N unit 1 tripping direction line m 67 67N unit 2 tripping direction bus Sepam S42 no R21 m Logic input output assignment 113 blocking reception 1 O3 send blocking information BI1 O12 send blocking information Bl2 m 67 67N unit 1 tripping direction line m 67 67N unit 2 tripping direction bus 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Control and Monitoring Zone Selective Interlocking Functions ANSI Code 68 Substation with Two Parallel Mains Application Substations supplied by two or more parallel mains may be protected using Sepam S42 or Sepam T42 by a combination of directional phase 67 and ground fault 67N protection functions with the zone selective interlocking function MT11211 feeders 2 direction of 67 67N protection functions A direction of blocking signals Note The NO references are to output contacts program logic setting not the state of the circuit breaker The breaker status for all breakers above is CLOSED To keep both mains from tripping when a fault ocurs upstream from one main the main protection devices must operate as follows m protection 67 of the faulty main detects the fault current in the line direction the protection tripping direction o sends a blocking inf
125. 19 32 16 51 15 34 12 56 10 53 9 00 8 21 784 755 7 00 652 6 11 12 IB cont d 80 85 90 95 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 K cont d 5 74 542 513 487 464 424 3 90 3 61 3 37 3 15 296 280 265 252 240 2 29 12 IB cont d 22 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 K cont d 2 14 2 10 2 01 1 94 1 86 1 80 1 74 1 68 1 627 1 577 1 53 1 485 1 444 1 404 1 367 1 332 12 IB cont d 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 K cont d 1 298 1 267 1 236 1 18 1 167 1 154 1 13 1 105 1 082 1 06 1 04 1 02 1 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 47 amp Electric Protection Negative Sequence Overvoltage ANSI Code 47 Operation The protection function is active if the negative sequence component V2 of the voltages is above the set point Vs2 It includes a definite time delay T MT10546 The the three phase voltages determine the negative sequence voltage gt 12 22 gt V2 zVan a Vbn aVcn or gt 1 gt V2 g Vab aVbc Zr with a e 3 This protection funciton only operates with connections VanVbnVcn Vab Vbc Vr and Vab Vbc Block Diagram Vab 5 Voe V2 gt Vs2 70 time delayed output a pick up signal Characteristics Vs2 Set Point Setting 1 to 50 V p Accuracy 2 for V2 gt 10 V p 5 for V2 lt 10 Vp Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 97 2 5 at V2 gt 10 Vip Time
126. 2 Ultra inverse time UIT 1 2 RI curve 1 IEC standard inverse time SIT A IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI B IEC extremely inverse time EIT C IEEE moderately inverse IEC D IEEE very inverse IEC E IEEE extremely inverse IEC F IAC inverse oa 34 af oa a a a IAC very inverse IAC extremely inverse 1 The curve equations are given in the chapter entitled IDMT Protection Functions The function takes into account current variations during the time delay interval For currents with a very large amplitude the protection function has a definite time characteristic m ifl gt 20 Is tripping time is the time that corresponds to 20 Is m ifl gt 40 IN tripping time is the time that corresponds to 40 IN In current transformer rated current defined when the general settings are made Block Diagram pick up signal and zone selective interlocking DE50508 ob time delayec Confirmation optional output Timer Hold Delay The function includes an adjustable timer hold delay T1 m definite time timer hold for all the tripping curves gt Is time delayed output l gt Is pick up signal MT10541 Lila value of internal time delay counter L Le r T1 Ti e T1 Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 59 amp Electric Protection Phase Overcurrent ANSI Code 50 51 m IDMT for IEC IEEE and IAC curves
127. 2 kg On symmetrical DIN rail 13 F to 158 F 25 C to 70 C Same characteristics as Sepam base units Current Scaling no data input checking 4 20 mA 0 20 mA 0 10 mA Minimum value Maximum value lt 600 Q including wiring 0 5 Load impedance Accuracy 0 1A 1V Phase and residual currents Phase to neutral and phase to phase voltages Power factor Remote setting via communication link 0 01 Frequency 0 01 Hz Thermal capacity used 1 Temperatures 1 C 1 F Active power 0 1kW Reactive power 0 1 kvar Apparent power 0 1 kVA Description and Dimensions A Terminal block for analog output RJ45 socket to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cable RJ45 socket to link up the next remote module with a CCA77x cable according to application Grounding terminal 1 Jumper for impedance matching with load resistor Rc to be set to m Re if the module is not the last interlinked module default position m Rec if the module is the last interlinked module Connection 1 70 mm 2 8 in with CCA77x cable connected Connecting the Grounding Terminal By tinned copper braid with cross section gt AWG 10 6 mm or cable with MSA141 cross section gt AWG 12 2 5 mm and length lt 7 9 in 200 mm equipped with a 0 16 in 4 mm ring lug Check the tightness maximum tig
128. 219 B1 145 amp Electric Modbus Communication 146 63230 216 219 B1 Remote Settings Access Reply Frame The reply sent back by Sepam is the same as the remote reading reply frame It fits into a zone with a maximum length of 125 words at the address 1E00h or 2000h and is composed of the effective settings of the function following a semantic check 1E00h 1E7Ch 2000h 207Ch B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 BO9 B08 BO7 BO6 BOS B04 BO3 B02 BO1 BOO Function code Unit number Settings This zone is read by a read n words operation function 3 at the address 1E00h or 2000h The length of the exchange may affect m first word only validity test m maximum size of the zone 125 words m usable size of the zone determined by the function being addressed However reading must always begin at the first word in the zone Any other address triggers an exception reply incorrect address The first word in the zone function code and unit number has the same values as those described for the remote reading reply frame m xxyy with o function code xx different from 00 and FFh o unit number yy different from FFh The settings are available and confirmed The word is a copy of the request frame The zone contents remain valid until the next request is made m 0000h no request frame has yet been formulated This is espcially the
129. 2A CT ZSCT ACE990 Ir gt Isr DE80152 time delayed output Lim 1 lt r lt Lim 2 Van Vbn pick up signal and to zone selective interlocking Ven Vr gt Ver external a Definite Time Operation Isr is the operation set point expressed in Amps and T is the protection operation time delay tA DE50398 Definite time protection principle 80 63230 216 219 B1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Protection 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Directional Ground Fault ANSI Code 67N 67NC Characteristics Type 3 Measurement Origin Setting range Angle at Start of Tripping Zone Lim 1 Setting 0 to 359 Resolution 1 Accuracy 3 Angle at End of Tripping Zone Lim 2 Setting 0 to 359 1 Resolution 1 Accuracy 3 Tripping Direction Setting Bus line Isr Setting Setting With CSH zero sequence 0 1 A to 30 A CT 2 A rating With 1 A CT 0 05 Inr lt Isr lt 15 Inr min 0 1 A With zero sequence CT 0 05 Inr lt Isr lt 15 Inr min 0 1 A ACE990 range 1 Resolution 0 1 Aor 1 digit Accuracy 5 Drop out pick up ratio 2 90 Vsr Set Point Setting Calculated Vr sum of 3 voltages 2 Vp lt Vsr lt 80 V p Measured Vr external VT 0 6 Vp lt Vsr lt 80 V p Resolution 0 1 for Vsr lt 10 1 for Vsr gt 10 Accuracy 5 Drop out pick up ratio gt
130. 3 overvoltage protection unit 1 data 113 protection blocking The data numbers are detailed in the table which follows m outputs to program logic o V_TRIPCB circuit breaker tripping by the circuit breaker control function Used to complete circuit breaker tripping conditions and activate the recloser o V_CLOSECB circuit breaker closing by the circuit breaker control function Used to generate a circuit breaker close command based on a particular condition o V_BLOCKCLOSE block circuit breaker closing by the circuit breaker control function Used to add circuit breaker closing block conditions o V_FLAGREC data saved in disturbance recording Used to save a specific logical status in addition to those already present in disturbance recording Local Variables Variables designed for intermediary calculations They are not available outside the logic equation editor They may appear on the left or right of the assignment sign There are 31 variables assigned as VL1 to VL31 Two constants are also predefined K_1 always equal to 1 and K_0 always equal to 0 116 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Control and Monitoring Functions Logic Equations Details of Protection Inputs Outputs The table below lists the input output data available for each protection function The SFT2841 software includes a data input assistance tool which may be used to quickly identify
131. 30 216 219 B1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric DE80144 DE80145 DE51826 Installation Base Unit Other Phase Current Input Connection Schemes al Ic CCA630 Description CCA634 The simplified schematic shows a basic connection of three 1A or 5A sensors to the CCA630 or CCA634 connector Measuring the three phase currents provides for calculating residual current Parameters Sensor type 5ACTor1ACT Number of CTs la Ib Ic Rated current IN 1 A to 6250 A CCA630 Description CCA634 Connection of two 1A or 5A sensors to the CCA630 or CCA634 connector Measuring phase a and phase c currents is sufficient to ensure all the phase current based protection functions Phase current Ib is only assessed for metering functions assuming that Ir 0 This arrangement does provide for calculating residual current 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Parameters Sensor type 5 ACT or 1 ACT Number of CTs la Ic Rated current IN 1 A to 6250 A Description Connecting three Low Power Current Transducer LPCT type sensors to the CCA670 connector The connection of only one or two LPCT sensors is not allowed and causes Sepam to go into fail safe position Measuring the three phase currents provides for calculating residual current Parameters Sensor type LPCT Number of CTs la Ib Ic Rate
132. 4 160 0 0276 0 0253 0 0207 0 0173 0 0147 0 0126 0 0109 0 0096 0 0085 0 0075 0 0067 0 0061 0 0039 0 0027 0 0020 0 0015 165 0 0299 0 0275 0 0225 0 0187 0 0159 0 0136 0 0118 0 0104 0 0092 0 0082 0 0073 0 0066 0 0042 0 0029 0 0021 0 0016 170 0 0323 0 0296 0 0242 0 0202 0 0171 0 0147 0 0128 0 0112 0 0099 0 0088 0 0079 0 0071 0 0045 0 0031 0 0023 0 0018 175 0 0346 0 0317 0 0260 0 0217 0 0183 0 0157 0 0137 0 0120 0 0106 0 0094 0 0084 0 0076 0 0048 0 0034 0 0025 0 0019 180 0 0370 0 0339 0 0277 0 0231 0 0196 0 0168 0 0146 0 0128 0 0113 0 0101 0 0090 0 0081 0 0052 0 0036 0 0026 0 0020 185 0 0393 0 0361 0 0295 0 0246 0 0208 0 0179 0 0155 0 0136 0 0120 0 0107 0 0096 0 0086 0 0055 0 0038 0 0028 0 0021 190 0 0417 0 0382 0 0313 0 0261 0 0221 0 0189 0 0164 0 0144 0 0127 0 0113 0 0101 0 0091 0 0058 0 0040 0 0030 0 0023 195 0 0441 0 0404 0 0330 0 0275 0 0233 0 0200 0 0173 0 0152 0 0134 0 0119 0 0107 0 0096 0 0061 0 0043 0 0031 0 0024 200 0 0464 0 0426 0 0348 0 0290 0 0245 0 0211 0 0183 0 0160 0 0141 0 0126 0 0113 0 0102 0 0065 0 0045 0 0033 0 0025 58 63230 216 219 B1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric MT10911 Protection Description The phase overcurrent function encompasses two groups of four units Group A and Group B respectively The mode of switching from one group to the other is determined by parameter setting m by remote control TC3 TC4 m by logic input 113 113 0 group A 113
133. 4 2228 2404 2428 R 3 Disturb rec exchange zone 2300 2500 R W 3 6 16 Disturbance recording data 2301 237C 2501 257C R 3 See Disturbance recording chapter 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 133 ectric Modbus Communication Data Addresses and Encoding Data Encoding For all formats If a measurement exceeds the maximum permissible value for the related format the value read for the measurement will be the maximum permissible value for the format 16NS format The information is encoded in a 16 bit word in binary format absolute value unsigned The 0 bit bO is the least significant bit in the word 16S format signed measurements temperatures The information is encoded in a 16 bit word as a complement of 2 Example m 0001 represents 1 m FFFF represents 1 32NS or 2 x 16NS format The information is encoded in two 16 bit words in binary format unsigned The first word is the most significant word 32S format The information is encoded as a complement of 2 in two words The first word is the most significant word m 0000 0001 represents 1 m FFFF FFFF represents 1 B format Rank i bit in the word with i between 0 and F Examples F E D Cc B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TS1to Word address 0101 TS16 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit address 101x TS49 to Word address 0104 TS64 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 Bit address 104x TC1 to Word a
134. 40 Using Remote Control Commands Remote control commands are pre assigned to protection control and metering functions They canbe 1 Tripping E E E E E E u carried out in two modes 2 Closing E E E E E 8 E m direct mode 3 Swtiching to setting group A E E E E E E E m confirmed SBO select before operate mode 4 Switching to setting group B a a ee g 5 Sepam reset E E E E 8 8 3 Itis possible to block all remote control commands with 6 ae demand eurrent Zero reset a lt a es aa a a one logic input assigned to the function block remote 7 _ Block thermal protection Fr ge control 8 Block disturbance recording triggering OPG E E E E E 8 3 a 9 Confirm disturbance recording triggering OPG E E E E E 8 3 The logic input parameter setting can be done in two 10 Manual disturbance recording triggering OPG E E E E E E 8 modes g 11 Enable recloser E 8 E m block if the input 2 ai 1 ER 12 Disable recloser E u m block if the input is at 0 negative input 13 Confirm thermal protection E ane 14 Reset undercurrent protection u The device tripping and closing and recloser enabling and disabling remote control commands are acknowledged if the CB control function is confirmed and if the inputs required for that logic are present on the MES114 or MES108 optional module 15 Reserved 16 Reserved 1 OPG French acronym for disturbance recording Remote
135. 41 software tool to factor the real state of a used breaking device Characteristics Cumulative Breaking Current kA Range 0 to 65535 kA Unit primary kA 2 Resolution 1 kA Accuracy 0 10 1 digit Number of Operations Range 0 to 65535 1 At IN in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 29 amp Electric Metering 30 63230 216 219 B1 Switchgear Diagnosis Functions Operating Time Charging Time Operating Time Operation This function gives the value of the opening operating time of a breaking device and change of status of the device open position contact connected to the 111 input 2 The function is blocked when the input is set for AC voltage The value is saved in case auxiliary power is lost Readout The measurement may be accessed via m advanced UMI display unit by pressing the amp key m aPC with SFT2841 software m acommunication link 1 Refer to switchgear documentation for use of this information 2 Optional MES module 3 Optional MES114E or MES114F modules Characteristics Measurement range 20 to 100 Unit ms Accuracy 1 ms typical Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1ms Charging time Operation This function gives the value of the breaking device operating mechanism charging time determined according to the device closed position status change contact and the end of charging contact connected to the Sep
136. 5 V p with VT 230 v3 Connnection Conditions Type of connection Van Vbn Vcn Vab Vab Vbc Vab Vr Vab Vbc Vr Phase to neutral Yes No No No Yes operation Phase to phase Yes on Vab only Yes on Vab only Yes operation 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 67 lectric Protection 68 63230 216 219 B1 Neutral Voltage Displacement ANSI Code 59N Operation The protection function enables if the residual voltage Vr is above a set point Vsr gt gt gt gt with Vr Van Vbn Vcn It includes a definite time delay T The residual voltage is either calculated from the three phase voltages or measured by an external Voltage Transformer The protection function operates for connections VanVbnVcn VabVbc Vr and Vab Vr Block Diagram Van Vbn 93 Vcn DE50462 _vr gt vsr u time delayed output external VT BE pick up signal Characteristics Vsr Set Point Setting 2 to 80 V p if Vsr sum of 3Vs 2 to 80 Vp ifVsr V sV3 5 to 80 Vp if Vsr Vs V3 Accuracy 2 or 0 002 V p Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 97 1 or gt 1 0 001 V p Vsr x 100 Time Delay T Setting 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic Times Operation time pick up lt 35 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 40ms 1 IN reference conditions IEC
137. 5 1 60 1 65 1 70 1 75 1 80 Es 105 0 6690 0 2719 0 1685 0 1206 0 0931 0 0752 0 0627 0 0535 0 0464 0 0408 0 0363 0 0326 0 0295 0 0268 0 0245 0 0226 110 3 7136 0 6466 0 3712 0 2578 0 1957 0 1566 0 1296 0 1100 0 0951 0 0834 0 0740 0 0662 0 0598 0 0544 0 0497 0 0457 115 1 2528 0 6257 0 4169 0 3102 0 2451 0 2013 0 1699 0 1462 0 1278 0 1131 0 1011 0 0911 0 0827 0 0755 0 0693 120 3 0445 0 9680 0 6061 0 4394 0 3423 0 2786 0 2336 0 2002 0 1744 0 1539 0 1372 0 1234 0 1118 0 1020 0 0935 125 1 4925 0 8398 0 5878 0 4499 0 3623 0 3017 0 2572 0 2231 0 1963 0 1747 0 1568 0 1419 0 1292 0 1183 130 2 6626 1 1451 0 7621 0 5705 0 4537 0 3747 0 3176 0 2744 0 2407 0 2136 0 1914 0 1728 0 1572 0 1438 135 1 5870 0 9734 0 7077 0 5543 0 4535 0 3819 0 3285 0 2871 0 2541 0 2271 0 2048 0 1860 0 1699 140 2 3979 1 2417 0 8668 0 6662 0 5390 0 4507 0 3857 0 3358 0 2963 0 2643 0 2378 0 2156 0 1967 145 1 6094 1 0561 0 7921 0 6325 0 5245 0 4463 0 3869 0 3403 0 3028 0 2719 0 2461 0 2243 150 2 1972 1 2897 0 9362 0 7357 0 6042 0 5108 0 4408 0 3864 0 3429 0 3073 0 2776 0 2526 155 3 8067 1 5950 1 1047 0 8508 0 6909 0 5798 0 4978 0 4347 0 3846 0 3439 0 3102 0 2817 160 2 0369 1 3074 0 9808 0 7857 0 6539 0 5583 0 4855 0 4282 0 3819 0 3438 0 3118 165 2 8478 1 5620 1 1304 0 8905 0 7340 0 6226 0 5390 0 4738 0 4215 0 3786 0 3427 170 1 9042 1 3063 1 0076 0 8210 0 6914 0 5955 0 5215 0 4626 0 4146 0 3747 175 2 4288 1 5198 1 1403 0 9163 0 7652 0 6554 0 5717 0 5055 0 4520 0 4077 180 3 5988 1 7918 1 2933 1 0217
138. 50 Hz 60 Hz Range 25 to 65 Hz Accuracy 0 02 Hz Display format 3 significant digits Resolution On SFT2841 0 01 Hz On Sepam display 0 1 Hz Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 At Vip in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Gf Electric Metering 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Active Reactive amp Apparent Power Operation This function gives the power values m P active power V3 V 1cos p m Q reactive power V3 V I _sin m S apparent power v3 V 1 It measures the active and reactive power in 3 wire 3 phase arrangements by means of the two wattmeter method The powers are obtained based on the phase to phase voltages Vab and Vbc and the phase currents la and Ic When only the voltage Vab is connected P and Q are calculated assuming balanced system voltage The following conditionis are assumed for standard practice m forthe outgoing for a feeder circuit O power exported by the bus is positive O power supplied to the bus is negative Hy direction of flow m forthe incoming for a feeder circuit O power supplied to the bus is positive O power exported by the bus is negative direction j of flow Readout The measurements may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the O key m the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software m the communication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 o
139. 60255 6 2 Vsr is one of the general settings Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Protection Starts per Hour ANSI Code 66 Operation This is a three phase function It enables when the number of starts reaches the following limits m maximum number of starts Nt allowed per period of time P m maximum allowed number of consecutive hot starts Nh m maximum allowed number of consecutive cold starts Ne Starting is detected when the current consumed becomes greater than 10 of the IB current The number of consecutive starts is the number of starts counted during the last P Nt minutes Nt is the number of starts allowed per period The motor hot state corresponds to overshooting the fixed set point 50 heat rise of the thermal overload function When the motor re accelerates it undergoes a stress similar to starting without the current first passing through a value less than 10 of IB The number of starts is not incremented in this instance It is possible to increment the number of starts when a re acceleration occurs by a logic data input logic input motor re acceleration The stop start time delay T may be used to block starting after a stop until the delay has elapsed Using Circuit Breaker Closed Data In synchronous motor applications it is advisable to connect the circuit breaker closed data to a logic input in order to enable more precise detection of starts I
140. 628 82 899 1 5 5 788 18 000 79 200 179 548 1 736 5 336 23 479 55 791 3 891 17 539 36 687 2 0 3 376 9 000 33 000 67 691 1 427 3 152 10 199 23 421 2 524 7 932 16 178 2 5 2 548 6 000 18 857 35 490 1 290 2 402 6 133 13 512 2 056 4 676 9 566 3 0 2 121 4 500 12 375 21 608 1 212 2 016 4 270 8 970 1 792 3 249 6 541 3 5 1 858 3 600 8 800 14 382 1 161 1 777 3 242 6 465 1 617 2 509 4 872 4 0 1 676 3 000 6 600 10 169 1 126 1 613 2 610 4 924 1 491 2 076 3 839 4 5 1 543 2 571 5 143 7 513 1 101 1 492 2 191 3 903 1 396 1 800 3 146 5 0 1 441 2 250 4 125 5 742 1 081 1 399 1 898 3 190 1 321 1 610 2 653 5 5 1 359 2 000 3 385 4 507 1 065 1 325 1 686 2 671 1 261 1 473 2 288 6 0 1 292 1 800 2 829 3 616 1 053 1 264 1 526 2 281 1 211 1 370 2 007 6 5 1 236 1 636 2 400 2 954 1 042 1 213 1 402 1 981 1 170 1 289 1 786 7 0 1 188 1 500 2 063 2 450 1 033 1 170 1 305 1 744 1 135 1 224 1 607 7 5 1 146 1 385 1 792 2 060 1 026 1 132 1 228 1 555 1 105 1 171 1 460 8 0 1 110 1 286 1 571 1 751 1 019 1 099 1 164 1 400 1 078 1 126 1 337 8 5 1 078 1 200 1 390 1 504 1 013 1 070 1 112 1 273 1 055 1 087 1 233 9 0 1 049 1 125 1 238 1 303 1 008 1 044 1 068 1 166 1 035 1 054 1 144 9 5 1 023 1 059 1 109 1 137 1 004 1 021 1 031 1 077 1 016 1 026 1 067 10 0 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 000 10 5 0 979 0 947 0 906 0 885 0 996 0 981 0 973 0 934 0 985 0 977 0 941 11 0 0 959 0 900 0 825 0 787 0 993 0 963 0 950 0 877 0 972 0 957 0 888 11 5 0 941 0 857 0 754 0 704 0 990 0 947 0 92
141. 7 Reserved 8 Reserved 9 Shot 1 activation mode 10 Shot 1 dead time 10 ms 11 Reserved 12 Reserved 13 Shot 2 3 4 activation mode 14 Shot 2 dead time 10 ms 15 Shot 3 dead time 10 ms 16 Shot 4 dead time 10 ms 17 Reserved 18 Reserved ANSI 81H Overfrequency Function number 13xx relay 1 xx 01 relay 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 3 Activity 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Fs set point 0 1 Hz 7 Tripping time delay 10 ms 8 Reserved 9 Vs set point VLP 10 Reserved 11 Reserved ANSI 81L Underfrequency Function number 14xx relay 1 xx 01 to relay 4 xx 04 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 3 Activity 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Fs set point 0 1 Hz 7 Tripping time delay 10 ms 8 Restraint 0 none 1 on frequency variation Vs set point VLP 10 Blocked threshold on frequency variation 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 ectric 157 Modbus Communication Remote Settings Access Other Protection Settings ANSI 60 CT Supervision Function number 2601 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Reserved 2 Reserved 3 Activity 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Check loss of 3 V 2 V 7 Test current 8 Use V2 12 criterion 9 Behavior on 27 27S 27D 32P 32Q 0 none 1 block 47 51V 59 59N functions 10 Behavior on 67 function 0 non directional 1 block 11 Behavior on 67N function 0 non directio
142. 7 Residual voltage mode 0 None 1 23V 2 external VT V s v8 3 external VT V s 3 18 Type of cubicle 0 main 1 feeder 19 Increment active power 0 1 kKW h 20 Increment reactive power 0 1 kVAR Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Modbus Communication 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Remote Settings Access Protection Settings Protection settings are organized according to increasing ANSI codes ANSI 27 27S Undervoltage Function number 10xx relay 1 xx 01 relay 2 xx 02 Setting Data Latching Format Unit CB control Activity Reserved Reserved QO ny AJ OJ N Voltage mode 0 phase to neutral 1 phase to phase T Vus or V_ S set point Vulp or VinP 8 Tripping time delay 10 ms 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Reserved ANSI 27D Positive Sequence Undervoltage Function number 08xx relay 1 xx 01 relay 2 xx 02 Setting Data Latching Format Unit CB control Activity Reserved Reserved Vsd set point Tripping time delay Reserved Reserved Reserved 3 0 O N O Om AJ Vj N o Reserved ANSI 27R Remanent Undervoltage Function number 0901 Setting Data Latching Format Unit Reserved Activity Reserved Reserved Vis set point Tripping ti
143. 780 0 9365 0 8258 0 7366 0 6630 0 6012 0 5486 0 5032 0 4638 0 4292 0 3986 0 3714 0 3470 100 2 3755 1 7513 1 4112 1 1856 1 0217 0 8958 0 7956 0 7138 0 6455 0 5878 0 5383 0 4953 0 4578 0 4247 0 3953 0 3691 105 3 0445 2 0232 1 5796 1 3063 1 1147 0 9710 0 8583 0 7673 0 6920 0 6286 0 5746 0 5279 0 4872 0 4515 0 4199 0 3917 110 2 3979 1 7824 1 4435 1 2174 1 0524 0 9252 0 8238 0 7406 0 6712 0 6122 0 5616 0 5176 0 4790 0 4450 0 4148 115 3 0040 2 0369 1 6025 1 3318 1 1409 0 9970 0 8837 0 7918 0 7156 0 6514 0 5964 0 5489 0 5074 0 4708 0 4384 120 2 3792 1 7918 1 4610 1 2381 1 0742 0 9474 0 8457 0 7621 0 6921 0 6325 0 5812 0 5365 0 4973 0 4626 125 2 9037 2 0254 1 6094 1 3457 1 1580 1 0154 0 9027 0 8109 0 7346 0 6700 0 6146 0 5666 0 5245 0 4874 130 2 3308 1 7838 1 4663 1 2493 1 0885 0 9632 0 8622 0 7789 0 7089 0 6491 0 5975 0 5525 0 5129 135 2 7726 1 9951 1 6035 1 3499 1 1672 1 0275 0 9163 0 8253 0 7494 0 6849 0 6295 0 5813 0 5390 140 2 2634 1 7626 1 4618 1 2528 1 0962 0 9734 0 8740 0 7916 0 7220 0 6625 0 6109 0 5658 145 2 6311 1 9518 1 5877 1 3463 1 1701 1 0341 0 9252 0 8356 0 7606 0 6966 0 6414 0 5934 150 3 2189 2 1855 1 7319 1 4495 1 2498 1 0986 0 9791 0 8817 0 8007 0 7320 0 6729 0 6217 155 2 4908 1 9003 1 5645 1 3364 1 1676 1 0361 0 9301 0 8424 0 7686 0 7055 0 6508 160 2 9327 2 1030 1 6946 1 4313 1 2417 1 0965 0 9808 0 8860 0 8066 0 7391 0 6809 165 2 3576 1 8441 1 5361 1 3218 1 1609 1 0343 0 9316 0 8461 0 7739 0 7118 170 2 6999 2 0200 1 6532 1 4088 1 2296 1 0908 0 9793
144. 9 0 0267 0 0227 0 0196 0 0170 0 0150 0 0132 0 0118 0 0106 0 0095 0 0061 0 0042 0 0031 0 0024 100 0 0444 0 0408 0 0336 0 0282 0 0240 0 0206 0 0179 0 0157 0 0139 0 0124 0 0111 0 0101 0 0064 0 0045 0 0033 0 0025 105 0 0466 0 0429 0 0353 0 0296 0 0252 0 0217 0 0188 0 0165 0 0146 0 0130 0 0117 0 0106 0 0067 0 0047 0 0034 0 0026 110 0 0489 0 0450 0 0370 0 0310 0 0264 0 0227 0 0197 0 0173 0 0153 0 0137 0 0123 0 0111 0 0071 0 0049 0 0036 0 0028 115 0 0512 0 0471 0 0388 0 0325 0 0276 0 0237 0 0207 0 0181 0 0160 0 0143 0 0128 0 0116 0 0074 0 0051 0 0038 0 0029 120 0 0535 0 0492 0 0405 0 0339 0 0288 0 0248 0 0216 0 0189 0 0167 0 0149 0 0134 0 0121 0 0077 0 0053 0 0039 0 0030 125 0 0558 0 0513 0 0422 0 0353 0 0300 0 0258 0 0225 0 0197 0 0175 0 0156 0 0139 0 0126 0 0080 0 0056 0 0041 0 0031 130 0 0581 0 0534 0 0439 0 0368 0 0313 0 0269 0 0234 0 0205 0 0182 0 0162 0 0145 0 0131 0 0084 0 0058 0 0043 0 0033 135 0 0604 0 0555 0 0457 0 0382 0 0325 0 0279 0 0243 0 0213 0 0189 0 0168 0 0151 0 0136 0 0087 0 0060 0 0044 0 0034 140 0 0627 0 0576 0 0474 0 0397 0 0337 0 0290 0 0252 0 0221 0 0196 0 0174 0 0156 0 0141 0 0090 0 0062 0 0046 0 0035 145 0 0650 0 0598 0 0491 0 0411 0 0349 0 0300 0 0261 0 0229 0 0203 0 0181 0 0162 0 0146 0 0093 0 0065 0 0047 0 0036 150 0 0673 0 0619 0 0509 0 0426 0 0361 0 0311 0 0270 0 0237 0 0210 0 0187 0 0168 0 0151 0 0096 0 0067 0 0049 0 0038 155 0 0696 0 0640 0 0526 0 0440 0 0374 0 0321 0 0279 0 0245
145. 9 0 828 0 960 0 939 0 841 12 0 0 925 0 818 0 692 0 633 0 988 0 932 0 912 0 784 0 949 0 922 0 799 12 5 0 910 0 783 0 638 0 572 0 985 0 918 0 896 0 746 0 938 0 907 0 761 13 0 0 895 0 750 0 589 0 518 0 983 0 905 0 882 0 712 0 929 0 893 0 727 13 5 0 882 0 720 0 546 0 471 0 981 0 893 0 870 0 682 0 920 0 880 0 695 14 0 0 870 0 692 0 508 0 430 0 979 0 882 0 858 0 655 0 912 0 868 0 667 14 5 0 858 0 667 0 473 0 394 0 977 0 871 0 849 0 631 0 905 0 857 0 641 15 0 0 847 0 643 0 442 0 362 0 976 0 861 0 840 0 609 0 898 0 846 0 616 15 5 0 836 0 621 0 414 0 334 0 974 0 852 0 831 0 589 0 891 0 837 0 594 16 0 0 827 0 600 0 388 0 308 0 973 0 843 0 824 0 571 0 885 0 828 0 573 16 5 0 817 0 581 0 365 0 285 0 971 0 834 0 817 0 555 0 879 0 819 0 554 17 0 0 808 0 563 0 344 0 265 0 970 0 826 0 811 0 540 0 874 0 811 0 536 17 5 0 800 0 545 0 324 0 246 0 969 0 819 0 806 0 527 0 869 0 804 0 519 18 0 0 792 0 529 0 307 0 229 0 968 0 812 0 801 0 514 0 864 0 797 0 504 18 5 0 784 0 514 0 290 0 214 0 967 0 805 0 796 0 503 0 860 0 790 0 489 19 0 0 777 0 500 0 275 0 200 0 966 0 798 0 792 0 492 0 855 0 784 0 475 19 5 0 770 0 486 0 261 0 188 0 965 0 792 0 788 0 482 0 851 0 778 0 463 20 0 0 763 0 474 0 248 0 176 0 964 0 786 0 784 0 473 0 848 0 772 0 450 1 Values only suitable for IEC A B and C curves 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 91 ectric MT10528 Protection General Trip Curves Standard Inverse Time SIT Curve Extremely In
146. A 5P20 SVA 5P20 SVASP20 8 10 C100 80VA5P20 620 fpo Bova sP20 OVA 5P20 0 2 B 0 B01 ko pavas B02 froo __ BVAS5P20 5005 ova 5P20 BO 0400 __ pova 5P20 200 5 10006 HOVA 5P20 2000 B 1 CT ratio rule of thumb is to size primary to be 1 5 x connected load Example 600 5 CT for 400A load 2 Typical usual product offering from switchgear manufacturers in North Americe for 50 51 products 3 Highest listed VA in IEC 60044 is 30VA 4 Suitable for systems with X R 15 or small generator connected to bus Minimum for 87 protection 5 Not listed in C57 13 178 63230 216 219 B1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Installation CCA630 DE80051 CCA634 DE80059 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 1A 5A Current Transformers CCA630 CCA634 Connector Function Current transformers 1A or 5A connect to CCA630 or CCA634 connectors on the rear panel of Sepam m The CCA630 connects three phase current transformers to Sepam m The CCA634 connects three phase current transformers and a residual current transformer to Sepam The CCA630 and CCA634 connectors contain interposing ring CTs with through primaries which ensure impedance matching and isolation between the 1 A or 5 A circuits and Sepam when measuring phase and residual currents The connectors can be disconnected with the power on since disconnection does not open the CT secondary circuit
147. A613 5 DE80065 gt 3 haracteristics Power supply 115 230 V AC Protection by time delayed fuse 0 2 x 0 79 in 0 25 A rating 5 mm x 20 mm les CCA613 Remote Test Plug 3 D LPCT i Function Output Input The CCA613 test plug flush mounted on the front of the cubicle is equipped with a ACE917 Injection box 9 8 ft 3 meter cable to transfer data from the test plug integrated in the CCA670 4 Adapter 1Aor5A CCA671 interface connector on the rear panel of Sepam coasts Dimensions CCA670 in amp mm a 8 Sepam S g Accessory connection principle I 2 66 67 5 Y Front view with cover lifted Right side view CAUTION in 3 mm HAZARD OF CUTS S Trim the edges of the cut out plates to remove any u A jagged edges Failure to follow this instruction can cause serious injury 2 72 69 1 81 46 Cut out 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 183 lectric PE50032 Installation 7 A 4 x ex e gt CSH120 and CSH200 zero sequence CTs 184 63230 216 219 B1 CSH120 and CSH200 Zero Sequence CTs Function The specifically designed CSH120 and CSH200 zero sequence CTs are for direct zero sequence current measurement The only difference between them is the diameter Due to their low voltage insulation they can onl
148. Control of the Analog Output The analog output of the MSA141 module can be set up for remote control via the Modbus communication link word address 010F The usable range of the numerical value transmitted is defined by the min value and max value settings of the Direct Remote Control Command The remote control command is executed when it is written in the remote control word The program logic resets it to zero after the remote control command is acknowledged Confirmed SBO Remote Control Command select before operate In this mode remote control commands involve two steps m selection by the master of the command to be sent by writing the bit in the STC word and checking of the selection by rereading the word m execution of the command to be sent by writing the bit in the TC word The remote control command is executed if the bit in the STC word and the bit in the associated word are set the program logic resets the STC bit and TC bits to zero after the remote control command is acknowledged Deselection of the STC bit takes place m if the master deselects it by writing in the STC word m ifthe master selects write bit a bit other than the one already selected m if the master sets a bit in the TC word which does not match the selection In this case no remote control command is executed analog output This function is not affected by remote control block conditions 1 The only exception is the remote co
149. D logic AND m XOR exclusive OR V1 XOR V2 is equivalent to V1 AND NOT V2 OR V2 AND NOT V1 m assignment of a result m l start of a comment the characters on the right are not processed m the operations may be grouped between brackets Functions m x SR y z bistable with priority given to Set o xis setto 1 when y is equal to 1 O xis set to 0 when zis equal to 1 and y is equal to 0 o x is unchanged in the other cases LATCH x y latching of variables x y The variables are maintained constantly at 1 after having been set to 1 a first time They are reset to 0 after Sepam is set ay key external input or remote control command The LATCH function accepts as many parameters as the number of variables that the user wishes to latch It applies to the entire program whatever the position in the program For easier reading it is advisable to put LATCH at the start of the program Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 115 amp Electric Control and Monitoring Functions MT11042 MT11044 Logic Equations m x TON y t on delay timer The x variable follows the switching to 1 of the y variable with a delay t t in ms m x TOF y t off delay timer The x variable follows the switching to 0 of the y variable with a delay t tin ms m x PULSE d i n time tagger Used to generate n periodic pulses separated by a time interval i as of the starting time d o dis expressed as hour minute second o
150. D base o ON indicator on o N indicator on the base unit flashing including when the display is out of order off o indicator on the MET or MSA module faulty steadily on The display shows a partial fault message and indicates the type of fault by a code o code 1 inter module link fault o code 3 MET module unavailable o code 4 MSA module unavailable m Sepam with remote advanced UMI MX base DSM303 o ON indicator on o RK indicator on the base unit flashing o g indicator on the MET or MSA module faulty steadily on o the display indicates the type of fault by a code same as above Special case of faulty DSM303 o ON indicator on oO Q indicator on base unit flashing o BK indicator on DSM steadily on o display off This Sepam operating mode is also transmitted via the communication link RTD Fault Each temperature monitoring function when activated detects whether the RTD associated with the MET148 2 module is short circuited or disconnected When this is the case the alarm message RTD FAULT is generated Since this alarm is common to the 8 functions the identification of the faulty RTD or RTDs is obtained by looking up the measured values m measurement displayed if the sensor is short circuited T lt 35 C or 31 F m measurement displayed if the sensor is disconnected or T gt 205 C or 401 F Other Faults Specific faults indicated by a screen m DSM303 version incompatible if vers
151. Directional Ground Fault ANSI Code 67N 67NC Definite Time Operation Isr is the operation set point expressed in Amps and T is the protection operation time delay tA DE50398 Definite time protection principle Memory The time delay Trmem controls the detection of recurrent faults It also extends the transient pick up information thereby enabling the operation of the definite time delay even with faults that rapidly extinguish 2 ms and restrike periodically When a Petersen coil having no additional resistance is used tripping is protected by fault detection during the transient fault appearance with detection extended throughout the duration of the fault based on the Vr gt Vrmem criterion within the limit of Trmem With this type of application Trmem must be greater than T definite time delay Standard Setting The settings below are given for usual applications in the different grounding systems The shaded boxes represent default settings Isr set point Effectively Ungrounded Set according to coordination study Impedance Ground Set according to coordination study Compensated Neutral Set according to coordination study Characteristic angle Or 90 0 0 Time delay T Set according to Set according to Set according to coordination study coordination study coordination study Direction Line Line Line Vsr setpoint 2 of Vus 2 of Vus 2 of Vus Se
152. Do you want to Connection Series 20 Series 40 a Series 80 Welcome window Sepam Series 80 DE52069 N SA br CCA783 nr l SFT2841 connected to a single Sepam unit DE52241 Modem To supervisor l Modem S LAN E LAN ACE969 Sepam Series 20 ACE969 f ACE969 i SFT2841 connected to a Sepam network 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Sepam Series 40 Sepam Series 80 Schneider SFT2841 Setting amp Operating Software Welcome Window Description The SFT2841 welcome window opens when the program is launched It lets you choose the language for the SFT2841 screens and provides access to the Sepam parameter and protection setting files m In disconnected mode you can open or create a parameter and protection setting file for a Sepam Series 20 Series 40 or Series 80 m When connected to a single Sepam unit you can access the parameter and protection setting file for the Sepam unit connected to the PC m When connected to a Sepam network you can access the parameter and protection setting files for a group of Sepam units connected to the PC viaa communication network Language Options for SFT2841 Software SFT284
153. E extremely inverse 1 24 to 154 32 IAC inverse 0 34 to 42 08 IAC very inverse 0 61 to 75 75 IAC extremely inverse 1 08 to 134 4 4 Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC IEEE and IAC types 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider Directional Ground Fault ANSI Code 67N 67NC Characteristics Type 2 Measurement Origin Setting range Characteristic Angle Or Ir Setting 45 0 15 30 45 60 90 Accuracy 3 Tripping Direction Setting Bus line Isr Setting Definite time setting 0 1 Inr lt Isr lt 15 INr expressed in Amps Sum of CTs 0 1 Inr lt Isr lt 15 Inr With CSH sensor 2 A rating 0 2Ato30A 5 A rating 0 5A to 75A 20 A rating 2 Ato 300 A CT 0 1 Inr lt Isr lt 15 Inr min 0 1 A Zero sequence CT with 0 1 INr lt Isr lt 15 INr ACE990 Definite time setting 0 1 Inr lt Isr lt INr expessed in Amps Sum of CTs 0 1 INr lt Isr lt INr With CSH sensor 2 Arating 0 2Ato2A 5 A rating 0 5Ato5A 20 A rating 2AtoA CT 0 1 INr lt Isr lt 1 INr min 0 1 A Zero sequence CT with 0 1 Inr lt Isr lt INr ACE990 Resolution 0 1 Aor 1 digit Accuracy 2 5 or 0 01 Inr Drop out pick up ratio Vsr Set Point 93 5 5 with CSH sensor CT or zero sequence CT ACE990 93 5 5 or gt 1 0 015 INr Isr x 100 sum of CTs Setting 2 Vi to 80 Vi Resolution 1 Accuracy 5 Drop out pic
154. FLASH Only qualified personnel should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device NEVER work alone Before performing visual inspections tests or maintenance of the equipment disconnect all sources of electric power Assume that all circuits are live until they have been completely de energized tested and tagged Pay particular attention to the design of the power system Consider all sources of power including the possibility of backfeeding Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off Screw tight all terminals even those not in use Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury Wiring of connectors C M and K m Wiring with no fittings o o o One wire with maximum cross section AWG 24 12 0 2 to 2 5 mm Two wires with maximum cross section AWG 24 18 0 2 to 1 mm stripped length 0 315 to 0 39 in 8 to 10 mm m Wiring with fittings m terminal 5 recommended wiring with Telemecanique fitting DZ5CE015D for one wire AWG 16 1 5 mm DZ5CE025D for one wire AWG 12 2 5 mm AZ5DE010D for two wires AWG 18 1 mm wire length 0 32 in 8 2 mm stripped length 0 31 in 8 mm Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved G Electric DE50566 Installation 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights
155. IDMT protection principle The tripping time for I Is values less than 1 2 depends on the type of curve selected Name of Curve Type Standard inverse time SIT 1 2 Very inverse time VIT or LTI 1 2 Extremely inverse time EIT 1 2 Ultra inverse time UIT 1 2 RI curve 1 IEC inverse time SIT A IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI B IEC extremely inverse time EIT C IEEE moderately inverse IEC D IEEE very inverse IEC E IEEE extremely inverse IEC F IAC inverse IAC very inverse k kj k d ad id f ak l k IAC extremely inverse When the monitored value is more than 20 times the set point the tripping time is limited to the value corresponding to 20 times the set point If the monitored value exceeds the measurement capacity of Sepam 40 In for the phase current channels 20 Inr for the residual current channels the tripping time is limited to the value corresponding to the largest measurable value 40 IN or 20 Inr 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 87 lectric Protection Equation t4 D _ lt 5 Equation A T t D Bi x al 0E x B I Equation D E T ta l i G Fa g x I I I 88 63230 216 219 B1 General Trip Curves Current IDMT Tripping Curves Multiple IDMT tripping curves are offered to cover most applications m IEC curves SIT VIT LTI EIT m IEEE curves MI VI El m commonly used cu
156. In compensated neutral systems the ground fault function is characterized by its capacity to detect very brief repetitive faults recurrent faults In the case of Petersen coils having no additional resistance fault detection in steady state operating conditions is not possible due to the absence of active zero sequence current The protection function uses the transient current at the beginning of the fault to ensure tripping The Or 0 setting is suitable for compensated neutral systems When this setting is selected the parameter setting of the sector is used to reduce the protection tripping zone to ensure its stability on fault free feeders The protection function operates with the residual current measured at the relay Ir input operation with sum of three currents impossible The protection function is blocked for residual voltages below the Vsr set point The time delay is definite time When a memory is added recurrent faults can be detected The memory is controlled by a time delay or by the residual voltage value The tripping direction can be set at the bus end or line end Block Diagram memory reset Vr Vr lt Vrmem gt time delayed output 0 Trmem T 0 i i ei memory pick up signal and to zone selective interlocking Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Electric Protection 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
157. Instantaneous directional phase overcurrent unit 1 21 Time delayed directional phase overcurrent unit 1 22 Instantaneous directional phase overcurrent unit 2 23 Time delayed directional phase overcurrent unit 2 24 V_TRIPCB logic equation The bit status is encoded as follows 0 No activation by the protection function 1 Activation by the protection function 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 147 lectric Modbus Communication 148 63230 216 219 B1 Remote Settings Access General Settings Read Only Function number 3002 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Rated frequency 0 50Hz 1 60 Hz 2 Remote setting enabled 1 disabled 3 Working language 0 English 1 other 4 Active group of settings 0 Group A 1 Group B 3 Choice by 113 4 Choice by remote control 5 Setting mode 0 TMS 1 I Is 6 Phase CT rating 0 5A 1 1A 2 LPCT 7 Number of phase CTs 0 3CTs 1 2CTs 8 Rated current IN A 9 Basic current IB A 10 Residual current determination mode 0 None 1 2ACSH 2 20ACSH 3 1ACT A 5ACT 5 ACE990 Range 1 6 ACE990 Range 2 7 5ACSH 8 Sensitive 1 A CT 9 Sensitive 5 A CT 11 Rated residual current INr 0 1A 12 Integration period 0 5mn 1 10 mn 2 15 mn 3 30 mn 4 60 mn 13 Reserved 14 Rated primary voltage VP V 15 Rated secondary voltage V s 0 100V 1 110V 2 115V 3 120V 4 200V 5 250V 16 VT wiring 0 3V 1 2V 2 1V 1
158. K EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Only qualified personnel should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device NEVER work alone Before performing visual inspections tests or maintenance of the equipment disconnect all sources of electric power Assume that all circuits are live until they have been completely de energized tested and tagged Pay particular attention to the design of the power system Consider all sources of power including the possibility of backfeeding Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off Start by connecting the device to the protective ground and to the functional ground Screw tight all terminals even those not in use Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Terminals Type Wiring e1 e2 supply Screw m Wiring with no fittings terminals o 1 wire with maximum cross section gt AWG 24 12 0 2 to 2 5 mm or 2 wires with maximum cross section AWG 24 18 0 2 to 1 mm O stripped length 0 31 to 0 39 in 8 to 10 mm m Wiring with fittings O recommended wiring with Telemecanique fitting DZ5CE015D for 1 wire AWG 16 1 5 mm DZ5CE025D for 1 wire AWG 12 2 5 mm AZ5DE010D for 2 wires AWG 18 1 mm O wire length 0 32 in 8 2 mm
159. MES120 input output module O remote control commands TC received via the communication link m control and monitoring function logic processing m utilizating the processing results o activating output relays to trigger an actuator o sending information to the facility manager by message and or LED on the advanced UMI and SFT2841 software by remote indication TS via the communication link Logic outputs H Control matrix Circuit breaker contactor control Annunciation Other Logic equations Predefined Signal lamps messages Q Personalized messages Messages PHASE FAULT Logic Inputs and Outputs The number of Sepam inputs outputs is adapted to fit the control and monitoring functions used The four outputs included in the Sepam Series 40 base unit may be extended by adding one MES114 module with 10 logic inputs and 4 output relays After selecting the MES114 type required by an application the logic inputs must be assigned to functions The functions to which inputs are assigned are chosen from a list of available functions that covers the whole range of possible uses The functions used can be adapted to meet needs within the limits of the logic inputs available The inputs may also be inverted for undervoltage type operation A default input output assignment is proposed for the most frequent uses Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric A
160. MT IEEE MI D VI E El F DT or IDMT IAC I VI El DT or IDMT Isr set point 0 1 to 15 INr Definite time Inst 0 05 s to 300 s 0 1 to 1 INr IDMT 0 1 s to 12 5 s at 10 Isr Timer hold Definite time DT timer hold Inst 0 05 s to 300 s IDMT IDMT reset time ANSI 50V 51V Voltage Restrained Overcurrent 0 5 s to 20 s Tripping Time Delay Timer Hold Tripping curve Definite time DT SIT LTI VIT EIT UIT DT RI DT CEI SIT A LTI B VIT B EIT C DT or IDMT IEEE MI D VI E El F DT or IDMT IAC I VI El DT or IDMT Is set point 0 5 to 24 IN Definite time Inst 0 05 s to 300 s 0 5 to 2 4 IN IDMT 0 1 s to 12 5 s at 10 Is Timer hold Definite time DT timer hold Inst 0 05 s to 300 s IDMT IDMT reset time 0 5 s to 20 s ANSI 59 Overvoltage Phase to Phase Phase to Neutral 50 to 150 of V p 50 to 150 of V_ p 0 05 s to 300 s ANSI 59N Neutral Voltage Displacement 2 to 80 of V p ANSI 66 Starts per Hour Starts per period 1 to 60 Period 0 05 s to 300 s 1 to 6hr Consecutive starts 1 to 60 Time between starts 1 Tripping at 1 2 Is 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 lectric 0 to 90 mn 37 Protection Setting Ranges ANSI 67 Directional Phase Overcurrent Tripping Time Delay Timer Hold Tripping curve Definite time DT SIT LTI VIT EIT UIT DT RI DT CEI SIT A LTI B VIT B EIT C DT or IDMT
161. NO references are to output contacts program logic setting not the state of the circuit breaker The breaker status for all breakers on this page is CLOSED 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Zone Selective Interlocking ANSI Code 68 Closed Ring Network Block Diagram Sepam S42 send BI1 and BI2 Bl DE50467 directional ground fault inst unit 1 directional overcurrent inst unit 1 0 8 Is Output Oxx send BI1 Output Oyy directional ground fault send Bl2 inst unit 2 directional overcurrent inst unit 2 0 8 Is Bl2 T 200 ms inhibit send BI if fault not cleared Receive BI1 and Bl2 time delay settings for time based discrimination overcurrent time delayed unit 3 delayed unit 4 ground fault time delayed unit 3 delayed unit 4 SSL tripping time delay settings for logic discrimination overcurrent logic delayed unit 1 delayed unit 2 ground fault logic delayed unit 1 delayed unit 2 directional ground fault logic delayed unit 1 directional overcurrent logic delayed unit 1 blocking reception 1 logic input directional earth fault logic delayed unit 2 directional overcurrent logic delayed unit 2 blocking reception 2 m m logic input T 30 ms 1 Default parameter setting O3 for send BI1 and O12 for send BI2 Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 107 amp Electric Control and Monit
162. Network Interface ACE937 Fiber Optic Interface ACE969TP and ACE969FO Multi Protocol Interfaces ACE9092 RS232 RS485 Converter ACE919CA and ACE919CC RS 485 RS485 Converters Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 ff Electric 164 165 168 177 178 181 184 186 188 190 193 194 196 197 199 200 201 202 203 204 209 211 163 Installation 164 63230 216 219 B1 Safety Instructions Before Starting This page contains important safety instructions that must be followed before attempting to install repair service or maintain electrical equipment Carefully read and follow the safety instructions described below 4 DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH m Apply appropriate personal protective equipment PPE and follow safe electrical work practices In the USA see NFPA 70E m Only qualified electrical workers should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions m NEVER work alone m Before performing visual inspections tests or maintenance of this equipment disconnect all sources of electric power Assume that all circuits are live until they have been completely de energized tested and tagged Pay particular attention to the design of the power system Consider all sources of power including the possibility of backfeeding m Turn off all power supplying the power meter and the equipment in which it is installed before working on it m Always u
163. Rights Reserved amp Electric Control and Monitoring Local Indication Functions ANSI Code 30 nn m ma Personalized User Messages SINN TS TIP SERIE 30 additional messages can be created using the SFT2841 software to link a message to a logic input or the result of a logic equation for example or to replace gt a predefined message by a personalized message Personalized User Message Editor in SFT2841 The personalized message editor is integrated in the SFT2841 software tool and can be accessed from the control matrix screen in either connected or unconnected i mode m display on the screen the Event tab associated with Protection the predefined messages associated with the protection functions appear m double click on one of the messages displayed to activate the personalized message editor Personalized Message Editor Functions m Creating and modifying personalized messages This is accomplished in English and the local language by text input or importing of an existing bitmap file bmp or by point to point drawing m Deleting personalized messages m Assigning predefined or personalized messages to an event defined in the control matrix o from the control matrix screen Events tab double click on the event to be linked to a new message o select the new predefined or personalized message from among the messages presented o and Assign it to the event The same message can be assigned to several events wit
164. Sepam Series 40 Protective Relays User s Manual Instruction Bulletin 63230 216 219 B1 9 i sas Retain for future use on Qy 1ssnausstunesinnessin ent Foo fion Tip D SEPAM DIGITAL RELAY O EN Schneider Bene iP Electric ANSI symbol 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved IEC symbol Safety Instructions Safety symbols and messages Read these instructions carefully and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device before trying to install operate service or maintain it The following special messages may appear throughout this bulletin or on the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure Risk of electric shock The addition of either symbol to a Danger or Warning safety label on a device indicates that an electrical hazard exists which will result in death or personal injury if the instructions are not followed Safety alert This is the safety alert symbol It is used to alert you to potential personal injury hazards and prompt you to consult the manual Obey all safety instructions that follow this symbol in the manual to avoid possible injury or death Safety messages A DANGER DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death serious injury or property damage A WARNING WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoide
165. Ss may be read using the bit or word functions Each TS transition is time tagged and stored in the event stack see chapter Time tagging events Address Word 0101 TS1 to TS16 Bit Address 1010 to 101F TS Application S40 S41 S42 T40 T42 M41 G40 1 Protection 50 51 unit 1 E E E E E E E 2 Protection 50 51 unit 2 E E E E E 8 E 3 Protection 50 51 unit 3 E E E E E E E 4 Protection 50 51 unit 4 E E E E E 8 E 5 Protection 50N 51N unit 1 E E E E E 8 E 6 Protection 50N 51N unit 2 E E E E E E 3 T Protection 50N 51N unit 3 E E E E E 8 3 8 Protection 50N 51N unit 4 E E E E E E 3 9 Protection 49 RMS alarm set point E E E E 10 Protection 49 RMS tripping set point E E E E 11 Protection 37 a 12 Protection 46 unit 1 E E 8 E 13 Protection 46 unit 2 E E E E E E E 14 Protection 48 51LR 14 locked rotor 15 Protection 48 51LR 14 rotor locking on start 16 Protection 48 51LR 14 excessive starting time Address Word 0102 TS17 to TS32 Bit Address 1020 to 102F TS Application S40 S41 S42 T40 T42 M41 G40 17 Protection 27D unit 1 18 Protection 27D unit 2 19 Protection 27 27S unit 1 E E E E E E 3 20 Protection 27 27S unit 2 E E E E E 8 3 21 Protection 27R 22 Protection 59 unit 1 E E E E E E 3 23 Protection 59 unit 2 E E E E E 8 3 24 Protection 59N unit 1 E E E E E 8 E 25 Protection 59N unit 2 E
166. T and LTS time delays 0 05 s to 300s ANSI A9RMS Thermal Overload Rate Rate Accounting for negative sequence component 0 2 25 45 9 Time constant Heating T1 5 to 120 mn T1 5 to 120 mn Cooling T2 5 to 600 mn T2 5 to 600 mn Alarm and tripping set points 50 to 300 of rated thermal capacity Cold curve modification factor 0 to 100 Switching of thermal settings conditions By logic input By Is set point adjustable from 0 25 to 8 IB Maximum equipment temperature 140 to 392 F 60 to 200 C 1 SN v3 IN V 1p 36 63230 216 219 B1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Protection Setting Ranges ANSI 50 51 Phase Overcurrent Tripping Time Delay Timer Hold Tripping curve Definite time DT SIT LTI VIT EIT UIT DT RI DT CEI SIT A LTI B VIT B EIT C DT or IDMT IEEE MI D VI E El F DT or IDMT IAC I VI El DT or IDMT Is set point 0 1 to 24 IN Definite time 0 1 to 2 4 IN IDMT Timer hold Definite time DT timer hold IDMT IDMT reset time Confirmation None By negative sequence overvoltage By phase to phase undervoltage ANSI 50BF Breaker Failure Presence of current 0 2 to 2 IN Operating time 0 05 s to 300 s ANSI 50N 51N or 50G 51G Ground Fault Sensitive Ground Fault Tripping Time Delay Timer Hold Tripping curve Definite time DT SIT LTI VIT EIT UIT DT RI DT CEI SIT A LTI B VIT B EIT C DT or ID
167. T secondary Connect the wires using 4 mm 0 16 in ring lugs and check the tightness of the six screws that provide continuity for the CT secondary circuits The connector accommodates wires with cross sections of AWG 16 10 1 5 to 6 mm The wires only exit from the base Close the side shields Insert the connector pins into the slots on the base unit Flatten the connector against the unit to plug it into the 9 pin SUB D connector principle similar to that of the MES module Tighten the mounting screw Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Gf Electric PE50031 DE51674 Installation eee eee eee LPCT settings 25 amp 125A 10000000 50 amp 250A 01000000 100 amp 500A 9010000 0 1338666A 90010000 200 amp 1000A 000014000 320 amp 1600A 00000100 400 amp 20008 00000040 ORSI5DA 00000004 Li 12 13 Check plug CAUTION HAZARD OF NON OPERATION m Setthe microswitches for the CCA670 CCA671 connector before commissioning the device m Check that only one microswitch is in position 1 for each block L1 L2 L3 and that no microswitch is in the center position m Check that the microswitch settings on all 3 blocks are identical Failure to follow these instructions can cause incorrect operation 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved LPCT Type Current Sensors Function Low Power Current Transducer LPCT type sensors a
168. TCS o SF6 fault o block command by logic input DO 20 Circuit Breaker Contactor Control with Lockout Function ANSI 86 The ANSI 86 function traditionally performed by lockout relays may be carried out by Sepam using the predefined Circuit breaker contactor control function with latching of all tripping conditions protection function outputs and logic inputs With this function Sepam performs the following m grouping of all tripping conditions and breaking device control m latching of the trip command with blocking a close until the cause of tripping disappears and is acknowledged by the user see Latching acknowledgment m indication of the cause of tripping o locally by signal lamps Trip and others and by messages on the display o remotely by remote indications 98 63230 216 219 B1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Control and Monitoring Functions Start per hour 66 Block Start 49 RMS SF6 pressure drop DE50464 Circuit Breaker Contactor Control ANSI Code 94 69 Block Diagram T 200 ms To D Block Closing logic input V_BLOCKCLOSE logic equations end of charge position circuit charged Protection functions TCS configured for breaker controlled tripping 27 27D 32P 32Q 37 38 49T 46 47 51 51N aS 51V 48 51LR 49 RMS 59 59N 67 67N 81L H Buchholz tripping Pressure tripping Thermostat tripping Thermistor tripping
169. TEN m Sepam configured but not connected to the network pS m A device other than Sepam connected to the network A summary report of each Sepam detected as present is also displayed m Sepam Modbus address m Type of application and Sepam identification m Any alarms present m Any minor major faults present To access parameters settings and operation and maintenance information for a particular Sepam click on the icon for that Sepam SFT2841 then establishes a point to point connection with the selected Sepam Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 223 amp Electric Use and Commissioning Basic UMI This UMI includes m two signal lamps indicating Sepam operating status o green on indicator device on o red J indicator device unavailable initialization phase or detection of internal problems m nine parameterizable yellow signal lamps fitted with a standard label with SFT2841 a customized label can be printed on a laser printer E key for clearing faults and resetting m one connection port for the link with the PC CCA783 cord the connector is protected by a sliding cover MT10276 Fixed or Remote Advanced UMI In addition to the basic UMI functions this version provides m a graphic LCD display for the display of measurements parameter protection settings and alarm and operating messages MT10277 The number of lines size of characters and symbols are in accordance with the scr
170. Unit 1A Accuracy 1 2 0 5A Vab Unit 10 V Accuracy 10 2 5V Schneider EJ Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Modbus Communication Data Addresses and Encoding Test Zone The test zone is a 16 word zone that may be accessed via the communication link by all functions in both read and write modes to facilitate communication testing at the time of commissioning or to test the link Test Zone Word Address Bit Address Access Modbus Function Format Enabled Test 0C00 C000 COOF Read write 1 2 3 4 5 6 15 16 None Initialized to 0 OCOF COFO COFF Read write 1 2 3 4 5 6 15 16 None Initialized to 0 Protection Setting Zone The protection setting zone is an exchange table which is used to read and set the protection functions Two setting zones are available to be used by two masters Protection Setting Word Address Zone 1 Word Address Zone 2 Access Modbus Function Enabled Setting read buffer 1E00 1E7C 2000 207C R 3 Setting read request 1E80 2080 R W 3 6 16 Remote setting request buffer 1F00 1F7C 2100 217C R W 3 16 See Protection settings chapter Fault Recorder zone The fault recorder zone is an exchange table which is used to read disturbance recording records Two zones are available to be used by two masters Disturbance Recording Word Address Zone 1 Word AddressZone2 Access Modbus Function Enabled Choice of transfer function 2200 2203 2400 2403 R W 3 16 Identification zone 220
171. Winde 2 DSsksnul gt 0rn ALA FD MT11189 j i mf s acj j Logical equation editor aa 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved zlej Logic Equations Application This function can be used to configure simple logic functions by combining data received from the protection functions or logic inputs By using logic operators AND OR XOR NOT and time delays new processing operations and indications can be added to the existing ones The logic functions produce outputs that can be used in m the matrix to control relay outputs light up LEDs or display new messages m the protection functions to create new blocking or reset conditions m circuit breaker control to add cases of circuit breaker tripping closing or blocking m disturbance recording to record particular logic data control logic outputs 8 logic matrix inputs a _ gt circuit breaker control gt signal lamps recl recloser amp protection functions messages gt Phase fault a logic gt equations Logic Function Configuration Logical functions are entered in text format in the SFT2841 editor Each line includes a logic operation the result of which is assigned to a variable Example V1 P5051_2_3 OR 112 The lines are executed sequentially every 14 ms Description of Operations Operators m NOT logic inversion m OR logic OR m AN
172. Word 1 Event Type 08 00 For remote indications internal data logic inputs Word 2 Event Address See bit adresses 1000 to 10BF Word 3 Reserved 00 00 Word 4 Falling Edge Disappearance or Rising Edge Appearance 00 00 Falling edge 00 01 Rising edge Word 5 Year 00 0 to 99 year Word 6 Month Day 1 to 12 month 1 to 31 day Word 7 Hours Minutes 0 to 23 hours 0 to 59 minutes Word 8 Milliseconds 0 to 59999 Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 141 amp Electric DE50477 Modbus Communication Time Tagging Events master computer Synchronization Sepam accommodates two synchronization modes m internal via the network synchronization mode by the broadcasting of a time message frame via the communication network Slave number 0 is used for broadcasting m external synchronization mode via a logic input The synchronization mode is selected at the time of commissioning via SFT2841 Internal Synchronization via Network Mode The time message frame is used for both time setting and Sepam synchronization It must be sent regularly at brief intervals between 10 and 60 seconds in order for synchronous time to be obtained Sepam s internal clock is reset each time a new time frame is received and synchronization is maintained if the difference in synchronism is less than 100 milliseconds network Sepam With interna
173. ZARD OF BLINDING um dBm km dBm Never look directly into the end of the fiber optic R er i 50 125 0 2 2 7 5 6 2300 ft 700 m Failure to follow this instruction can cause 625 125 0 275 32 94 5900 ft 1800 m serious injury 100 140 0 3 4 14 9 9200 ft 2800 m 200 HCS 0 37 6 19 2 8500 ft 2600 m 1 2 8 in 70 mm with CCA612 cable connected ACE937 Le FO FO 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Maximum length calculated with m Minimum optical power available m Maximum fiber attenuation m Losses in two ST connectors 0 6 dBm m Optical power margin 3 dBm according to IEC 60870 standard Example for a 62 5 125 um fiber Lmax 9 4 3 0 6 3 2 1 12 mi 1 8 km Description and Dimensions RJ45 socket to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cable 1 Link activity LED flashes when communication is active sending or receiving in progress 2 Rx female ST type connector Sepam receiving 3 Tx female ST type connector Sepam sending Connection m The sending and receiving fiber optic fibers must be equipped with male ST type connectors m Fiber optics screw locked to Rx and Tx connectors The interface is to be connected to connector C on the base unit using a CCA612 cable length 9 8 ft or 3 m green fittings Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 203 amp Electric Installation ACE969TP and ACE969FO Multi Protocol Interfaces
174. a i i PREXT EXT or M4 M1 ia 11 l 52CS RMT_ CONT CONT L 52cs1 01 12 111 Por 11 L Eua 2 RMT i 7 ont c CLOSE TINPUT 7 INPUT XXGIL XXRIL T ia Tip mslce wko sup TRIP lig Grused i if used Closed Open a29 9 ef l 4 i cs A17 l I c 1M A7 5 i oz i a gc l 4 DC 1A8 Block Eo O59 CONTROL Close 228 Saag POWER if used i Poe alce I x 2 m 22 ee st sgE S08 86 or xE if used s 52 52 52 b Ta Fb SSeS ee SiS oo TE At l Notes i i M7 I 1 If Breaker Control is g l selected the usage of 01 O2 i re 52 I 011 111 112 must be as A i gt amp m an ee oo I M8 i 2 If 112 is not connected to I 12 2 mai breaker A contact and 111 to ee ee breaker B contact bkr status lights will be reversed and Trip Note jumper 1 recommended by MVS CB off line suprv TCS Circuit and Control Fault jumper 2 alternate monitor control power FU alarms may result FU a I J 41 Sepam Serd0 or 20 i 04 Mol LSL oiz en en Relay A13 A14 A15 A1 1T L6 L9 T L12 n Self test Alarm Output Block Upstream Fast Trip Indication Outputs Watchdog Zone Seq Intik If Used If Used 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider dp Electric 63230 216 219 B1 104 MT10196 MT10197 Control and Monitoring Functions Application This function provides m full tripping discrimi
175. agnosis screen An incorrect speed or parity increments CPT2 Non reception is signaled by the lack of change on CPT9 Operating Anomalies It is advisable to connect the Sepam units to the Modbus network one by one Verify that the supervisor is sending frames to the relevant Sepam by checking the activity on the RS232 RS485 converter or the fiber optic converter if there is one and on the ACE module RS485 Network m check the wiring on each ACE module m check the tightness of the screw terminals on each ACE module m check the connection of the CCA612 cord linking the ACE module to the Sepam base unit ensure that polarization is only at one point check for impedance matching at both ends of the RS485 network check the auxiliary power supply connection to the ACE969TP ensure that the ACE9092 or ACE919 converter being used is connected powered and set up correctly Fiber Optic Network m check the connections on the ACE module m check the connection of the CCA612 cord linking the ACE module to the Sepam base unit m check the auxiliary power supply connection to the ACE969FO m ensure the converter or fiber optic star being used is connected powered and set up correctly m fora fiber optic ring check that the Modbus master can handle the echo of its requests correctly In all Cases m check all the ACE configuration parameters on SFT2841 m check the CPT2 and CPT9 diagnostic counters on the SFT2841 Sepam Diagnosis
176. aker failure function 20 ms To avoid unwanted tripping of the upstream breakers choose a margin of approximately 20 ms This provides a time delay T 110 ms Characteristic Is Set Point Setting 0 2 to 2 IN Accuracy 1 5 Resolution 0 1A Drop out pick up ratio 87 5 10 Time Delay T Setting 0 05 sto 300 s Accuracy 1 2 or from O ms to 15 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic Time Overshoot time Considering the circuit breaker position Setting lt 20 ms With without Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Protection Description The ground fault protection function comprises two groups of four units Group A and Group B respectively The mode of switching from one group to the other may be determined by parameter setting m by remote control TC3 TC4 m by logic input 113 113 0 group A 113 1 group B or by forcing the use of the group Operation The ground fault protection function is single pole It enables if ground fault current reaches operation set point It is time delayed The time delay may be definite time DT or IDMT according to the curves opposite The protection function includes second harmonic restraint which provides greater stability when transformers are energized The restraint disables tripping regardless of the fundamental current Parameter setting can block the restraint Definite Time Protec
177. al inspections tests or maintenance of this equipment disconnect all sources of electric power Assume that all circuits are live until they have been completely de energized tested and tagged Pay particular attention to the design of the power system Consider all sources of power including the possibility of backfeeding Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off Start by connecting the device to the protective ground and to the functional ground Screw tight all terminals even those not in use Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury Voltage Transformers The phase and residual voltage transformer secondary circuits are connected to the connector item 9 1 2 ro w 5 e fa om IE fo 2 3 3 yos 1 o 2 y 012 fo 2 4 yon fo a 6 2 122 3 Dn i z Z gt m aq SB ssossossossosssogggs AS sssoss A 11 126 10 14 1 gt 125449 8 1244 8 7 Dis 237 6 5 4 2 1 Ss SS08808660868 B ssosss ss ss W q q 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Connections Connections are made using the screw connectors CCA626 or ring lug connectors CCA627 that can be accessed on the rear panel Wiring of the CCA626 connector m Without fitting o 1 wire with maximum cross section of 0 2 to 2 5 mm g
178. am is time set via the write word function function 16 at the address 0002 with a mandatory 4 word time message The bits set to 0 in the description above correspond to format fields which are not used in and not managed by Sepam Since these bits can be transmitted to Sepam with random values Sepam performs the necessary disabling Sepam does not check the consistency or validity of the date and time received Synchronization Clock A synchronization clock is required to set the Sepam date and time Schneider Electric has tested the following equipment Gorgy Timing ref RT300 equipped with the M540 module 63230 216 219 B1 139 amp Electric Modbus Communication Reading Events Sepam provides the master s with two event tables Each master reads the event table and acknowledges by writing the exchange word Sepam then updates its event table The events sent by Sepam are not sorted chronologically Structure of EventTable 1 m exchange word 0040h m event number 1 0041h 0048h m event number 2 0049h 0050h m event number 3 0051h 0058h m event number 4 0059h 0060h Structure of Event Table 2 m exchange word 0070h m event number 1 0071h 0078h m event number 2 0079h 0080h m event number 3 0081h 0088h m event number 4 0089h 0090h The master must read a block of 33 words starting at the address 0040h 0070h or 1 word at the address 0040h 0070
179. am logic inputs 2 The value is saved in the event of an auxiliary power outage Readout The measurement may be accessed via m advanced UMI display unit by pressing the key m aPC with SFT2841 software m a communication link 1 Refer to switchgear documentation for use of this information 2 Optional MES114 or MES114E or MES114F modules Characteristics Measurement range 1 to 20 Unit s Accuracy 0 5 sec Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1s Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Gf Electric Metering Switchgear Diagnosis Functions VT Supervision ANSI Code 60FL Operation The VT Voltage Transformer supervision function is used to supervise the complete phase and residual voltage measurement chain m voltage transformers m VT connection to Sepam m Sepam voltage analog inputs The function processes the following events m partial loss of phase voltages detected by o presence of negative sequence voltage O and absence of negative sequence current m loss of all phase voltages detected by O presence of current on one of the three phases o and absence of all measured voltages m tripping of the phase VT and or residual VT protection relay detected by the acquisition on a logic input of the fuse melting contact or auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker protecting the VTs m other types of events may be processed using the logic equation editor
180. and Ir 0 to 359 2 Phase displacement pa pb pc between V and 0 to 359 2 Disturbance recording Machine Operating Assistance Thermal capacity used 0 to 800 1 o 100 for phase IB Remaining operating time before overload tripping 0 to 999 mn 1 mn Waiting time after overload tripping 0 to 999 mn 1 mn Running hours counter operating time 0 to 65535 hours 1 or 0 5 h o Starting current 1 2 IB to 24 IN 5 o Starting time 0 to 300 s 300 ms o Number of starts before blocking 0 to 60 1 Blocked start time 0 to 360 mn 1 mn Cooling time constant 5 to 600 mn 5 mn Switchgear Diagnosis Assistance Cumulative breaking current 0 to 65535 kA 10 o Number of operations 0 to 4 109 1 o Operating time 20 to 100 ms 1 ms o Charging time 1to20s 0 5 s o m available on MSA141 analog output module according to setup o saved in the event of auxiliary supply outage 1 Typical accuracy see details on subsequent pages 2 Sn apparent power V3 V p IN 3 Measurement up to 0 02 In for information purpose 4 Inr should be thought of as a relay input port for ground fault protection This port can accept residually connected phase ct s and therefore measure positive negative and zero sequence components This port can also accept a zero sequence CT which measures only true zero sequence no positive or negative sequence So the port name Inr is just that a port name What kind of current positive negative
181. at 2 Isr for Isr gt 0 3 INr typically 35 ms m inst lt 70 ms at 2 Isr for Isr lt 0 3 INr typically 50 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 35 ms at Trmem 0 1 Inr sensor rating if the measurement is taken by a CSH120 or CSH200 zero sequence CT Inr IN of the CT if the measurement is taken by a 1 A or 5 A current transformer Inr IN of the CT 10 if the measurement is taken by a 1 A or 5 A current transformer with the sensitivity x 10 option Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved DE50457 Protection Directional Ground Fault ANSI Code 67N 67NC Type 2 Operation The protection function operates like a ground fault protection function with added direction criterion It can be used in radial solidly grounded systems and closed ring distribution networks that are solidly grounded It has all the characteristics of a ground fault protection function 50N 51N and can therefore be easily coordinated with that function The residual current is measured at the Sepam Ir input or calculated by using the tripping zone sum of the phase currents in accordance with parameter settings The time delay may be definite time DT or IDMT according to the curves below The protection function includes a timer hold delay T1 for the detection of restriking faults The tripping direction may be set at the bus end or line end Isr set point Definite Time Protection
182. at are operated locally PE80147 jaa ea Example of an SFT2841 software screen 4 63230 216 219 B1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Introduction Selection Table Protection ANSI Code S40 S41 S42 T40 T42 M41 G40 Phase overcurrent 50 51 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Voltage restrained overcurrent 50V 51V 1 Ground fault Sensitive ground fault 50N 51N 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 50G 51G Breaker failure 50BF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Negative sequence current unbalance 46 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Directional phase overcurrent 67 2 2 Directional ground fault 67N 67NC 2 2 2 2 Directional active overpower 32P 1 1 1 1 Directional reactive overpower 32Q 40 1 1 Thermal overload 49RMS 2 2 2 2 Phase undercurrent 37 1 Excessive starting time locked rotor 48 51LR 14 1 Starts per hour 66 1 Undervoltage 27D 2 Remanent undervoltage 27R 1 Undervoltage 9 27 278 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Overvoltage 59 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Neutral overvoltage displacement 59N 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Negative sequence overvoltage 47 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overfrequency 81H 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Underfrequency 81L 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Recloser 4 shots 79 o o o Temperature monitoring 8 or 16 RTDs 38 49T o o o o Thermal Pressure 26 63 o o Metering Phase current la Ib Ic RMS residual current Ir B Demand current la Ib Ic peak demand current lam
183. ating temperature 13 F to 158 F 25 C to 70 C Environmental characteristics Same as Sepam base units Power Supply Voltage 24 to 250 V DC 110 to 240 V AC Range 20 10 20 10 Maximum consumption 2W 3VA Inrush current lt 10A 100 us Acceptable ripple content 12 Acceptable momentary outages 20 ms Electrical Interface Standard EIA 2 wire RS485 differential Distributed power supply External 12 V DC or 24 V DC 10 Power consumption 16 mA in receiving mode 40 mA in sending mode Max number of Sepam units 25 Maximum Length of 2 wire RS485 Network Number of Sepam Units With Distributed Power Supply 12 VDC 24 V DC 5 1000 ft 320 m 3300 ft 1000 m 10 590 ft 180 m 2500 ft 750 m 20 430 ft 130 m 1500 ft 450 m 25 410 ft 125 m 1200 ft 375 m Fiber Optic Interface Fiber type Graded index multimode silica Wavelength 820 nm invisible infra red Type of connector ST BFOC bayonet fiber optic connector Maximum Length of Fiber Optic Network Fiber Diameter Numerical Attenuation Minimum Maximum Fiber um Aperture dBm km Optical Power Length NA Available dBm 50 125 0 2 2 7 5 6 2300 ft 700 m 62 5 125 0 275 3 2 9 4 5900 ft 1800 m 100 140 0 3 4 14 9 9200 ft 2800 m 200 HCS 0 37 6 19 2 8500 ft 2600 m Maximum length calculated with m Minimum optical power available m Maximum fiber attenuation m Losses in two ST connectors 0 6 dBm m Optical po
184. ault should trip Each Sepam can send and receive blocking information When a fault current triggers Sepam it sends blocking information to output O3 2 and trips the associated circuit breaker if it does not receive blocking information on the logic input assigned to receipt of BI 3 The blocking information is sent for as long as it takes to clear the fault It is interrupted after a time delay that considers the breaking device operating time and protection unit reset time This system minimizes the duration of the fault which minimizes arc flash energy and optimizes discrimination in downgraded situations Pilot Wire Test The pilot wire test may be performed using the output relay test function 1 Motor Sepam s can send only blocking information They are not affected by the receipt of blocking information since they are designed for loads only 2 Default parameter setting 3 According to parameter setting and presence of an additional MES114 module Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 105 amp Electric DE50465 Control and Monitoring Functions overcurrent inst unit 1 inst unit 2 ground fault inst unit 1 inst unit 2 directional ground fault inst unit 1 directional overcurrent inst unit 1 send Bl receive BI overcurrent time delayed unit 3 delayed unit 4 ground fault time delayed unit 3 time delay settings delayed unit 4 for time based discrimination dir
185. ave been run a final trip command is given A message appears on the display and closing is locked out until acknowledgment takes place in accordance with the protection function parameter setting m closing on a fault If the circuit breaker closes on a fault or if the fault appears before the end of the safety time delay the recloser is blocked Recloser Block Conditions The recloser is blocked under the following conditions m voluntary open or close command recloser put out of service receipt of a block command from the logic input activation of the breaker failure function 50BF appearance of a switchgear related fault such as trip circuit fault control fault SF6 pressure drop opening of the circuit breaker by a protection unit that does not run reclosing cycles frequency protection or by external tripping In such cases a final trip message appears Extension of the Dead Time If during a reclosing cycle reclosing the circuit breaker is impossible because breaker recharging is not finished following a drop in auxiliary voltage recharging time is longer the dead time can be extended to the time the circuit breaker is ready to carry out an Open Close Open cycle The maximum time addded to the dead time is adjustable Twait_max If at the end of the maximum waiting time the circuit breaker is still not ready the recloser is blocked see example 4 5 Characteristics Reclosing Shots Setting Number of shots 1to4
186. average temperature buildup of motors when starting and saved The saved value is reset to zero when the thermal capacity used has decreased sufficiently for the block start time delay to be zero The saved value is used again making it possible to restart taking into account the temperature that caused the trip This value is stored in nonvolatile memory Readout The measurements may be accessed via m advanced UMI display unit by pressing the D key a PC with SFT2841 software a communication link an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Measurement range 0 to 800 Unit Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1 Refresh interval 1 second typical Cooling Time Constant Operation The cooling time constant T2 of the equipment being monitored transformer motor or generator is estimated by the thermal overload protection function It is calculated each time the equipment operates for a sufficiently long period followed by a shutdown I lt 0 1 IB and temperature stabilization phase The calculation is based on the temperature measured by RTDs 1 2 and 3 stator sensors for motors and generators or by RTDs 1 3 and 5 primary winding sensors for transformers For greater accuracy ambient temperature should be measured by RTD 8 If other applications is chosen in the RTD assignment table T2 is not estimated Two measurements are available one for each thermal operating ra
187. ax Ibmax Icmax Voltage Vab Vbc Vac Van Vbn Vcn residual voltage Vr a a Positive sequence voltage V1 rotation direction a E E Negative sequence voltage V2 rotation direction Frequency E E m E E Active reactive and apparent power P Q S Peak demand power Pmax Qmax power factor pf Calculated active and reactive energy W h VAR h m E E E Active and reactive energy by pulse counting tW h VAR h o oO o o o o o Temperature o o o o Network and Machine Diagnosis Tripping context E Tripping current Tripla Triplb Triplc Triplr Unbalance ratio negative sequence current 12 a a Phase displacement gr p r pr2 pa pb c E a 7 Disturbance recording Thermal capacity used u Remaining operating time before overload tripping u m Waiting time after overload tripping E Running hours counter operating time m E Starting current and time Blocked start time number of starts before blocking Switchgear Diagnosis Cumulative breaking current Trip circuit supervision o o o o o o o Number of operations operating time charging time o o o H H o o CT VT supervision 60FL m m E E Control and Monitoring ANSI Code Circuit breaker contactor control 94 69 Latching acknowledgement 86 u Zone selective interlocking 68 a o o o o o o Switching
188. can be blocked by the logic input Block undercurrent t MT10426 Operating Principle MT10865 pick up signal time delayed output l Case of current sag 1 06 Is Is 0 118 MT10866 pick up signal 0 time delayed output 0 Case of circuit breaker tripping 44 63230 216 219 B1 Phase Undercurrent ANSI Code 37 Block Diagram i ia Isls time delayed output 1 gt 0 1 IB pick up signal Characteristics Is Set Point Setting 15 IB lt Is lt 100 IB by steps of 1 Accuracy 5 Pick up drop out ratio 106 5 for Is gt 0 1 IN T Time Delay Setting 50 ms lt T lt 300 s Accuracy 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic Times Operation time lt 60 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 40 ms 1 IN reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Protection Temperature Monitoring ANSI Code 38 49T Operation This protection is associated with a Resistance Temperature Detector RTD ofthe Pt100 platinum 100 Q at 0 C or 32 F Ni100 nickel 100 Q or Ni120 nickel 120 Q type detectors in accordance with IEC 60751 and DIN 43760 standards It enables when monitored temperature exceeds the Ts set point It has two independent set points one for alarm and one for tripping When the prote
189. case when Sepam is energized The other words are not significant m FFFFh the request frame has been processed but the results in the reply zone are not yet available It is necessary to repeat reply frame reading The other words are not significant m xxFFh with the function code xx different from 00 and FFh The read request for the settings of the designated function is not valid The function is not included in the particular Sepam or access to settings is impossible in both read and write modes Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved G Electric Modbus Communication Remote Settings Access Description of Settings Data format All the settings are transmitted in signed 32 bit integer format encoding as a complement of 2 Particular setting value 7FFF FFFFh means that the setting is out of the validity range D The Enabled or Disabled setting is encoded as follows 0 Disabled 1 Enabled The tripping curve setting is encoded as follows 0 definite 1 inverse 9 IEC VIT B 2 long time inverse 10 IEC EIT C 3 very inverse 11 IEEE Mod inverse 4 extremely inverse 12 IEEE Very inverse 5 ultra inverse 13 IEEE Extr inverse 6 Rl 14 IAC inverse 7 IEC SIT A 15 IAC very inverse 8 IEC LTI B 16 IAC extr inverse The timer hold delay curve setting is encoded as follows 0 definite time 1 IDMT amp The H2 restraint variable is encoded as follo
190. cement VO FAULT Vr FAULT Overfrequency OVER FREQ OVER FREQ Underfrequency UNDER FREQ UNDER FREQ Negative sequence overvoltage UNBALANCE U UNBALANCE V Temperature RTDs OVER TEMP ALM OVER TEMP TRIP RTD S FAULT 1 to 2 OVER TEMP ALM OVER TEMP TRIP RTD S FAULT MET1 1 to 2 Thermostat THERMOST ALARM THERMOST ALARM THERMOS TRIP THERMOS TRIP Buchholz BUCHHOLZ ALARM BUCHHOLZ ALARM BUCHH GAS TRIP BUCHH GAS TRIP Pressure PRESSURE ALM PRESSURE ALM PRESSURE TRIP PRESSURE TRIP Thermistor PTC NTC THERMIST ALARM THERMIST TRIP THERMIST ALARM THERMIST TRIP External tripping x 1 to 3 EXT TRIP x 110 3 EXTERNAL TRIP x 1 to 3 Trip circuit supervision TRIP CIRCUIT TRIP CKT FAULT Circuit breaker control CONTROL FAULT CB CNTRL FAULT Recloser CYCLE x 1 to 4 4 SHOT x 1 to 4 4 Recloser FINAL TRIP FINAL TRIP Recloser CLEARED FAULT CLEARED FAULT SF6 SF6 LOW SF6 LOW Phase VT supervision VT FAULT VT FAULT VO VT supervision VT FAULT VO VT FAULT Vr CT supervision CT FAULT CT FAULT 1 RTD FAULT message refer to the maintenance chapter 2 With indication of the faulty phase 3 With indication of the faulty phase when used with phase to neutral voltage 4 With indication of the protection unit that has initiated the cycle phase fault ground fault 112 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All
191. ch integration interval m the greatest average RMS current value for each phase that has been obtained since the last reset The values are refreshed after each integration interval an interval that may be set from 5 to 60 mn and are saved in the event of a power outage Readout The measurements may be accessed via m advanced UMI display unit by pressing the O key m aPC operating with SFT2841 software m a communication link Resetting to Zero 1 press the ra key on the advanced UMI display unit when the peak demand current is displayed 2 via the clear command in the SFT2841 software 3 via the communication link remote control command TC6 Characteristics Measurement range 0 1 to 1 5 IN Unit Aor kA Accuracy 0 5 typical 2 2 from 0 3 to 1 5 IN 5 if lt 0 3 IN Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 0 1A Display format 5 10 15 30 60 minutes 1 In rated current set in the general settings 2 At In in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 3 Display of values 0 02 to 40 IN Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 13 amp Electric Metering 14 63230 216 219 B1 Phase to Phase Voltage Phase to Neutral Voltage Phase to Phase Voltage Operation This function gives the RMS value of the 50 or 60 Hz component of phase to phase voltages according to voltage sensor connections m Vab voltage between phases a and b m Vbc voltage between phases b and c m Vca voltage betwee
192. ck the status of the power supply m To diagnose any incident occurring on the power supply The PC loaded with the SFT2841 software is connected to a group of Sepam units by means of a communication network by serial link telephone line or Ethernet This network forms the E LAN engineering network The connection window allows configuration of the Sepam network and provides access to the parameter and protection setting files of the Sepam units on the network E aga CON To open the connection window click on the See Configuration of a Sepam network for details of how to configure the E LAN engineering network from the connection window 63230 216 219 B1 215 amp Electric Use and Commissioning SFT2841 Setting amp Operating Software Presentation The setting and operating functions are available on a SFT2841 Sepam 1000 serie 40 Connection window Bee PC equipped with SFT2841 software and connected to g Bi ft Est Operston Sepsm Application Options Window 2 lelx the front panel of Sepam run in a Windows 98 NT 2 0886 BE 20m Zins An ae or better environment CUTE Others Temperatures U I f measurements The data used for the same task are grouped together Cunents in the same screen to facilitate operation Menus and icons are used for fast and direct access to required information RMS values Average values Maimum values Residual curent Input lo Current
193. connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cable The DSM303 module is always the last interlinked remote module and it systematically ensures impedance matching by load resistor Rc 198 63230 216 219 B1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Communication Accessories Selection Guide Installation There are two types of Sepam communication accessory m Communication interfaces which are essential for connecting Sepam to the communication network m Converters and other accessories as options which are used for complete implementation of the communication network Communication Interface Selection Guide Type of network S LAN or E LAN S LAN or E LAN S LAN or E LAN S LAN E LAN S LAN E LAN Protocol Modbus a DNP3 IEC 60870 5 103 Physical interface RS485 2 wire 4 wire Fiber optic ST Star Ring m 2 See details on page 6 201 6 202 6 203 6 204 6 204 1 Only one connection possible S LAN or E LAN 2 Except with the Modbus protocol Converter Selection Guide Converter Port to 1 RS232 port 1 2 wire RS485 port 1 2 wire RS485 port 1 Ethernet port 1 Ethernet port supervisor 10T 100Tx Auto 10 100 base Tx and 1 Ethernet port 100 base FX Port to Sepam 1 2 wire RS485 port 1 2 wire RS485 port 1 2 wire RS485 port 1 2 wire RS485 or 2 2 wire RS485 or 4 wire 4 wire RS485 port RS485 ports Distributed power supply
194. cted absent To identify the faulty RTD or RTDs 1 Display the temperature values measured by Sepam using the SFT2841 software 2 Check the consistency of the temperatures measured m the temperature displayed is if the RTD is short circuited T lt 35 C m the temperature displayed is if the RTD is disconnected T gt 205 C Checking the Analog Output Connection to the MSA141 Module 1 Identify the measurement associated by parameter setting to the analog output using the SFT2841 software 2 Simulate if necessary the measurement linked to the analog output by injection 3 Check the consistency between the value measured by Sepam and the indication given by the device connected to the analog output Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 245 amp Electric Use and Commissioning Test Sheet Sepam Series 40 Project cs Re Type of Sepam Switchboard 2 c cssecesceeceesceeceeeseeeceseeeeceeseess Serial Number G bicle e EEEE E EE Software Version V Type of check Preliminary general examination prior to energizing o Energizing o Parameter and protection settings o Logic input connection o Logic output connection o Validation of the complete protection chain o Validation of the customized logic functions if necessary o Analog output connection to the MSA141 module if necessary o Temperature senso
195. ction activates it determines whether the RTD is shorted or disconnected m RTD shorting is detected if the measured temperature is less than 31 F or 35 C measurement displayed m RTD disconnect is detected if the measured temperature is greater than 482 F or 205 C measurement displayed If an RTD fault is detected the set point output relays are blocked and the protection outputs are set to zero The RTD fault item is also made available in the control matrix and an alarm message is generated specifying the faulty RTD module Block Diagram T lt 401 F T gt Tsi MT10878 m setpoint 1 RTD Characteristics m setpoint 2 RTD s fault Ts1 and Ts2 Set Points az c Setting 32 F to 356 F 0 C to 180 C Accuracy 2 7 F 1 5 C Resolution 1 F 1 C Pick up drop out difference 3 C 0 5 Characteristic Times Tripping time lt 5 seconds 1 See Connection of MET1482 Module chapter for accuracy derating according to wiring cross section Standard RTD Assignments The standard assignments described below can be selected when configuring the first MET1482 module on the SFT2841 hardware configuration screen The user must choose an assignment in order to use the thermal overload Cooling time cons tant calculation function Motor Generator Choice Transformer Choice M41 G40 T40 T42
196. ctions The following data are managed in the control matrix and may be set using the SFT2841 software tool Protections Button All application protection functions Control Functions Button Protection time delayed output and additional outputs when applicable Additional actions in Characteristic tab In service out of service Protection latching Participation of the protection unit in circuit breaker tripping Tripping Tripping by the circuit breaker control function Forced on O1 Block closing Blocks closing by the circuit breaker control Forced on O2 function Closing Closing by the circuit breaker control function Forced on O11 requires an MES114 Pick up Logical OR of the instantaneous output of all protection units Drop out A protection unit time delay counter has not yet gone back to 0 TCS fault Trip circuit fault Remote control discrepancy Circuit breaker position Discrepancy between the last state send by the remote monitoring and control system and the circuit breaker position CB control fault A circuit breaker open or close command has not been successfully executed Block Fault Recording Disturbance recording blocked Sending of blocking information BI1 Sending of the blocking information to the following Sepam in zone selective interlocking chain 1 O3 by default Sending of blocking information BI2 Sending of the blocking information to the next Sepam
197. ctive amp Apparent Power Peak Demand Active amp Reactive Power Power Factor cos Active and Reactive Energy Temperature Network Diagnosis Functions Tripping Context Tripping Current Negative Sequence Current Unbalance Phase Displacement or Phase Displacement oa ob ec Disturbance Recording Machine Operation Assistance Functions Thermal Capacity Used Cooling Time Constant Operating Time Before Tripping Waiting Time After Tripping Hours Counter Starting Current amp Starting Overload Time Number of Starts Before Blocking Start Block Time Delay Switchgear Diagnosis Functions Cumulative Breaking Current amp Number of Operations Operating Time Charging Time VT Supervision Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 amp Electric 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 21 22 23 24 25 25 26 27 28 29 29 30 31 Metering General Settings The general settings define the characteristics of the measurement sensors connected to Sepam and determine the performance of the metering and protection functions used They are accessed via the SFT2841 setting software General Characteristics tab IN Rated phase current 20r3CT1A 5A 1 A to 6250 A sensor primary current 3 LPCTs 25 A to 3150 A IB Base current according to rated power of equipment 0 4 to 1 3 IN INr Rated residual current Sum of three phase currents See IN rated phase current CSH120 or CSH200 zero sequence
198. ctor N A 86 86 Memory time TOmem O0 0 200 ms Memory voltage 0 0 0 Vrmem Schneider 75 amp Electric 63230 216 219 B1 Protection 76 63230 216 219 B1 Directional Ground Fault ANSI Code 67N 67NC Characteristics Type 1 Measurement Origin Setting range Characteristic Angle Or Setting 45 0 15 30 45 60 90 Accuracy 3 Tripping Direction Setting Bus line Isr Set Point Setting 0 1 Inr lt Isr lt 15 Inr expressed in Amps With CSH sensor 2 A rating 0 2A lt Isr lt 30 A 5 A rating 0 5A lt Isr lt 75A 20 A rating 2 A lt Isr lt 300 A cT 0 1 INr lt Isr lt 15 Inr min 0 1 A Zero sequence CT with 0 1 INr lt Isr lt 15 INr ACE990 Resolution 0 1 A or 1 digit Accuracy at pr 180 Or 5 or 0 01 INr Drop out pick up ratio Vsr Set Point gt 89 or gt 1 0 015 INr Isr x 100 Setting 2 to 80 Viip Resolution 1 Accuracy at pr 180 Or 5 Drop out pick up ratio gt 89 Sector Setting 86 83 76 Accuracy 2 Time Delay T Setting inst 0 05 s lt T lt 300s Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Accuracy lt 2 or 10 ms to 25 ms Memory Time TOmem Setting 0 05 s lt TOmem lt 300 s Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Memory Voltage Vrmem Setting 0 2 Vip lt Vrmem lt 80 V p Resolution 1 Characteristic Times Operation time Pick up lt 45 ms Confirmed instantaneous m inst lt 50 ms
199. curacy 2 Refresh interval 2 seconds typical Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 23 amp Electric Metering 24 63230 216 219 B1 Network Diagnosis Functions Disturbance Recording Operation This function records analog signals and logic states When a triggering event occurs record storage activates according to the parameters set in SFT2841 see the section on Control and monitoring functions Disturbance recording triggering The stored event begins before the triggering event and continues afterwards The record is made up of the following information m values sampled from the different signals m the event date m characteristics of the recorded channels The duration and number of records is also set using the SFT2841 software tool The files are recorded in First In First Out FIFO type shift storage When the maximum number of records is reached the oldest record is erased when a new record is entered The disturbance records are lost when the device is switched on and when the logic equations or alarm messages are changed Transfer Files may be transferred in one of two ways m locally by using a PC equipped with SFT2841 software The PC is connected to the front panel connector m remotely using a software tool specific to the remote monitoring and control system Recovery The signals are recovered from a record by means of the SFT2826 software tool Principle stored record MT10181 trigg
200. curve 3 11 Group A timer hold delay 10 ms 12 Group A H2 restraint 0 yes 1 no 13 Reserved 14 Reserved 15 Reserved 16 Reserved 17 Group B tripping curve 18 Group B Isr set point 0 1A 19 Group B tripping time delay 10 ms 20 Group B timer hold curve 3 21 Group B timer hold delay 10 ms 22 Group B H2 restraint 0 yes 1 no 23 Reserved 24 Reserved 25 Reserved 26 Reserved ANSI 51V Voltage Restrained Phase Overcurrent Function number 2501 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 3 Activity O 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Tripping curve 7 Is set point 0 1 A 8 Tripping time delay 10 ms 9 Timer hold curve amp 10 Timer hold delay 10 ms 11 Reserved 12 Reserved 13 Reserved 14 Reserved ANSI 59 Overvoltage Function number 11xx relay 1 xx 01 relay 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 6 2 CB control 6 3 Activity O 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Voltage mode 0 phase to neutral 1 phase to phase 7 VS or V_ S set point ViP or V_ P 8 Tripping time delay 10 ms 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Reserved Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric 63230 216 219 B1 153 Modbus Communication 154 63230 216 219 B1 Remote Settings Access ANSI 59N Neutral Voltage Displacement Function number 12xx relay 1 xx 01 relay 2 xx 02 Setting Data Latching Format Unit CB c
201. d could result in death serious injury or property damage A CAUTION CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided minor or moderate injury or property damage Important notes Restricted liability Electrical equipment should be serviced and maintained only by qualified personnel No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this manual This document is not intended as an instruction manual for untrained persons Device operation The user is responsible for checking that the rated characteristics of the device are suitable for its application The user is responsible for reading and following the device s operating and installation instructions before attempting to commission or maintain it Failure to follow these instructions can affect device operation and constitute a hazard for people and property Protective grounding The user is responsible for compliance with all the existing international and national electrical codes concerning protective grounding of any device FCC Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequenc
202. d er 63230 216 219 B1 229 lectric MT10816 MT10817 Use and Commissioning Use of Passwords Sepam has two 4 digit numeric passwords m The first password symbolized by a key is used to modify the protection settings m The second password symbolized by two keys is used to modify the protection settings and all the general settings The two factory set passwords are 0000 Entering Passwords 1 Press the key to display the following screen passwords ou a 6 Press the lt 1 key to position the cursor on the first digit O X X X 7 Scroll through the digits using the cursor keys W then confirm to go on to the next digit by pressing the lt key Do not use characters other than numbers 0 to 9 for each of the 4 digits 8 When the password for your qualification level is entered press the key to position the cursor on the apply box Press the key again to confirm 9 When Sepam is in protection setting mode a key appears at the top of the display 10When Sepam is in parameter setting mode two keys appear at the top of the display 50 51 2 lor O On Trip curve definitive thershold 120A delay 100 ms delay 0 ms response time a definitive apply cancel Access to the protection setting or parameter setting modes is disabled m By pressing the
203. d current IN 25 50 100 125 133 200 250 320 400 500 630 666 1000 1600 2000 or 3150 A Note Parameter In must be set twice m Software parameter setting using the advanced UMI or the SFT2841 software tool m Hardware parameter setting using microswitches on the CCA670 connector Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 173 amp Electric Installation Base Unit Other Residual Current Input Connection Schemes Description Residual current is calculated by the vector sum of the three phase currents la Ib and Ic measured by three 1A or 5A CTs or by three LPCT type sensors See the current input connection diagrams for more information Parameters Residual Current Rated Residual Current Measuring Range None Inr In CT primary current 0 1 to 40 Inr DE80061 Description Arrangement recommended for the protection of effectively ungrounded or compensated neutral systems designed to compensate for system capacitance using a tuned inductor in the neutral This is not common in North America in which very low fault currents need to be detected Parameters Residual Current Rated Residual Current Measuring Range 2 Arating CSH INr 2A 0 2 to 40 A 5 A rating CSH INr 5A 0 5 to 100A 20 A rating CSH INr 20A 2 to 400 A DE52520 2 2 gt ob gt Bud ab 1A 7 5A 8 Q ST CCA634 DE80048 ZSCT 174 63230 216 219 B1 Description Resi
204. d voltage generator 50 or 60 Hz frequency according to the country current adjustable up to at least 5 Arms adjustable up to the rated secondary phase to phase voltage of the VTs adjustable relative phase displacement V I o three phase or single phase type m DC voltage generator O adjustable from 48 to 250 V DC for adaptation to the voltage level of the logic input being tested ooada Accessories m plug with cord to match the current test terminal box installed m plug with cord to match the voltage test terminal box installed m electric cord with clamps wire grip or touch probes Metering Devices built into the generator or separate m 1 ammeter O to 5 Arms m 1 voltmeter 0 to 230 V rms m 1 phasemeter if phase displacement V is not identified on the voltage and current generator Computer Equipment m PC with minimal configuration O Microsoft Windows 98 NT 4 0 2000 XP O 133 MHz Pentium processor o 64 MB of RAM or 32 MB with Windows 98 o 64 MB free on hard disk o CD ROM drive m SFT2841 software m CCA783 serial connection cord between the PC and Sepam Documents m complete connection diagram of Sepam and additional modules with O phase current input connection to the corresponding CTs via the test terminal box o residual current input connection o phase voltage input connection to the corresponding VTs via the test terminal box o residual voltage input connection to the corresponding VTs via
205. ddress 00F0 TC16 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit address 1F0x STC1 to Word address OOF 1 STC16 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit address OF 1x X format Sepam check word This format applies only to the Sepam check word that may be accessed at the word address 0100h This word contains various items of information relating to m Sepam operating mode m time tagging events Each data item contained in the Sepam check word may be accessed bit by bit from address 1000 for bit 0 to 100F for bit 15 m bit 15 event present in event zone 1 bit 14 Sepam in data loss status in event zone 1 bit 13 Sepam not synchronous bit 12 Sepam time not correct bit 11 presence of events in event zone 2 bit 10 Sepam in data loss status in event zone 2 bit 9 major fault in Sepam bit 8 partial fault in Sepam bit 7 setting group A in service bit 6 setting group B in service bit 1 Sepam in local setting mode other bits reserved undetermined values Status changes of bits 1 6 7 8 10 12 13 and 14 of this word trigger the sending of a time tagged event 134 63230 216 219 B1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Modbus Communication Data Addresses and Encoding Using Remote Indication Bits Sepam provides the communication link with 144 TS The remote indications TS are pre assigned to protection and control functions which depend on the Sepam model The T
206. der Electric All Rights Reserved 2 Turn the generator on 3 When applicable apply a V voltage set to the rated secondary phase to neutral voltage of the VT Vins V S V3 4 Inject an current set to 5A and when applicable in phase with the V voltage applied generator phase displacement a V 0 5 Use the SFT2841 software to check the following m the value indicated for the measured Ir residual current is approximately equal to 5A m when applicable the value indicated for calculated Vr residual voltage is approximately equal to the rated primary phase to neutral voltage of the VTs VinP Viip 3 m when applicable the value indicated for the phase displacement or Vr Ir between the Ir current and Vr voltage is approximately equal to 0 6 Turn the generator off Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 241 amp Electric MT11202 Use and Commissioning Description This check is done when residual voltage is delivered by three VTs on the secondary circuits connected in an open delta assembly and when the residual current is calculated in Sepam or when applicable is not used for the protection function Checking Residual Voltage Input Connection Procedure 1 Connect according to the diagram below m the generator voltage terminals to the voltage test terminal box so as to only supply Sepam s residual voltage input m when applicable the generator current terminals to the current test terminal box s
207. ding at the MET1482 end in the shortest manner possible to the corresponding terminals of connectors A and m Do not connect the shielding at the RTD end Accuracy Derating According to Wiring The error At is proportional to the length of the cable and inversely proportional to the cable cross section At eC 2x HEM S mm m 2 1 C km for AWG 18 cross section 0 93 mm m 1 C km for AWG 14 cross section 1 92 mm 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 195 ectric Mt11009 DE80122 Installation MSA141 Analog Output Module Function The MSA141 module converts one of the Sepam measurements into an analog signal m Selection of the measurement to be converted by parameter setting m 0 10 mA 4 20 mA 0 20 mA analog signal according to parameter setting m Scaling of the analog signal by setting minimum and maximum values of the converted measurement Example the setting used to have phase current 1 as a 0 10 mA analog output with a dynamic range of 0 to 300 A is O minimum value 0 O maximum value 3000 m A single module for each Sepam base unit connected by either CCA770 2 ft or 0 6m CCA772 6 6 ft or 2m or CCA774 13 1 ft or 4m cables MSA141 analog output module The analog output can also be remotely managed via the communication network Characteristics Weight Assembly Operating temperature Environmental characteristics 0 441 Ib 0
208. dual current measurement by 1 A or 5A CTs m Terminal 7 1 A CT m Terminal 8 5 A CT The sensitivity can be multiplied by 10 using the sensitive parameter setting with Inr In 10 Parameters Residual Current Rated Residual Current Measuring Range 1ACT Inr In CT primary current 0 1 to 20 Inr Sensitive 1 A CT Inr In 10 0 1 to 20 Inr 5ACT Inr In CT primary current 0 1 to 20 Inr Sensitive 5 A CT INr In 10 0 1 to 20 INr Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Installation Base Unit Other Residual Current Input Connection Schemes Description The CSH30 interposing ring CT is used to connect 1A or 5A CTs to Sepam to measure residual current m Connection of CSH30 interposing ring CT to 1A CT make two turns through DE80115 CSH primary m Connection of CSH30 interposing ring CT to 5A CT make four turns through CSH primary The sensitivity can be multiplied by 10 using the sensitive parameter setting with Inr IN 10 CT 1A 2 turns Parameters CT 5A 4 turns Residual Current Rated Residual Current Measuring Range 1 ACT INr IN CT primary current 0 1 to 20 INr Sensitive 1 A CT INr IN 10 0 1 to 20 INr 5 ACT INr IN CT primary current 0 1 to 20 INr Sensitive 5 A CT INr IN 10 0 1 to 20 INr c ma e CCA630 8 i 7 CT 1A 2 turns CT 5A 4 turns Description ACE990 The ACE990 is used as an interface between an MV zero
209. e VIT or LTI 1 2 Extremely inverse time EIT 1 2 Ultra inverse time UIT 1 2 RI curve 1 IEC standard inverse time SIT A IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI B IEC extremely inverse time EIT C IEEE moderately inverse IEC D IEEE very inverse IEC E IEEE extremely inverse IEC F IAC inverse 21 2 a a a a IAC very inverse IAC extremely inverse 1 The curve equations are given in the chapter entitled IDMT Protection Functions The function considers current variations during the time delay interval For currents with a very large amplitude the protection function has a definite time characteristic m ifl gt 20 Is tripping time is the time corresponding to 20 Is m ifl gt 40 IN tripping time is the time corresponding to 40 IN IN current transformer rated current defined when the general settings are made Block Diagram Vab Vbc Vac DE50513 pick up signal time delayed output Timer Hold Delay The function includes an adjustable timer hold delay T1 m definite time timer hold for all the tripping curves gt Is time delayed output gt Is pick up signal l l j l l l l tripping MT10541 LE ys value of internal time delay counter I as a o T1 Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 65 amp Electric Protection Voltage Restrained Phase Overcurrent ANSI Code 50V 51V m IDMT for IEC IEEE and IAC curves
210. e UMI or remotely by means of a logic input or via the communication link The remote indication TS104 remains present after latching operations until acknowledgment has taken place The Latching acknowledgment function associated with the Circuit breaker contactor control function can also perform the ANSI 86 Lockout relay function TC Circuit Breaker Position Discrepancy This function detects a discrepancy between the last remote control command received and the actual position of the circuit breaker The information is accessible via remote indication TS105 Trip Circuit Supervision and Open Closed Matching Description This supervision is designed for trip circuits With normally open trip contacts the function detects m circuit continuity m loss of supply m mismatching position contacts The function blocks breaking device closing With Normally Closed NC trip circuit the function detects position contacts mismatching Trip circuit supervision is unnecessary in this case The information is accessible in the matrix and via the remote indication TS106 Block Diagram trip circuit fault DE52311 1 With MES option The function is activated if inputs 111 and 112 are set respectively as circuit breaker open position and circuit breaker closed position Open and Close Command Supervision Following a circuit breaker open or close command a two second time delay occurs The system then dete
211. e assigned remote control bits TC The zone can be read or written using the word functions or bit functions The use of remote control commands is discussed in detail on page 5 138 Remote Control Commands Word Address Bit Address Access Function Format TC1 TC16 OOFO OFOO R W 3 4 6 16 B 1 2 5 15 STC1 STC16 OOF 1 OF10 R W 3 4 6 16 B 1 2 5 15 Status Zone The status zone is a table containing the Sepam check word pre assigned remote indication bits TS logic inputs logic equation bits logic outputs LEDs and analog output control word The TS assignments are discussed in detail on page 5 137 Status Word Address Bit Address Access Modbus Function Format Enabled Sepam check word 0100 1000 R 3 4 or 1 2 7 x TS1 TS16 0101 1010 R 3 4 or 1 2 B TS17 TS32 0102 1020 R 3 4 or 1 2 B TS33 TS48 0103 1030 R 3 4 or 1 2 B TS49 TS64 reserved 0104 1040 R 3 4 or 1 2 B TS65 TS80 0105 1050 R 3 4 or 1 2 B TS81 TS96 0106 1060 R 3 4 or 1 2 B TS97 TS112 0107 1070 R 3 4 or 1 2 B TS113 TS128 0108 1080 R 3 4 or 1 2 B TS129 TS144 0109 1090 R 3 4 or 1 2 B Reserved 010A 10A0 2 z Logic inputs 010B 10B0 R 3 4 or 1 2 B Logic equation bits 010C 10C0 R 3 4 or 1 2 B Logic outputs 010D 10D0 R 3 4 or 1 2 B LEDs 010E 10E0 R 3 4 or 1 2 B Analog output 010F 10F0 R W 3 6 16 16S Address word
212. e cable L 9 8 ft 3 m CCA783 PC connection cable CCA613 LPCT test plug ACE917 LPCT injection adapter CCA620 20 pin screw type connector CCA622 20 pin ring lug connector AMT840 Mounting plate ACE990 Zero sequence CT interface for Ir input 2640KIT Two sets of spare connectors for MES114 SFT2841CD CD ROM with SFT2841 and SFT2826 software w o CCA783 cable ACE969TP 2 wire RS485 multi protocol interface Modbus DNP3 or IEC 60870 5 103 ACE969FO Fiber optic multi protocol interface Modbus DNP3 or IEC 60870 5 103 1 Reference 59645 MES108 module 41 40 cancelled and replaced by 59646 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 167 Installation DE80030 in mm 00000000000 gl le TOLON amp 176 Front view of Sepam DE80114 CAUTION HAZARD OF CUTS Trim the edges of the cut out plates to remove any jagged edges Failure to follow this instruction can cause serious injury DE80029 5 im S Le 8 50 1 0 39 1216 9 29 236 AMT840 mounting plate 168 63230 216 219 B1 Base Unit Dimensions Dimensions 5 S 3 Oe od R iu Em 7 72 196 Y 1 57 40 ry Sepam with advanc
213. e cable clamps for the S LAN and E LAN RS 485 networks are grounded Fiber Optic Communication Port S LAN CAUTION HAZARD OF BLINDING Never look directly into the fiber optic Failure to follow this instruction can cause serious injury The fiber optic connection can be made m point to point to an optic star system m ina ring system active echo The Transmit and Receive fiber optic strands must be equipped with male ST type connectors The fiber optics are screw locked to Rx and Tx connectors Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved dp Electric PE50035 Installation S ACE9092 RS232 RS485 converter A DANG HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Only qualified personnel should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device NEVER work alone Before performing visual inspections tests or maintenance of the equipment disconnect all sources of electric power Assume that all circuits are live until they have been completely de energized tested and tagged Pay particular attention to the design of the power system Consider all sources of power including the possibility of backfeeding Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off Start by connecting the device to the protective ground and to the
214. e not in use Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury Wiring Connectors CCA620 and CCA626 m Without fitting o 1 wire with maximum cross section of 0 2 to 2 5 mm gt AWG 24 12 or 2 wires with maximum cross section of 0 2 to 1 mm gt AWG 24 16 O Stripped length 0 31 to 0 39 in 8 to 10 mm m With fitting o Recommended wiring with Telemecanique fitting DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1 5 mm AWG 16 DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 2 5 mm AWG 12 AZ5DEO010D for 2 wires 1 mm AWG 18 o Wire length 0 32 in 8 2 mm O Stripped length 0 31 in 8 mm Wiring Connectors CCA622 and CCA627 Ring lug connectors 0 25 in 6 35 mm Characteristics of the four base unit relay outputs O1 O2 03 04 m O1 and O2 are two control outputs used by the breaking device control function for o O1 breaking device tripping o O2 breaking device closing blocked m O3 and O4 are indication outputs only O4 can be activated by the watchdog function 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 171 ectric DE52287 Installation Base Unit Current Input Connection Sepam Series 40 Link to remote optional modules AC DC Modbus Power Q communication Control port 1 This type of connection allows the calculation of residual voltage 2 Accessory for bridging terminals 3 and 5 supplied with CCA626 connector 172 632
215. e to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury LPCT sensor equipped with a shielded cable fitted with a yellow RJ 45 plug which is plugged directly into the CCA670 CCA671 connector Sepam protection unit CCA670 CCA671 connector LPCT voltage interface with microswitch setting of rated current m CCA670 lateral plugs for Sepam Series 20 and Sepam Series 40 m CCA671 radial plugs for Sepam Series 80 CCA613 remote test plug flush mounted on the front of the cubicle and equipped with a 9 8 ft 3 meter cable to be plugged into the test plug of the CCA670 CCA671 interface connector 9 pin sub D ACE917 injection adapter to test the LPCT protection chain with a standard injection box Standard injection box Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Electric Installation LPCT Type Current Sensors Test Accessories ACE917 Injection Adapter Function The ACE917 adapter is used to test the protection chain with a standard injection box when Sepam is connected to LPCT sensors The ACE917 adapter is inserted between m The standard injection box 276 m The LPCT test plug 70 o integrated in the Sepam CCA670 CCA671 interface connector o or transferred by means of the CCA613 accessory The following are supplied with the ACE917 injection adapter m Power supply cable m 9 8 ft 3 meter cable to connect the ACE917 to the LPCT test plug on CCA670 CCA671 or CC
216. ected to the Communication Network The Sepam units connected to the communication network are identified by their Modbus address These addresses can be configured in either of the following ways m Manually one by one o the Add button is used to define a new Sepam device it is allocated a default Modbus address o the Edit button is used to modify the Modbus address if necessary O the Delete button removes a device from the configuration m Automatically by running an automatic search of the Sepam units connected O the Automatic search Stop search button starts or interrupts the search o when SFT2841 recognizes a Sepam unit its Modbus address and type are shown on screen o when a Modbus device other than Sepam responds to SFT2841 its Modbus address is displayed The text indicates that the device is not a Sepam The Sepam network configuration is saved in a file when the UMI window closes by pressing the OK button Access to Sepam Information To establish communication between SFT2841 and a Sepam network select the Sepam network configuration you want and press Connect The Sepam network is displayed in the connection window SFT2841 polls all the equipment defined in the selected configuration Each Sepam queried is represented by an icon m Sepam Series 20 or Series 40 actually connected to the network m Sepam Series 80 actually connected to the network E
217. ectional ground fault delayed unit 2 directional overcurrent delayed unit 1 delayed unit 2 Zone Selective Interlocking ANSI Code 68 Radial Network Block Diagram Sepam S40 S41 T40 T42 G40 D output Oxx send BI D to sendBI To T 200 ms inhibit send BI if fault not cleared SSL tripping overcurrent logic delayed unit 1 delayed unit 2 time delay settings for zone selective interlocking ground fault logic delayed unit 1 delayed unit 2 directional ground fault logic delayed unit 1 Blocking reception 0 T logic input T 30 ms 106 63230 216 219 B1 DE50466 Schneider amp Electric Block Diagram Sepam M41 overcurrent inst unit 1 inst unit 2 a ground fault output Oxx send BI inst unit 1 inst unit 2 to send BI directional ground fault inst unit 1 T O i T 200 ms inhibit send BI if fault not cleared overcurrent delayed unit 1 delayed unit 2 ground fault delayed unit 1 delayed unit 2 SSL tripping directional ground fault logic delayed unit 1 The protection units must be configured to trip the circuit breaker in order to be considered in zone selective interlocking 1 According to parameter setting O3 by default 2 Instantaneous action inst corresponds to protection pick up signal information 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved MT11208 Control and Monitoring Fu
218. ed UMI and MES1 14 1 57 386 l 1 22 flush mounted in front panel 40 98 31 1 With basic UMI 0 91 in 23 mm Sepam with advanced UMI and MES1 14 flush mounted in front panel Clearance for Sepam assembly and wiring Cut out Cut out accuracy must be complied with to ensure good withstand For mounting plate between 0 059 in For mounting plate 1 5 mm and 0 12 in 3 mm thick 0 125 in 3 17 mm thick DE80028 162 0 2 Assembly with AMT840 Mounting Plate Used to mount Sepam with basic UMI at the back of the compartment with access to the connectors on the rear panel Mounting associated with the use of the remote advanced UMI DSM303 DE80082 Sepam with basic UMI and MES114 mounted with AMT840 plate Mounting plate thickness 0 079 in 2 mm Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Lp Electric Installation Base Unit Assembly A DANG ER The Sepam is simply flush mounted and secured by its clips No additional screw type fastening is required AZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH m Only qualified personnel should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions NEVER work alone Mounting clamp DE51143 Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it Consider all sources of power including the possibility of backfeeding
219. ed for checking that the settings have been processed Each function has its own particular reply zone contents They are the same as those of the remote reading function reply frame To use remote setting it is necessary to make all the settings for the function concerned even if some of them have not changed Request Frame The request is made by the master using a write n words operation function 16 at the address 1F00h or 2100h The zone to be written contains a maximum of 125 words It contains the values of all the settings and consists of the following 1F00h 2100h B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 BO9 BO8 B07 BO6 BOS B04 BO3 B02 BO1 BOO Function code Unit number Settings The content of the address 2100h may be read using a read n words operation function 3 m the function code field may have the following values O1h to 99h BCD encoding for the list of protection functions F01 to F99 m the unit number field is used for protection functions It indicates the unit involved varying from 1 to N N being the maximum number of units available in the Sepam It may never be equal to 0 Exception Reply In addition to the usual cases le Sepam can send type 07 exception replies not acknowledged if m another remote reading or setting request is being processed m the remote setting function is blocked Schneider 63230 216
220. eens and language versions The LCD display is back lit when the user presses a key m a9 key keypad with two operating modes White keys for current operation Q display of measurements 2 display of switchgear network diagnosis data 3 display of alarm messages 4 resetting 5 acknowledgment and clearing of alarms Blue keys activated in parameter and protection setting mode 7 access to protection settings access to Sepam parameter setting 9 used to enter the 2 passwords required to change protection and parameter settings The I O 4 keys are used to browse through the menus and to scroll and accept the values displayed lamp test key switching on sequence of all the signal lamps 224 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider amp Electric Front Panel UMI Presentation b51 gt 51 lo gt 5IN lb gt 5SN ext yo off I on Trip b5 gt o O e 0 0 la 162A aus Br 161A RMS Ic 163A ans N 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Use and Commissioning Advanced UMI Access to Data Access to Measurements and Parameters The measurements and parameters can be accessed 3 energizing using the metering diagnosis status and protection amp Sepam keys They are arranged in a series of screens as shown in the diagram opposite m the data are split up by category in 4 menus associated with the following 4 keys o 1 key measurements choice curre
221. eider Electric All Rights Reserved 63230 216 219 B1 53 amp Electric Protection Thermal Overload ANSI Code 49 RMS Setting Examples Cold Curves for Es0 0 Vip 1 00 1 05 1 10 1 15 1 20 1 25 1 30 1 35 1 40 1 45 1 50 1 55 1 60 1 65 1 70 1 75 1 80 Es 50 0 6931 0 6042 0 5331 0 4749 0 4265 0 3857 0 3508 0 3207 0 2945 0 2716 0 2513 0 2333 0 2173 0 2029 0 1900 0 1782 0 1676 55 0 7985 0 6909 0 6061 0 5376 0 4812 0 4339 0 3937 0 3592 0 3294 0 3033 0 2803 0 2600 0 2419 0 2257 0 2111 0 1980 0 1860 60 0 9163 0 7857 0 6849 0 6046 0 5390 0 4845 0 4386 0 3993 0 3655 0 3360 0 3102 0 2873 0 2671 0 2490 0 2327 0 2181 0 2048 65 1 0498 0 8905 0 7704 0 6763 0 6004 0 5379 0 4855 0 4411 0 4029 0 3698 0 3409 0 3155 0 2929 0 2728 0 2548 0 2386 0 2239 70 1 2040 1 0076 0 8640 0 7535 0 6657 0 5942 0 5348 0 4847 0 4418 0 4049 0 3727 0 3444 0 3194 0 2972 0 2774 0 2595 0 2434 75 1 3863 1 1403 0 9671 0 8373 0 7357 0 6539 0 5866 0 5302 0 4823 0 4412 0 4055 0 3742 0 3467 0 3222 0 3005 0 2809 0 2633 80 1 6094 1 2933 1 0822 0 9287 0 8109 0 7174 0 6413 0 5780 0 5245 0 4788 0 4394 0 4049 0 3747 0 3479 0 3241 0 3028 0 2836 85 1 8971 1 4739 1 2123 1 0292 0 8923 0 7853 0 6991 0 6281 0 5686 0 5180 0 4745 0 4366 0 4035 0 3743 0 3483 0 3251 0 3043 90 2 3026 1 6946 1 3618 1 1411 0 9808 0 8580 0 7605 0 6809 0 6147 0 5587 0 5108 0 4694 0 4332 0 4013 0 3731 0 3480 0 3254 95 1 9782 1 5377 1 2670 1 0
222. ement 1 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Network Diagnosis Functions Phase Displacement or Phase Displacement oa ob oc Phase Displacement or Operation This function gives the phase displacement measured between the residual voltage and residual current in the trigonometric sense see diagram The measurement is used during commissioning to verify the correct directional ground fault protection unit connection Two values are available m opr angle with measured Ir m or angle with Ir calculated by sum of phase currents Readout The measurements may be accessed via m advanced UMI display unit by pressing the key m aPC with SFT2841 software m a communication link Characteristics Measurement range 0 to 359 Resolution 1 Accuracy 2 Refresh interval 2 seconds typical Phase Displacement oa ob oc Operation This function gives the trigonometric phase displacement between the Van Vbn Ven voltages and la Ib Ic currents respectively see diagram The measurements are used when Sepam is commissioned They ensure that the voltage and current inputs are wired correctly It does not operate when only Vab voltage is connected to Sepam Readout The measurements may be accessed via m advanced UMI display unit by pressing the key m aPC with SFT2841 software m acommunication link Characteristics Measurement range 0 to 359 Resolution 1 Ac
223. enables if the phase overcurrent function in the chosen direction line or bus is activated for at least one of the three phases or two out of three phases according to parameter setting The alarm linked to the protection operation indicates the faulty phase or phases It is time delayed The time delay may be definite time DT or IDMT according to the curves The direction of current is determined by measuring the phase in relation to a polarization value It is qualified as bus direction or line direction as shown below y line direction NO bus direction The polarization value is the phase to phase value in quadrature with the current for cos 1 90 connection angle A phase current vector plane is divided into two half planes corresponding to the line and bus zones The characteristic angle 0 is the angle of the perpendicular to the boundary line between the two zones and the polarization value Voltage Memory If all the voltages disappear during a 3 phase fault that is located near the bus the voltage level may be insufficient to detect fault direction lt 1 5 V p The protection function uses a voltage memory to reliably determine fault direction The fault direction is saved as long as the voltage level is too low and the current is above the Is set point Closing After a Fault If the circuit breaker closes after a 3 phase fault on the bus the voltage memory is blank As a result
224. ensor 4mA 4mA Maximum distance between sensor and module 0 62 mi 1 km Voltage 24to250VDC 110t0125VDC 110 VAC 220 to 250 VDC 220 to 240 V AC Range 19 210275 VDC 88t0 150VDC 88to1382VAC 176to275VDC 176 to 264 V AC Frequency 47 to 63 Hz 47 to 63 Hz Typical burden 3 mA 3 mA 3 mA 3 mA 3 mA Typical switching threshold 14V DC 82 V DC 58 V AC 154 V DC 120 V AC Input limit voltage At state 1 219VDC 288 V DC 288 V AC 2176 V DC 2176 V AC At state 0 lt 6VDC lt 75V DC lt 22 VAC lt 137 V DC lt 48V AC Isolation of inputs from other Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced isolated groups Control Relay Outputs 01 O2 O11 contacts 2 Voltage DC 24 48 V DC 125 V DC 250 V DC AC 47 5 to 63 Hz 100 to 240 V AC Continuous current 8A 8A 8A 8A Breaking capacity Resistive load 8 4A 0 7 A 0 3 A L R load lt 20 ms 6 2A 0 5A 0 2A L R load lt 40 ms 4 1A 0 2A 0 1 A Resistive load 8A p f load gt 0 3 5A Making capacity lt 15 A for 200 ms Isolation of outputs in relation to Enhanced other isolated groups Annunciation Relay Output 03 04 012 013 014 contacts Voltage DC 24 48 V DC 127 V DC 220 V DC AC 47 5 to 63 Hz 100 to 240 V AC Continuous current 2A 2A 2A 2A Breaking capacity L R load lt 20 ms 2 1A 0 5A 0 15 A p f load gt 0 3 1A Isolation of outputs in relation to Enhanced other isolated groups Voltage 24 250 V DC 110 24
225. epam Series 40 References US Catalog Description SQ1S40 S40 Substation application with advanced UMI 24 250 V DC and 100 240 V AC power supply DSM303 Remote advanced UMI module CCA630 Connector for 1 A 5 ACT current sensors CCA634 Connector for 1 A 5 ACT Ir current sensors CCA670 Connector for LPCT current sensors CSH30 Interposing ring CT for Ir input CSH120 Zero sequence sensor diameter 4 75 in 120 mm CSH200 Zero sequence sensor diameter 7 87 200 mm AMT852 Lead sealing accessory MET1482 8 temperature sensor module ACE9492 2 wire RS485 network interface ACE959 4 wire RS485 network interface ACE937 Optical fiber interface MES114 10 input 4 output module 24 250 V DC 1 MSA141 1 analog output module ACE9092 RS485 RS232 converter ACE919CA RS485 RS485 interface AC power supply ACE919CC RS485 RS485 interface DC power supply MES114E 10 input 4 output module 110 125 V DC and V AC MES114F 10 input 4 output module 220 250 V DC and V AC CCA626 6 pin screw type connector CCA627 6 pin ring lug connector CCA770 Remote module connection cable L 2 ft 0 6 m CCA772 Remote module connection cable L 6 6 ft 2 m CCA774 Remote module connection cable L 13 1 ft 4 m CCA612 Communication network interfac
226. epam Series 80 m To residual current Ir input on connector terminals 15 and 14 shielding m To residual current l r input on connector terminals 18 and 17 shielding Recommended Cable m Sheathed cable shielded by tinned copper braid Minimum cable cross section AWG 18 0 93 mm Resistance per unit length lt 30 5 mQ ft 100 mQ m Minimum dielectric strength 1000 V 700 Vrms Connect the cable shielding in the shortest manner possible to Sepam Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle The connection cable shielding is grounded in Sepam Do not ground the cable by any other means The maximum resistance of the Sepam connection wiring must not exceed 4 Q 66 ft maximum for 30 5 mO ft or 20 m maximum for 100 mO m Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 185 amp Electric Installation CSH30 Interposing Ring CT Function The CSH30 interposing ring CT is used as an interface when the residual current is measured using 1A or 5A current transformers 44717 Characteristics T Weight 0 265 Ib 0 12 kg Vertical assembly of CSH30 Horizontal assembly of Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail interposing ring CT CSH30 interposing ring CT In vertical or horizontal position Dimensions 186 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Installation CSH30 Interposing Ring CT Connection The CSH30 is adapted for the type of
227. erator Non Dir O C 1 V P E 40 Bus Volt Freq v B21 zero sequence CT ALT GND FAULT CKT 2 Volt FreqidFidt V B22 xxxx 5A Relay Volt Freq dF dt zu Series 2 cn ones Ee Note Typical Catalog Number for S42 use SP1S42A Or 40 ALL NOTES a b c 1 IF 2 VT s connect a b c to Sepam Series 40 at E1 E2 E3 the wrong phase sequence will cause Rotation alarm and 47 Neg Seq O V operation 101 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved SEPAM SERIES 20 40 AC MAIN 3 LINE IEC Typical SOURCE a b c ALT GND FAULT CKT 2 Relay Sepam Series 20 EXCEPT B21 or B22 Or 40 ALL xxxx 5A qt ZSCT qI zero sequence CT ALT GND FAULT CKT 1 SEPAM Series 20 40 APPLICATIONS REPRESENTED Zone Characteristics O C Protection Metering Feeder Non Dir O C I Non Dir O C 1 V P E Dir Grd O C 1 V P E Dir Ph amp Grd O C I V P E Motor Non Dir O C I Dir Grd O C LV P E Transformer Non Dir O C I Non Dir O C 1 V P E Dir Ph amp Grd O C 1 V P E Generator Non Dir O C 1 V P E Bus Volt Freq v Volt Freq dF dt v Application Series 20 Series 40 S20 S40 S41 S42 M20 M41 T20 T40 T42 G40 B21 B22 Circuit Breaker Contactor Control AC Main 3 Line IEC Typical Control and Monitoring Functions E A Sr NN H B6 B3 ot xxxx 5A q
228. ering event Characteristics Record content Set up file date channel characteristics measuring chain transformer ratio Sample file 12 values per cycle recorded signal Analog signals recorded 4 current channels la Ib Ic Ir 3 voltage channels Van Vbn Ven or Vab Vbc Vr Logical states recorded 10 logic inputs logic outputs O1 to O4 pick up 1 data item configurable by the logic equation editor Number of records stored 1 to 19 Total duration of a record 1sto10s The total records plus one should not exceed 20 s at 50 Hz and 16 s at 60 Hz Examples at 50 Hz 1x 10 s record 3 x 5 s records 19 x 1 s records Periods before triggering event 0 to 99 cycles File format COMTRADE 97 1 According to parameter setting with the SFT2841 software and factory set to 36 cycles 2 According to the type of sensors Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Metering Machine Operation Assistance Functions Thermal Capacity Used Cooling Time Constant Thermal Capacity Used Operation The thermal capacity used is calculated by the thermal protection algorithm The thermal capacity used measurement is given as a percentage of the rated thermal capacity Saving Thermal Capacity Used Value When the protection unit trips the current thermal capacity used is increased by 10 The 10 increase is used to take into account the
229. ernal synchronization a a a 121 Block thermal overload a a Free Switching of thermal settings Free Motor re acceleration Free Rotor rotation detection Free Block undercurrent Free Block closing E a a a a Free Open command Free Close command a a a Free Phase voltage transformer fuse melting Free Residual voltage transformer fuse melting Free External positive active energy counter u a a Free External negative active energy counter a a a a a Free External positive reactive energy counter a a a Free External negative reactive energy counter Free Logic Outputs Tripping 01 Block close 02 Watchdog a E 04 Close command a 011 Note All logic inputs are available through a communication link and are accessible in the SFT2841 matrix for other non predefined applications 96 63230 216 219 B1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Control and Monitoring Standard Logic Input Assignment Functions The table below lists the logic input assignment obtained by choosing the Standard assignment button in the SFT2841 software Logic inputs Open position u 111 Closed position u 112 Zone selective interlocking blocking reception 1 u 113 Zone selective interlocking blocking reception 2 u 121 Switching of groups of settings A B 113 External reset 7 E 7
230. erse LTI and IEC LTI B 0 01 to 0 93 Ext inverse EIT and IEC EIT C 0 13 to 15 47 IEEE moderately inverse 0 42 to 51 86 IEEE very inverse 0 73 to 90 57 IEEE extremely inverse 1 24 to 154 32 IAC inverse 0 34 to 42 08 IAC very inverse 0 61 to 75 75 IAC extremely inverse 1 08 to 134 4 3 Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC IEEE and IAC types 60 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Protection Breaker Failure ANSI Code 50BF Operation This function is designed to detect when a breaker does not open when a trip command is sent The breaker failure protection function is activated by an O1 output trip command received from the overcurrent protection functions 50 51 50N 51N 46 67N 67 It checks for the absence of current during the time interval specified by time delay T It can also consider the position of the circuit breaker read on the logic inputs to determine the actual opening of the breaker Automatic activation of this protection function requires the use of the program logic circuit breaker control function A specific input can also be used to activate the protection from the equation editor That option is useful for adding special cases of activation tripping by an external protection unit The time delayed output of the protection unit should be assigned to a logic output via the control matrix Starting and stopping the time delay T
231. erved amp Electric MT11201 Use and Commissioning Description These checks are carried out when the zero sequence current is measured by a specific sensor such as m CSH120 or CSH200 zero sequence CT m CSHS30 interposing ring CT whether it is installed on the secondary circuit of a single 1A or 5A CT which encompasses the three phases or on the neutral connection of the three 1A or 5A phase CTs m other zero sequence CT connected to an ACE990 interface The checks are also made when the residual voltage is calculated in Sepam or cannot be calculated and is therefore not available for the protection function a b c current test terminal box Ic N Checking Phase Current amp Voltage Input Connection Procedure 1 Connect according to the diagram below m a wire between the generator current terminals to inject current into the primary circuit of the zero sequence CT or CT with the wire passing through the zero sequence CT or CT in the P1 P2 direction with P1 the bus end and P2 the cable end m when applicable the generator voltage terminals to the voltage test terminal box so as to only supply Sepam s phase a voltage input and therefore obtain a residual voltage Vr Van Sepam Series 40 voltage test terminal box by on Van Vr Van Vbn Ven N single phase or 3 phase generator A 2007 Schnei
232. ervoltage Phase Rotation Direction Check Remanent Undervoltage Directional Active Overpower Directional Reactive Overpower Phase Undercurrent Temperature Monitoring Negative Sequence Current Unbalance Negative Sequence Overvoltage Excessive Starting Time Locked Rotor Thermal Overload Phase Overcurrent Breaker Failure Ground Fault Voltage Restrained Phase Overcurrent Overvoltage Neutral Voltage Displacement Starts per Hour Directional Phase Overcurrent Directional Ground Fault Recloser Overfrequency Underfrequency General Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 ff Electric 36 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 48 49 50 59 61 63 65 67 68 69 70 74 82 85 86 87 35 Protection Setting Ranges 5 to 100 of V p 0 05 s to 300 s 15 to 60 of Vi p 0 05 s to 300 s 5 to 100 of V p 0 05 s to 300 s 5 to 100 of V p 0 05 s to 300 s 1 to 120 of Sn 0 1 sto 300s 5 to 120 of SN 1 0 1 s to 300s 0 15 to 1 IB 0 05 s to 300s Alarm and trip set points 32 to 356 F 0 to 180 C Definite time 0 1 to 5 IB 0 1 s to 300s Inverse Definite Minimum Time IDMT 0 1 to 0 5 IB Schneider Electric 0 1 to 1 IB CEI IEEE 0 1sto1s Tripping curve Schneider Electric CEI SIT A LTI B VIT B EIT C IEEE MI D VI E El F 1 to 50 of V p 0 05 s to 300 s ANSI 48 51LR 14 Excessive Starting Time Locked Rotor 0 5 to 5 IB ST starting time 0 5 s to 300s L
233. ess to Sepam diagnostic data in the Sepam tab box included in Sepam diagnosis m in Parameter setting mode the switchgear diagnositic values may be modified operation counter cumulative breaking current to reset the values after a change of breaking device 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Use and Commissioning SFT2841 Setting amp Operating Software Configuring a Sepam Network Connection Window The SFT2841 software connection window is used to m select an existing Sepam network or configure a new one m set up the connection to the selected Sepam network m select one Sepam unit from the network and access its parameters settings and operation and maintenance information Configuring a Sepam Network Several configurations can be defined for the various Sepam installations A Sepam network configuration is identified by a name It is saved on the SFT2841 PC in a file in the SFT2841 installation directory default C Program Files Schneider SFT2841 Net Configurnig a Sepam network is in two parts m Configuring the communication network m Configuring the Sepam units Configuring the Communication Network To configure the communication network first define m The type of link between the PC and the Sepam network m The communication parameters according to the type of link selected o direct serial link o link via Ethernet TCP IP o link via telephone modem Net
234. eters window Communication configuration SFT2841 communication configuration window for ACE969FO Configuring the Communication Interfaces Configuring Modbus Advanced Parameters The Sepam remote control mode is selected from the Advanced parameters window Advanced Parameters Authorized Values Default Value Remote control mode Direct or SBO Select Direct Before Operate mode Configuring the Physical Layer of the ACE969 E LAN Port The E LAN port on the ACE969TP and ACE969FO communication interfaces is a 2 wire RS485 port The configuration parameters for the physical layer of the E LAN port are m Sepam address m transmission speed parity check type O The number of stop bits is always set at 1 o Ifa configuration with parity is selected each character will contain 11 bits 1 start bit 8 data bits 1 parity bit 1 stop bit If ano parity configuration is selected each character will contain 10 bits 1 start bit 8 data bits 1 stop bit Parameters Authorized Values Default Value Sepam address 1 to 247 1 Speed 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 baud 38400 baud Parity None Even or Odd Odd Configuration Tips m The Sepam address MUST be assigned before Sepam is connected to the communication network m You are also strongly advised to set the other physical layer configuration parameters before making the connection to the communication network m Modifying the configuration parameters during
235. f status changes is The first time frame is used to initialize Sepam with the absolute date and time The following frames are used to detect any time changes The synchronization pulse resets Sepam s internal clock In the initialization phase when Sepam is in non synchronous mode resetting is allowed within a window of 4 seconds In the initialization phase the resetting process switching of Sepam into synchronous mode is based on a measurement of the difference between Sepam s current time and the nearest ten second period This measurement is taken at the time of the receipt of the synchronization pulse following the initialization time frame Resetting is allowed if the difference is less than or equal to 4 seconds in which case Sepam switches to synchronous mode After switching to synchronous mode the resetting process is based on measuring a difference between Sepam s current time and the nearest ten second period when a synchronization pulse is received Resetting is adapted to match the synchronization pulse period The synchronization pulse period is determined automatically by Sepam when it is energized It is based on the first two pulses received The synchronization pulse must therefore be operational before Sepam is energized The synchronization function only operates after Sepam has been time set meaning after the disappearance of the incorrect time event Any time chan
236. f the circuit breaker closed data is not connected to a logic input the detection of a start is not conditioned by the position of the circuit breaker User Information The following information is available for the user m the waiting time before a start is allowed m the number of starts still allowed See the Machine operation assistance functions chapter Block Diagram DES2372 o logic input CB closed block closing logic input motor re acceleration thermal alarm hot state Clear Characteristics Period of Time P Setting 1 to 6 hours Resolution 1 Nt total Number of Starts Setting 1 to 60 Resolution 1 Nh and Nc Number of Consecutive Starts Setting 1 to Nt Resolution 1 T time Delay Stop Start Setting Omn lt T lt 90mn Resolution 1 mn or 1 digit 1 With Nh lt Ne 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 69 lectric MT11175 Protection Description The directional phase overcurrent function includes two groups of two units called respectively Group A and GroupB The mode for switching from one group to the other can be determined by parameter setting m by remote control TC3 TC4 m by logic input 113 113 0 group A 113 1 group B or by using the group by force Operation This protection function is three phase It includes a phase overcurrent function associated with direction detection It
237. file for editing m when applicable in the format of a file to be downloaded into Sepam using the SFT2841 software Checking Parameters and Protection Settings These checks are made when the Sepam parameter and protection settings have not been entered or downloaded during commissioning testing This is to verify the conformity of the parameter and protection settings entered with the values determined during the study 1 Go through all the parameter and protection setting screens in the SFT2841 software in the order proposed in guided mode 2 For each screen compare the values entered in the Sepam with the values recorded in the parameter and protection setting file 3 Correct any parameter and protection settings that have not been entered correctly proceeding as indicated in the Use of the SFT2841 software section of this manual Conclusion Once the checking has been done and proven to be conclusive as of that phase the parameter and protection settings should not be changed any further and are considered to be final In order to be conclusive the tests which follow must be performed with these parameter and protection settings no temporary modification of any of the values entered with the aim of facilitating a test is permissible 1 The aim of this check is not to confirm the relevance of the parameter and protection settings Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 235 amp Electric Use and Commissioning Check
238. fter it runs for a sufficient time For motors and generators T2 is calculated from the temperatures measured on the stator by Resistance Temperature Detectors RTDs 1 2 and 3 For transformers T2 is calculated according to the temperatures measured on the primary winding by RTDs 1 3 and 5 For better accuracy ambient temperature should be measured with RTD 8 If Other applications is selected in the RTD assignment table T2 is not calculated Once the calculation has been made the calculated value can be used to replace the T2 1 parameter in one of two ways depending on the configuration m automatically in which case each new calculated value updates the T2 constant used or m manually by entering the value in the T2 parameter 1 As a suggestion use the calculated T2 if the equipment has carried out at least three starting cycles followed by cooling 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric DE50479 Protection Blocked Start The thermal overload protection can block the closing of the motor s control device until the heat rise drops back down below a value that allows restarting This value takes into account the heat rise produced by the motor when starting The block function is grouped together with the starts per hour protection and the indication BLOCKED START informs the user Saving Heat Rise Value The current heat rise value is saved in case of auxiliary power outage Blockin
239. functional ground Screw tight all terminals even those not in use Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury ACE9092 RS232 RS485 Converter Function The ACE9092 converter is used to connect a master central computer equipped with a V24 RS232 type serial port as a standard feature to stations connected to a 2 wire RS485 network After setting the parameters the ACE9092 converter performs conversion network polarization and automatic frames dispatching between the master and the stations by two way simplex half duplex single pair transmission It accomplishes this without the need for flow control signals The ACE9092 converter also provides a 12 V DC or 24 V DC supply for the distributed power supply of the Sepam ACE9492 ACE959 or ACE969 interfaces The communication settings should be the same as the Sepam and supervisor communication settings Characteristics Weight Assembly 0 617 Ib 0 280 kg On symmetrical or asymmetrical DIN rail Power supply Galvanic isolation between ACE power supply and frame and between ACE power supply and interface supply Galvanic isolation between RS232 and RS485 interfaces Protection by time delayed fuse 5 mm x 20 mm 0 2 in x 0 79 in 110 to 240 V AC 10 47 to 63 Hz 2000 Vrms 50 Hz 1 min 1000 Vrms 50 Hz 1 min 1 A rating Data format Transmission delay Distributed power supply for Sepam
240. g Tripping Tripping the thermal overload protection may be blocked by the logic input Block thermal overload when required by the process Using Two Operating Rates The thermal overload protection function may be used to protect equipment with two operating rates for example m transformers with two ventilation modes with or without forced ventilation ONAN ONAF m two speed motors The protection function has two groups of settings Each group is suitable for equipment protection in one of the two operating rates The equipment s basis current used to calculate heat rise also depends on the operating rate m with rate 1 the basis current IB a general Sepam parameter is used to calculate the heat rise in the equipment m with rate 2 the basis current IB rate 2 a specific thermal overload protection setting is used to calculate the heat rise in the equipment Block Diagram logic input switching thermal settings parameter group selection heat rise leg At Eee equivalent current calculation l inverse Thermal Overload ANSI Code 49 RMS Switching from one group of thermal settings to the other is done without losing the heat rise value It is controlled by one of two means m a logic input assigned to the switching thermal settings function m when the phase current reaches an adjustable Is set point to be used to process switching the thermal settings of a motor with locked
241. ges greater than 4 seconds are made by sending a new time frame The switch from summer time to winter time and vice versa is made in this way as well There is a temporary loss of synchronism when the time is changed The external synchronization mode requires a synchronization clock to generate a precise periodic synchronization time pulse If Sepam is in correct time and synchronous status and if the difference in synchronism between the nearest ten second period and the receipt of the synchronization pulse is greater than the synchronism error for two consecutive synchronization pulses it switches into non synchronous status and generates the appearance of a not synchronous event Likewise if Sepam is in correct time and synchronous status and does not receive a synchronization pulse for 200 seconds generates the appearance of a not synchronous event 63230 216 219 B1 143 amp Electric Modbus Communication Remote Reading Settings Accessible for Remote Reading Reading of the settings of all the protection functions may be accessed remotely in two independent zones to enable operation with two masters Exchange Principle Remote reading of settings remote reading takes place in two steps m first of all the master indicates the code of the function for which it wishes to know the settings by means of a request frame The request is acknowledged in the Modbus sense of the term to free the network
242. gle at start of tripping zone 0 to 359 Angle at end of tripping zone 0 to 359 Isr set point CSH zero sequence CT 0 1 A to 30 A Definite time Inst 0 05 to 300 s 2A rating 1ACT 0 05 to 15 Inr min 0 1 A sensitive INr 0 1 CT IN Zero sequence CT 0 05 to 15 Inr min 0 1 A ACE990 range 1 Vsr set point Calculated Vr sum of 3 voltages 2 to 80 of V p Measured Vr external VT ANSI 81H Overfrequency 50 to 55 Hz or 60 to 65 Hz ANSI 81L Underfrequency 40 to 50 Hz or 50 to 60 Hz 0 6 to 80 of V p 0 1 sto 300s 0 1 s to 300 s 1 Tripping at1 2 Is Schneider amp Electric 38 63230 216 219 B1 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Protection Undervoltage ANSI Code 27 27S Operation The protection function is three phase and operates according to parameter setting with phase to neutral or phase to phase voltage m It picks up if one of the three phase to neutral or phase to phase voltages drops below the Vs or V s set point m Itincludes a definite time delay T m With phase to neutral operation it indicates the faulty phase in the alarm associated with the fault Block Diagram Vab or Van lt Vus or V_ S DE52310 Vbc or Vbn time delayed output lt Vis or Vlas Vac or Ven lt Vics or Vins pick up signal Characteristics VLS or V s Set Point Setting 5 VLP or Vap to 100 Vip or
243. h 140 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider Time Tagging Events Exchange Word The exchange word manages a special protocol that records events after a communication problem The event table is numbered for that purpose The exchange word includes two fields m most significant byte MSB exchange number 8 bits 0 255 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b09 bos Exchange number 0 255 Description of the MSB of the exchange word The exchange number contains a numbering byte which identifies the exchanges The exchange number is initialized to zero when Sepam is energized When it reaches its maximum value FFh it automatically returns to 0 Sepam numbers the exchanges and the master acknowledges the numbering m least significant byte LSB number of events 8 bits 0 4 b07 bO6 b05 b04 b03 bO2 bO1 bOO Number of events 0 4 Description of the LSB of the exchange word Sepam indicates the number of significant events in the event table in the least significant byte of the exchange word Each non significant event word is initialized to zero Event Table Acknowledgment To inform Sepam that the block read by the master has been correctly received the master writes the number of the last exchange made in the Exchange number field and resets the Number of events field of the exchange word to zero After acknowledg
244. h a grounded metal frame before phsycially connecting the CCA783 cable Plugging into Sepam Connecting Sepam to a PC equipped with SFT 2841 involves the following m plugging the 9 pin connector SUB D type into one of the PC communication ports Configuration of the PC communciation port via the Communication port function in the Options menu m plugging the 6 pin connector into the connector round minidin type situated behind the blanking plate on the front panel of Sepam or the DSM303 module Connection to Sepam There are two possibilities for setting up the connection between SFT2841 and Sepam m Connection function in the File menu m choice of connect to the Sepam at the start up of SFT2841 Once the connection with Sepam has been established Connected appears in the status bar and the Sepam connection window may be accessed in the work zone User Identification The window intended for the entry of the 4 digit password is activated m via the Passwords tab m via the Identification function in the Sepam menu m via the Identification icon eo The Return to Operating mode function in the Passwords tab removes access rights to parameter and protection setting mode Downloading Parameters and Protection Settings Parameter and protection setting files may only be downloaded in the connected Sepam in Parameter setting mode Once the connection has been established the procedu
245. h no restriction SFT 2841 Message Display Predefined messages are stored in Sepam s memory and appear m written out in text format in connected mode m in code number format in unconnected mode Personalized message editor The personalized messages are saved with the other Sepam parameters and protection settings and are displayed written out in text format in connected and unconnected modes bSt beS1 b gt SIN b gt SIN ext Yooft Yon Trip Message Processing on the Advanced UMI Display eeoeoee0e eo When an event occurs the related message appears on the advanced UMI display clear DES1148 The user presses the key to clear the message and be able to consult all the 10 25 2006 12 40 50 advanced UMI screens in the normal fashion DEFAULT PHASE 1A must press the S key to acknowledge latched events such as protection Trip la 162A outputs z AN Trip Ib 161A The list of messages remains accessible in the alarm history key in which the Trip Ic 250A N last 16 messages are stored The last 250 messages may be consulted with the ir SFT2841 software i 2 d i To delete the messages stored in the alarm history f IH A A m display the alarm history on the advanced UMI 5 y v S v m press the amp key Alarm message on the advanced UMI Signal Lamp Type Indication The nine yellow signal lamps on the front of Sepam are assigned by default to the following events
246. hase to neutral connection of the rated voltage of the VTs voltage v p V3 VI Siper o in an open delta arrangement vus V3 or v 8 3 When applicable CT rated primary current secondary injection IF Siaa of CT rated current 1Aor5A Phase displacement or Vr Ir 0 0 Sirera Residual current and Injecting 5A into the zero Zero sequence residual voltage input sequence CT primary circuit ae ee o connection Secondary injection VT rated primary phase to neutral of the rated voltage of the VTs voltage vr V3 Vi Se in an open delta arrangement vis 3 or v s 3 Phase displacement gr Vr Ir 0 0 ET Tests performed on ee ee ee esse ee Signatures EN ee Comments 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 247 ectric Use and Commissioning Sepam has a large number of self tests that are carried out in the base unit and additional modules The purpose of the self tests is m to detect events that may lead to nuisance tripping or does not trip when a fault occurs m to put Sepam in the fail safe position to avoid user errors m to notify the operator that a maintenance operation is required The Sepam diagnosis screen of the SFT2841 software provides access to data on the status of the 2 base unit and optional modules Diagrams Oats Lads Ernten Sone Cues TS Diagnostique Sepam Cmacntetunu girem au Sapam Dw aim Tye docehoason man Dans mans vn Rapare du Som Mina Os sota Ven bgcste ve
247. he rotor is locked on start LTS Large motors may have very long starting time due to inertia or a reduced voltage supply This starting time is longer than the permissive rotor blocking time To protect such a motor the LTS timer initiates a trip if a start has been detected I gt Is or if the motor speed is zero For anormal start the input 123 zero speed switch disables this protection Motor Acceleration When a motor accelerates it consumes a current in the vicinity of the starting current gt Is without the current first passing through a value less than 10 of IB The ST time delay which corresponds to the normal starting time can be reinitialized by the logic input motor re acceleration This will reinitialize the excessive starting time protection and set the locked rotor protection LT time delay to a low value Starting is detected when the current consumed is 10 greater than the IB curent After start begins an output is sent to the equation editor Is can be set at the motor current pickup for a mechanical JAM event Block Diagram starting in progress DE50460 tripping output locked rotor after starting logic input 4 motor re acceleration excessive starting time locked rotor logic input on start rotor rotation detection Characteristics Is Set Point Setting 50 IB lt Is lt 500 IB Resolution 1 Accuracy 0 5 Drop out pick up
248. he terminals of the output contact the voltage cancels itself out when the contact closes 4 At the end of the test press the SFT2841 Reset key to clear all messages and deactivate all outputs 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Use and Commissioning 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Validation and Checks Validating the Complete Protection Chain Principle The complete protection chain is validated during the simulation of a fault that causes tripping of the breaking device by Sepam Procedure 1 Select one of the protection functions that initiates the breaking device tripping 2 According to their incidence in the chain separate the function or functions related to the programmed or reprogrammed parts of the program logic 3 Inject a current and or apply a voltage corresponding to the fault according to the selected function or functions 4 Observe the breaking device tripping and the operation of the adapted parts of the program logic At the end of all the voltage and current application type checks put the covers back on the test terminal boxes Checking the Optional Module Connection Checking the RTD Inputs to the MET1482 Module The temperature monitoring function provided by Sepam T40 T42 M41 and G40 units checks the connection of each configured RTD An RTD FAULT alarm is generated whenever one of the RTDs is detected as being short circuted or disconne
249. htening torque 19 5 in Ib or 2 2 Nm Connection of analog output to screw type connector m One wire with cross section AWG 24 12 0 2 to 2 5 mm m Two wires with cross section AWG 24 18 0 2 to 1 mm Wiring precautions m Shielded cables are preferred m Use tinned copper braid to connect the shielding at least at the MSA141 end Re WIN 196 63230 216 219 B1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric PE50127 Installation DSM303 remote advanced UMI module 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved DSM303 Remote Advanced UMI Module Function When used with a Sepam that is not equipped with its own advanced user machine interface the DSM303 offers all the functions available on a Sepam integrated advanced UMI It can be installed on the front panel of the cubicle in the most suitable operating location m Reduced depth lt 1 2 in 30 mm m A single module for each Sepam to be connected by one of the CCA772 6 6 ft or 2 m or CCA774 13 1 ft or 4 m cables The module cannot be connected to Sepam units with integrated advanced UMIs Characteristics Weight 0 661 Ib 0 3 kg Assembly Flush mounted Operating temperature 13 F to 158 F 25 C to 70 C Environmental characteristics Same characteristics as Sepam base units Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 197 amp Electric Installation DSM303 Remote Advanced UMI Mod
250. ic Control and Monitoring Logic Input Output Assignment Functions Inputs and outputs can be assigned to predefined control and monitoring functions by using the SFT2841 software according to the uses listed in the table below Regardless of assignment status all logic inputs can be used for the SFT2841 customization functions according to specific application needs m inthe control matrix to link inputs to output relays LED indications or display messages m inthe logic equation editor as logic equation variables The control logic of each input can be inverted for undervoltage type operation Logic Inputs Open position E E 111 Closed position E E 112 Zone selective interlocking receive blocking input 1 a Free Zone selective interlocking receive blocking input 2 Free Switching of groups of settings A B 113 External reset E E Free External tripping a Free External tripping b E E Free External tripping c E Free Buchholz gas tripping Free Thermostat tripping Free Pressure tripping Free Thermistor tripping Free Buchholz gas alarm Free Thermostat alarm Free Pressure alarm Free Thermistor alarm E E Free End of charging position Free Block remote control Free SF6 u E E a Free Block recloser Free Ext
251. icant m xxFFh with the function code xx different from 00 and FFh The read request for the settings of the designated function is not valid The function is not included in the particular Sepam or remote reading of it is not authorized refer to the list of functions which accommodate remote reading of settings 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Modbus Communication CAUTION RISK OF UNINTENDED OPERATION m The device must only be configured and set by qualified personnel using the results ofthe installation protection system study m During installation commissioning and following any modification verify that the Sepam configuration and protection function settings are consistent with the results of this study Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Remote Settings Access Remote Setting Data that can be Remotely Set Writing of the settings of all the protection functions may be accessed remotely Exchange Principle Remote setting is allowed for Sepam units Remote setting is carried out for a given function unit by unit It takes place in two steps m first of all the master indicates the function code and unit number followed by the values of all the settings in the write request frame The request is acknowledged to free the network m the master then reads a reply zone design
252. idual voltage is delivered by three VTs on the secondary circuits connected in an open delta assembly and when the residual current is obtained by a specific sensor such as m CSH120 or CSH200 zero sequence CT m CSHS30 interposing ring CT whether it is installed on the secondary circuit of a single 1A or 5A CT which encompasses the three phases or on the neutral connection of the three 1A or 5A phase CTs m other zero sequence CT connected to an ACE990 interface a gb ae o O e O e e Q current test T terminal box F H TE i I l re i SEI T Fle 2o OE Ai Ge en Se en OL la Ib Ic N Checking Residual Current amp Residual Voltage Input Connection Procedure 1 Connect according to the diagram below m the generator voltage terminals to the voltage test terminal box using the plug provided m a wire between the generator current terminals to inject current into the primary circuit of the zero sequence CT or CT with the wire passing through the zero sequence CT or CT in the P1 P2 direction with P1 the bus end and P2 the cable end Sepam Series 40 voltage test terminal box Van Vbn Ven N single phase or 3 phase A generator 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 2 Turn the generator on 3 Apply a V voltage set to the rated secondary voltage of the VTs connected in an open delta arrangement V s V3 or V s 3 4 Inject an
253. ignals the ACE919 converters perform network polarization and impedance matching The ACE919 converters also provide a 12 V DC or 24 V DC supply for the distributed power supply of the Sepam ACE9492 ACE959 or ACE969 interfaces There are two types of ACE919 converter m ACE919CC DC powered m ACE919CA AC powered lt Characteristics Weight Assembly 0 617 Ib 0 280 kg On symmetrical or asymmetrical DIN rail 110 to 240 V AC 10 47 to 63 Hz 1 A rating Power supply 24 to 48 V DC 20 Protection by time delayed fuse 5 mm x 20 mm 0 2 in x 0 79 in Galvanic isolation between ACE power supply and frame and between ACE power supply and interface supply 1 A rating 2000 Vrms 50 Hz 1 min Data format Transmission delay Distributed power supply for Sepam interfaces Maximum number of Sepam interfaces with distributed supply 11 bits 1 start 8 data 1 parity 1 stop lt 100 ns 12 V DC or 24 V DC 12 Operating temperature 23 F to 131 F 5 C to 55 C 60255 22 4 Fast transient bursts 5 ns 4 kV with capacitive coupling in common mode 2 kV with direct coupling in common mode 1 kV with direct coupling in differential mode 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 1 kV common mode 0 5 kV differential mode 3 kV common mode 1 kV differential mode 1 MHz damped oscillating wave 60255 22 1 1 2 50 u
254. inals via the test box 4 Inject the generator current set to the rated secondary current of the CTs 1A or 5A and in phase vith the V_ voltage applied generator phase displacement a V 0 to Sepam s phase a current input via the text box 5 Use the SFT2841 software to check the following m the value indicated for la phase current is approximately equal to the rated primary current of the CT m the value indicated for Van phase to neutral voltage is approximately equal to the rated primary phase to neutral voltage of the VT V p Vuun V3 m the value indicated for the phase displacement pa Van la between the la current and Van voltage is approximately equal to 0 6 Proceed in the same way by circular permutation with the phase b and c voltages and currents to check the Ib Vbn pb Vbn Ib and Ic Ven pc Ven Ic values 7 Turn the generator off Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Use and Commissioning Description This check is made when the voltages are supplied by a two VT assembly with VT primary circuits connected between phases of the distributed voltage which means that the residual voltage is obtained outside Sepam by three VTs connected via their secondary circuits in an open delta arrangement or when applicable is not used for the protection function a amp b Eo Ee e e e e J e current test erminal box TH F I
255. ing Phase Current amp Voltage Input Connection With 3 Phase Generator Procedure 1 Connect the 3 phase voltage and current generator to the corresponding test terminal boxes using the plugs provided according to the appropriate diagram in terms of the number of VTs connected to Sepam m block diagram with three VTs connected to Sepam ojoj MT11197 current test Sepam Series 40 voltage test terminal box terminal box 3 phase t generator N 5 2 236 63230 216 219 B1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Use and Commissioning ojoj MT11198 current test terminal box Checking Phase Current amp Voltage Input Connection With 3 Phase Generator Block Diagram with Two VTs connected to Sepam Sepam Series 40 voltage test terminal box jou Vbn Ven Van Vbn Vcn N 3 phase generator 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 2 Turn the generator on 3 Apply the three generator voltages Van Vbn and Vcn balanced and set to the rated secondary phase to neutral voltage of the VTs V S Vi S V3 4 Inject the three generator currents la Ib and Ic balanced and set to the rated secondary current of the CTs 1A or 5A and in phase with the voltages applied generator phase
256. ins permanently open Dead Time The shot n dead time delay is activated by the circuit breaker tripping command given by the recloser in shot n The breaking device remains open throughout the time delay At the end of the cycle n dead time delay the n 1 cycle begins and the recloser commands the closing of the circuit breaker Operation Initializating the Recloser The recloser is ready to operate if all of the following conditions are met m CB control function activated and recloser in service m circuit breaker closed m safety time until 79 ready elapsed m none of the recloser block conditions is true see further on The recloser ready information can be viewed with the control matrix 82 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider Recloser ANSI Code 79 Recloser Shots m case of a cleared fault following a reclosing command if the fault does not appear after the reclaim time has run out the recloser reinitializes and a message appears on the display see example 1 m case of a fault that is not cleared following instantaneous or time delayed tripping by the protection unit activation of the dead time associated with the first active cycle At the end of the dead time a closing command is given which activates the reclaim time If the protection unit detects the fault before the end of the time delay a tripping command is given and the following reclosing shot activates o Ifthe fault persists after all active shots h
257. int C 8 Reserved 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 Reserved ANSI 46 Negative Sequence Unbalance Function number 03xx relay 1 xx 01 relay 2 xx 02 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 3 Activity oO 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Tripping curve O 7 Is set point IB 8 Tripping time delay 10 ms 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Reserved 150 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Modbus Communication 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Remote Settings Access ANSI 47 Negative Sequence Overvoltage Function number 1901 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 3 Activity a 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Vs2 set point Vip 7 Tripping time delay 10 ms 8 Reserved 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 Reserved ANSI 48 51LR 14 Locked Rotor Excessive Starting Time Function number 0601 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 3 Activity 0 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Is set point IB 7 Excessive starting time delay 10 ms 8 Locked rotor time delay 10 ms 9 Locked rotor on start time delay 10 ms 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Reserved 13 Reserved ANSI 49RMS Thermal Overload
258. ion lt V0146 Replacement and Repair When Sepam or a module is considered to be faulty have it replaced by a new product or module since the components cannot be repaired Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Gf Electric Schneider Electric Electrical equipment should be installed operated serviced and maintained only by qualified 295 Tech Park Drive Suite 100 personnel No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising LaVergne TN 37086 out ofthe use of this material Tel 1 888 SquareD 888 778 2733 www schneider electric com 63230 216 219 B1 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved
259. ion delivered The language version is chosen at the time of Sepam parameter setting The messages are visible on the Sepam display units equipped with advanced UMI and in the SFT2841 Alarms screen m the number and type of predefined messages depend on type of Sepam The table below gives the complete list of all predefined messages List of Messages Functions UK English US English US Phase overcurrent PHASE FAULT 2 PHASE FAULT Voltage restrained phase overcurrent O C V REST O C V REST 2 Ground fault EARTH FAULT GROUND FAULT Circuit breaker failure BREAKER FAILURE BREAKER FAILURE Unbalance negative sequence UNBALANCE UNBALANCE Directional phase overcurrent DIR PHASE FAULT DIR PHASE FAULT 2 Directional ground fault DIR EARTH FAULT DIR GROUND FAULT Active overpower REVERSE P REVERSE P Reactive overpower REVERSE Q REVERSE Q Thermal overload THERMAL ALARM THERMAL ALARM THERMAL TRIP THERMAL TRIP Locked rotor ROTOR BLOCKING JAMMED STALL Locked rotor at startup STRT LOCKED ROT LOCKED ROTOR Excessive starting time LONG START LONG START Number of starts START INHIBIT BLOCKED START Phase undercurrent UNDERCURRENT UNDERCURRENT Overvoltage OVERVOLTAGE 3 OVERVOLTAGE 3 Undervoltage UNDERVOLTAGE 3 UNDERVOLTAGE 3 Positive sequence undervoltage UNDERVOLT PS UNDERVOLT PS ROTATION REV ROTATION Neutral voltage displa
260. ion to the usual cases Sepam can send Modbus type 07 exception replies not acknowledged if another remote reading request is being processed Reply Frame The reply sent back by Sepam fits into a zone with a maximum length of 25 words at the address 1E00h or 2000h which comprises the following 1E00h 1E7Ch 2000h 207Ch B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 BO9 BO8 BO7 BO6 B05 B04 BOS BO2 BO1 BOO Function code Unit number Settings This zone is read by a Modbus read word operation function 3 at the address 2000h The length of the exchange may concern m first word only validity test m maximum size of the zone 125 mots m usable size of the zone determined by the function being addressed However reading must always begin at the first word in the zone any other address triggers an exception reply incorrect address The first word in the zone function code and unit number can have the following values m xxyy with o function code xx different from 00 and FFh o unit number yy different from FFh The settings are available and confirmed They word is a copy of the request frame The zone contents remain valid until the next request is made m FFFFh the request frame has been processed but the results in the reply zone are not yet available It is necessary to repeat reply frame reading The other words are not signif
261. ion word 000D R 3 Not managed 0 Command 000E R W 3 16 Not managed Init to 0 Extension address 000F R 3 02CC 1 MSB word 2 major index LSB word 2 minor index Event 1 Zone The event zone is a table containing a maximum of four time tagged events Events should be read in a single block containing 33 words using function 3 The exchange word can be written using functions 6 or 16 and read individually using function 3 Events 1 Zone Word Address Access Modbus Function Enabled Exchange word 0040 Read write 3 6 16 Event n 1 0041 0048 Read 3 Event n 2 0049 0050 Read 3 Event n 3 0051 0058 Read 3 Event n 4 0059 0060 Read 3 See Time Tagging Events chapter for data format Event 2 Zone The event zone is a table containing a maximum of four time tagged events Events should be read in a single block containing 33 words using function 3 The exchange word can be written using functions 6 or 16 and read individually using function 3 Event 2 Zone Word Address Access Modbus Function Enabled Exchange word 0070 Read write 3 6 16 Event n 1 0071 0078 Read 3 Event n 2 0079 0080 Read 3 Event n 3 0081 0088 Read 3 Event n 4 0089 0090 Read 3 See Time Tagging Events chapter for data format 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 127 ectric Modbus Communication Data Addresses and Encoding Remote Control Zone The remote control zone is a table containing the pr
262. ip Group A type 3 Vsr 0 1 VLP 15 Group A timer hold curve 16 Group A timer hold delay 10 ms 17 Group A memory time 10 ms 18 Group A memory voltage VLP 19 Reserved 20 Reserved 21 Reserved 22 Reserved 23 Group B direction O line 1 bus 24 Group B types 1 and 2 characteristic angle 0 45 angle 1 0 angle 2 15 angle 3 30 angle 4 45 angle 5 60 angle 6 90 angle Group B type 3 limit 1 0 to 359 25 Group B type 1 sector 2 76 sector 3 83 sector 4 86 sector Group B type 3 limit 2 0 to 359 26 Group B tripping curve 27 Group B types 1 and 2 Isr set point 0 1 A Group B type 3 Isr set point 0 01 A 28 Group B tripping time delay 10 ms 29 Group B types 1 and 2 Vsr VLP Group B type 3 Vsr 0 1 VLP 30 Group B timer hold curve 31 Group B timer hold delay 10 ms 32 Group B memory time 10 ms 33 Group B memory voltage Vip 34 Reserved 35 Reserved 36 Reserved 37 Reserved 156 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Modbus Communication Remote Settings Access ANSI 79 Recloser Function number 1701 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Activity 2 Number of shots 1to4 3 Reclaim time 10 ms 4 Safety time until ready 10 ms 5 Dead time extension 6 Maximum waiting time 10 ms
263. ives the values of K ts Ts10 as a function of I Is of time delay standard inverse very inverse extremely In the column corresponding to the type of time delay read the value K tsA Ts10 inverse find the operation time for a current value IA on the line for IA Is the operation time tA for the current IA with the Is and T settings is tA K T On the standard curve of the same type read the Example operation time tsA that corresponds to the relative Data current IA Is and the operation time Ts10 that m type of time delay very inverse time VIT corresponds to the relative current I Is 10 m set point Is Pee m time delay T 0 8 s The operation time tA for the current IA with the Isand Question Wnat is the operation time for the current IA 6 Is T settings is tA tsA x T Ts10 Reading the table VIT column line I Is 6 therefore k 1 8 ts Answer The operation time for the current IA is t 1 80 x 0 8 1 44 s 7 gt IAls 10 Is Table of K values is SIT VIT LTI EIT UIT RI IEEE MI IEEE VI IEEE El IAC I IAC VI IAC El and IEC A and IEC B and IEC C IEC D IEC E IEC F 1 0 3 062 62 005 62 272 200 226 1 1 24 700 1 90 000 1 471 429 1 2 534 22 461 136 228 330 606 19 033 45 678 122 172 1 2 12 901 45 000 225 000 545 905 2 216 11 777 65 390 157 946 9 413 34
264. iving mode 40 mA maximum in sending mode Number of Maximum Length with Maximum Length with Sepam Units 12 V DC Power Supply 24 V DC Power Supply 5 1000 ft 320 m 3300 ft 1000 m 10 590 ft 180 m 2500 ft 750 m 20 520 ft 160 m 1500 ft 450 m 25 410 ft 125 m 1200 ft 375 m Description and Dimensions A and B Terminal blocks for network cable RJ45 socket to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cable D Terminal block for a separate auxiliary power supply 12 V DC or 24 V DC Grounding terminal 1 Link activity LED flashes when communication is active sending or receiving in progress 2 Jumper for 4 wire RS485 network line end impedance matching with load resistor Re 150 Q to be set to m 2B if the module is not at one end of the network default position m Rc if the module is at one end of the network 3 Network cable clamps inner diameter of clamp 0 24 in or 6 mm Connection m Connection of network cable to screw type terminal blocks A and m Connection of the grounding terminal by tinned copper braid with cross section gt AWG 10 6 mm or cable with cross section gt AWG 12 2 5 mm and length lt 7 9 in 200 mm fitted with a 0 16 in 4 mm ring lug Check the tightness maximum tightening torque 19 5 Ib in or 2 2 Nm m The interfaces are fitted with clamps to hold the network cable and recover shielding at the incoming and outgoing point
265. k up ratio Time Delay T Operation Time at 10 Isr 93 5 5 Setting definite time inst 50 ms lt T lt 300 s IDMT 100 ms lt T lt 12 5 s or TMS Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Accuracy definite time 2 or 10 ms to 25 ms IDMT Class 5 or from 10 to 25 ms Timer Hold Delay T1 Definite time timer hold 0 50 ms lt T1 lt 300 s IDMT Characteristic Times Operation time 0 5s lt T1 lt 20s Pick up lt 40 ms at 2 Isr typically 25 ms Confirmed instantaneous m inst lt 50 ms at2 Isr for Isr gt 0 3 INr typically 35 ms E inst lt 70 ms at 2 Isr for Isr lt 0 3 INr typically 50 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 40 ms for T1 0 amp Electric 63230 216 219 B1 79 DE51201 Protection Directional Ground Fault ANSI Code 67N 67NC Lim 1 Type 3 Operation This protection function operates like a ground fault protection function with added angular direction criterion Lim 1 Lim 2 It is adapted for distribution networks in which the neutral grounding system varies according to the operating mode Isrset point The tripping direction can be set at the bus end or line end ae The residual current is measured at the Sepam Ir input Tripping zone The time delay may be definite time DT In choosing an Isr setting equal to zero the protection is equivalent to the neutral voltage displacement protection ANSI 59N Block Diagram CSH ZSCT
266. l synchronization via the network accuracy is linked to the master and its mastery of time frame transmission in the communication network Sepam is synchronized without delay at the end of the receipt of the frame Time changes are made by sending a frame to Sepam with the new date and time Sepam then switches into a transitional non synchronous status Architecture for internal synchronization via the communication natwark When Sepam is in synchronous status if no time message is received for 200 seconds the appearance of the not synchronous event is triggered 142 63230 216 219 B1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric DE50468 Modbus Communication master computer clock JL synchronization link network Architecture for external synchronization via a logic input 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider Time Tagging Events Synchronization cont d External Synchronization via a Logic Input Mode Sepam can be synchronized externally by means of a logic input 121 the MES114 module is required The synchronization pulse is determined by the rising edge of the logic input Sepam can adapt to all synchronization pulse periods from 10 to 60 s by 10s steps The shorter the synchronization period the more accurate time tagging o
267. ld be energized as quickly as possible If this is not possible the cubicle reheating system should be activated Environment of the Installed Sepam Operating in a Damp Environment The temperature relative humidity factors must be compatible with the unit s environmental withstand characteristics If the use conditions are outside the normal zone special arrangements should be made before commissioning such as air conditioning of the premises Operating in a Polluted Atmosphere A contaminated industrial atmosphere such as the presence of chlorine hydrofluoric acid sulfur solvents etc can cause corrosion of the electronic components in which case environmental control arrangements should be made such as pressurized premises with filtered air etc before commissioning The effect of corrosion on Sepam has been tested according to the IEC 60068 2 60 standard Sepam is certified level C under the following test conditions m 2 gas test 21 days 77 F 25 C 75 relative humidity 0 5 ppm H S 1 ppm SO m 4 gas test 21 days 77 F 25 C 75 relative humidity 0 01 ppm H S 0 2 ppm SO 0 2 ppm NO 0 01 ppm Cl Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 165 amp Electric Installation MT10352 DE52160 DE52259 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider amp Electric Equipment Identification Base Unit Identification Each Sepam comes in a single package which contains The base unit and two connectors m 1x 20 pin co
268. ll Rights Reserved Lp Electric Control and Monitoring Definition of Symbols Functions This page gives the meaning of symbols Pulse Mode Operation used in the block diagrams that illustrate the m on pulse used to create a short duration pulse 1 cycle each time a signal different control and monitoring functions in appears this chapter Logic functions x N OR VA E SEEN Equation S X Y Z DE50675 N lt Xx N m off pulse used to create a short duration pulse 1 cycle each time a signal m AND disappears DE50676 N lt X N DE50682 x Equation S X x Y x Z s m exclusive OR XOR DE50677 an Note the disappearance of a signal may be caused by an auxiliary power outage S 1 if one and only one input is set to 1 S 1ifX Y Z 1 Bistable Functions Bistable functions may be used to store values These functions may use the complement ofone gs b or more input values fol I Equation S X S 1 if X 0 i I I NT 7 z I Delay Timers mmm Two types of delay timers l l m on delay timer used to delay the appearance of a signal by a time T b x EEE s Equation B S R xB m Complement DE50683 DE50678 DE50679 lt T m off delay timer used to delay the disappearance of a signal by a time T 0 T x s DE50680 TH 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 95 lectr
269. locking Radial Network Closed Ring Network Substation with Two Parallel Mains Disturbance Recording Triggering Switching Groups of Settings Local Indication Control Matrix Logic Equations Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 amp Electric 94 95 96 97 98 105 105 107 109 110 111 112 114 115 93 DE50794 Control and Monitoring Functions Protection functions a 94 63230 216 219 B1 Predefined control and monitoring functions Description Overview Sepam performs control and monitoring functions required for electrical network operation The main control and monitoring functions are predefined and fit the applications most frequently used They are ready to use and are implemented by simple parameter setting after the necessary logic inputs outputs have been assigned The predefined control and monitoring functions can be adapted for particular needs using the SFT2841 software which offers the following customization options m logic equation editor to adapt and complete predefined control and monitoring functions m creation of user messages for local display m customization of the control matrix by changing the assignment of output relays LEDs and display messages Operating Principle Processing each control and monitoring function is broken down into three phases m input data acquisition o results of protection function processing o external logic data connected to the logic inputs of an optional
270. max I 1 to 4 max Ir 1 to 4 directional max 1 to 2 Activation of shot 1 inst delayed no activation inst delayed no activation inst delayed no activation directional max Ir 1 to 2 V_TRIPCB output logic equation max 1 to 4 max Ir 1 to 4 inst delayed no activation activation no activation Activation of shots 2 3 and 4 inst delayed no activation inst delayed no activation directional max 1 to 2 inst delayed no activation directional max Ir 1 to 2 V_TRIPCB output logic equation inst delayed no activation activation no activation Time Delays Reclaim time 0 1 to 300 s Dead time shot 1 0 1 to 300 s shot 2 0 1 to 300 s shot 3 0 1 to 300 s shot 4 0 1 to 300 s Safety time until 79 ready 0 to 60 s Maximum additional dead time 0 1 to 60 s Twait_max Accuracy 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit 1 If a protection function that does not activate reclosing shots leads to circuit breaker opening the recloser is blocked 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric MT10555 MT10556 Protection Recloser ANSI Code 79 Example 1 Fault Cleared after the Second Shot Ground Fault 50N 51N unit 1 instantaneous 50N 51N unit 1 T 500 ms Circuit breaker open Recloser ready Remote indication Reclosing in progress Remote indication Reclosing successful
271. mber of valid frames received CPT9 m number of invalid error frames received CPT2 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Modbus Communication Link Activity LED The ACE interface link activity LEDs are activated by variations in the signal on the Modbus network When the supervisor communicates with Sepam during transmission or reception these LEDs flash After wiring check the information given by the link activity LEDs when the supervisor operates Note Flashing indicates that there is traffic passing to or from Sepam it does not mean that the exchanges are valid Functional Test If questions arise about link operation m run read write cycles in the test zone m use Modbus diagnosis function 8 sub code 0 echo mode The Modbus frames below transmitted or received by a supervisor are an example of a test performed when communication is set up Test Zone Read Transmission 01 03 0C00 0002 C75B Reception 01 03 04 0000 0000 FA33 Write Transmission 01 10 0C00 0001 02 1234 6727 Reception 01 10 0C00 0001 0299 Read Transmission 01 03 0C00 0001 875A Reception 01 03 02 1234 B533 Function 8 Modbus Diagnosis Echo Mode Transmission 01 08 0000 1234 ED7C Reception 01 08 0000 1234 ED7C Even in echo mode Sepam recalculates and checks the CRC sent by the master m if the CRC received is valid Sepam replies m ifthe CRC received is i
272. me delay Reserved Reserved Reserved j 2 0 INIo om BY j N o Reserved ANSI 32P Active Overpower Function number 2301 Setting Data Latching Format Unit CB control Activity AJW N Type 0 reverse power 1 overpower Reserved Reserved Ps set point JINJA Tripping time delay 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Reserved Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 amp Electric 149 Modbus Communication Remote Settings Access ANSI 32Q Reactive Overpower Function Number 2401 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 3 Activity O 4 Type 0 reverse power 1 overpower 5 Reserved 6 Reserved T Qs set point 100 var 8 Tripping time delay 10 ms 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Reserved ANSI 37 Phase Undercurrent Function number 0501 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 3 Activity O 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Is set point IB 7 Tripping time delay 10 ms 8 Reserved 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 Reserved ANSI 38 49T Temperature Monitoring Function number 15xx relay 1 xx 01 to relay 16 xx 10h Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 3 Activity 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Alarm set point C 7 Trip set po
273. me pick up lt 80 ms Overshoot time lt 40 ms Reset time lt 50 ms 1 IN reference conditions IEC 60255 6 86 63230 216 219 B1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Protection General Trip Curves Presentation of tripping curve operationand Definite Time Protection settings for protection functions using The tripping time is constant The time delay is started when the set point is overrun m definite time tA m DMT MT10911 E timer hold Definite time protection principle Inverse Definite Minimum Time IDMT protection The operation time depends on the protected value phase current ground fault current etc in accordance with standards IEC 60255 3 BS 142 and IEEE C 37112 Operation is represented by a characteristic curve such as m t f l curve for the phase overcurrent function m t f Ir curve for the ground fault function The rest of the document is based on t f I the reasoning may be extended to other variables Ir etc The curve is defined by m its type standard inverse very inverse extremely inverse m current setting Is which corresponds to the vertical asymptote of the curve m time delay T which corresponds to the operation time for 10 Is These three settings are made chronologically by type Is current time delay T Changing the time delay T setting by x changes all of the operation times in the curve by x y type 1 DE50666 112 10 20 Wg
274. ment the four events in the event table are initialized to zero and the old acknowledged events are erased in Sepam Until the exchange word written by the master becomes X 0 with X number of the previous exchange that the master wishes to acknowledge the exchange word in the table remains at X number of previous events Sepam only advances the exchange number when new events are present X 1 number of new events If the event table is empty Sepam performs no processing operations when the master reads the event table or the exchange word The data are encoded in binary format Clearing an Event Queue Writing a value xxFFh in the exchange word any exchange number event number FFh reinitializes the corresponding event queue all stored events not yet transmitted are deleted Sepam in Data Loss 1 No Data Loss 0 status Sepam has two internal storage queues with a capacity of 64 events If one of the queues becomes filled namely 63 events already present the data loss event is generated by Sepam in the 64 position The event detection process stops and the most recent events are lost 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Modbus Communication 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Time Tagging Events Event Encoding Description An event is encoded in eight words with the following structure Most Significant Byte Least Significant Byte
275. mental component Tripping current is the maximum RMS value measured during a 30 ms interval after the tripping contact activates on output O1 Readout The measurements may be accessed via m advanced UMI display unit by pressing the amp key m aPC with SFT2841 software m acommunication link Characteristics Measurement range 0 1 to 40 In Unit AorkA Accuracy 5 1 digit Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 0 1A 1 IN rated current set in the general settings Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 21 amp Electric Metering Network Diagnosis Functions Negative Sequence Current Unbalance Operation This function gives the negative sequence component T I2 IB The negative sequence current is determined based on the phase currents m 3phases gt 1 gt 2 gt 2 g lata Ib alc j22 with x e 3 m 2 phases j22 with x e These two formulas are equal when there is no ground fault Readout The measurements may be accessed via m advanced UMI display unit by pressing the amp key m aPC with SFT2841 software m the communication link Characteristics Measurement range 10 to 500 Unit IB Accuracy 2 Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1 Refresh interval 1 second typical 22 63230 216 219 B1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric DE50412 MT11029 Metering or Vr Phase displacement or g1 V1 Phase displac
276. ments alarms protection settings m writing remote control commands Two manuals describe DNP3 and IEC 60870 5 103 protocols for all Sepam units m DNP3 communication user manual reference 63230 216 236 m IEC 60870 5 103 communication user manual reference 63230 216 237 Diagnosis Three types of diagnosis data for improved operation m network and machine diagnosis tripping current context of the last 5 trips unbalance ratio disturbance recording m switchgear diagnosis cumulative breaking current trip circuit supervision operating time m diagnosis of the protection unit and additional modules continuous self testing watchdog Control and Monitoring m circuit breaker program logic ready to use requiring no auxiliary relays or Ar additional wiring es weee E Prr N AR ne ende m adaptation of control functions by a logic equation editor majan ser ze S o m preprogrammed customizable alarm messages on messages on UMI PE50298 User Machine Interface Two levels of User Machine Interface UMI are available as the user requires m Basic UMI an economical solution for installations that do not require local operation run via a remote monitoring and control system m Fixed or Remote Advanced UMI a graphic LCD display and 9 key keypad are used to display the measurement and diagnosis values alarm and operating messages and provide access to protection and parameter setting values for installations th
277. mn Refresh period 1 second typical Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved EJ Electric Metering 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Machine Operation Assistance Functions Hours Counter Starting Current amp Starting Overload Time Running Hours Counter and Operating Time The counter gives the total run time that the protected device motor generator or transformer has been operating gt 0 1 IB The initial counter value may be modified using the SFT2841 software This value is saved in the event of an auxiliary power outage Readout The measurements may be accessed via m advanced UMI display unit by pressing the amp key m aPC with SFT2841 software m acommunication link Characteristics Range 0 to 65535 Unit hours Starting Current and Starting Overload Time Operation Starting overload time is the time between the moment at which one of the 3 phase currents exceeds 1 2 IB and the moment at which the three currents drop back below 1 2 IB The maximum phase current obtained during this period is the starting overload current The two values are saved in case of auxiliary power outage Readout The measurements may be accessed via m advanced UMI display unit by pressing the key m aPC with SFT2841 software m acommunication link Characteristics Starting Overload Time Measurement range 0 to 300 s Unit s or ms Display format
278. modem on the Sepam side These characteristics match a configuration profile commonly known as an industrial profile as opposed to the configuration of modems used in offices Depending on the type of modem used the configuration will either be via AT commands from a PC using HyperTerminal or the configuration tool that may have been supplied with the modem or by setting switches see the modem manufacturer s manual Industrial Profile Configuration Characteristics AT command Transmission in buffered mode without error correction NO force amp Q6 Data compression deactivated CO Line quality monitoring deactivated EO DTR signal assumed to be permanently off allows the modem amp DO connection to be established automatically on an incoming call CD signal off when carrier is present amp C1 All reports made to Sepam blocked Q1 Character echo suppression EO No flow control amp KO 222 63230 216 219 B1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric PE50591 PE50592 Use and Commissioning Sepam network connected to SFT2841 a oa ng Bab SONIA he we GD hemes CVT am CTY hegre Comets un On fpa A J m o e e sana oar men 3 Comet Min SA Fi CAM tn Da connected to a communication network 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved SFT2841 Setting amp Operating Software Configuring a Sepam Network Identifying Sepam Units Conn
279. mpensate for the information in these v motor cold curve CHINES D c 2 4007 The time constant in this case is theoretically the shortest one however it should not 2 motor hot curve A be determined in the same way as that of the first relay o o g 100 Sepam hot curve The thermal overload protection switches between the first and second relay if the e equivalent current leq exceeds the Is value set point current or leq gt Is lt starting at Vi Example 4 starting at 0 9 Vi Transformer with two ventilation modes lp The following data is given The rated current of a transformer with two ventilation modes is m B 200 A without forced ventilation ONAN mode the transformer s main operating rate m B 240 A with forced ventilation ONAF mode a temporary operating rate to have 20 more power available The basis current setting for ventilation operating rate 1 IB 200 A this is set in Sepam general parameters The basis current setting for ventilation operating rate 2 IB2 240 A this is set in the specific thermal overload protection settings Switching thermal settings through the logic input is accomplished by the switching thermal settings function and is connected to the transformer ventilation control unit The settings related to each ventilation operating rate Es set points time constants are determined according to the transformer characteristics provided by the manufacturer Schneider 2007 Schn
280. mperatures 1 to 16 016C 017B R 3 4 16S 1 C 1 F External positive active energy Ea ext 017C 017D R 3 4 32NS 100 kW h External negative active energy Ea ext 017E 017F R 3 4 32NS 100 kW h External positive reactive energy Er ext 0180 0181 R 3 4 32NS 100 kvar h External negative reactive energy Er ext 0182 0183 R 3 4 32NS 100 kvar h Learnt cooling time constant T2 49 RMS 0184 R 3 4 16NS mn thermal rate 1 Learnt cooling time constant T2 49 RMS 0185 R 3 4 16NS mn thermal rate 2 Phase Displacement Zone Phase Displacement Word Address Access Modbus Function Format Unit Enabled Phase displacement or 01A0 01A1 L 3 4 32NS 1 Phase displacement r 01A2 01A3 L 3 4 32NS 1 Phase displacement pa 01A4 01A5 L 3 4 32NS 1 Phase displacement ob 01A6 01A7 L 3 4 32NS 1 Phase displacement pc 01A8 01A9 L 3 4 32NS 1 Tripping Context Zone Latest Tripping Context Word Address Access Modbus Function Format Unit Modbus Enabled Time tagging of the context see Time 0250 0253 R 3 IEC Tagging Events chapter Tripping current Itripa 0254 R 3 4 32NS 0 1A Tripping current Itripb 0256 R 3 4 32NS 0 1 A Tripping current Itripc 0258 R 3 4 32NS 0 1 A Residual current Ir Sum 025A R 3 4 32NS 0 1 A Residual current Ir measured 025C R 3 4 32NS 0 1 A Phase to phase voltage Vab 025E R 3 4 32NS 1V Phase to phase voltage Vbc 0260 R 3 4 32NS 1V Phase to phase voltage Vca 0262 R 3 4 32NS 1V Phase to neutral voltage Van 0264 R 3 4 32NS 1V Phase to neutral voltage Vbn
281. n be triggered by different events either by control matrix parameter setting or by manual action m triggering by the grouping of all pick up signals of the protection functions in service triggering by the delayed outputs of selected protection functions triggering by selected logic inputs triggering by selected outputs Vx logic equations manual triggering by a remote control command TC10 manual triggering via the SFT2841 software tool Disturbance recording can be m blocked through the SFT2841 software or by remote control command TC8 m validated through the SFT2841 software or by remote control command TC9 Block Diagram disturbance recording triggering by selected protection B Leni ano eonen 9 pick up disturbance recording triggering IrTrL_ by selected logic inputs disturbance recording triggering by selected outputs Vx logic equations manual disturbance SFT2841 recording triggering TC10 ee ee a a disturbance recording block disturbance SFT2841 triggering recording triggering TC8 validating disturbance SFT2841 4_ recording triggering Tc9 manual disturbance SFT2841 recording triggering TC10 110 63230 216 219 B1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Control and Monitoring Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Switching Groups of Settings Description There are two groups of settings groups A and B for phase overcurrent
282. n phases c and a It is based on measuring the fundamental component Readout The measurements may be accessed via m advanced UMI display unit by pressing the O key m aPC with SFT2841 software m a communication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Measurement range 0 06 to 1 2 Vp Unit Vor kV Accuracy 0 5 typical 1 from 0 5 to 1 2 Vip 2 from 0 06 to 0 5 Vi p Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1V Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 Vi nominal rating set in the general settings 2 At Vp in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Phase to Neutral Voltage Operation This function gives the RMS value of the 50 or 60 Hz component of phase to neutral voltages m Van phase a phase to neutral voltage m Vbn phase b phase to neutral voltage m Vcn phase c phase to neutral voltage It is based on measuring the fundamental component Readout The measurements may be accessed via m advanced UMI display unit by pressing the amp key m aPC with the SFT2841 software m acommunication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Measurement range 0 06 to 1 2 V_ p Unit Vor kV Accuracy 0 5 typical 1 from 0 5 to 1 2 V p 2 from 0 06 to 0 5 V_ p Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1V Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 V p primary rated phase to neutral voltage V P V p V3
283. nal 1 block 12 V2 set point Vn 13 12 set point In 14 Time delay loss 3 V 2 Vi 10 ms 15 Time delay V2 12 10 ms 16 Reserved 17 Reserved 18 Reserved 19 Reserved 158 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Setting Data Reserved Format Unit Reserved Activity Reserved Reserved Behavior on 46 51N 32P 32Q functions 0 none 1 block Tripping time delay 10 ms Reserved Reserved Reserved 0NI oa A j N a o Reserved ANSI 60FL VT Supervision Function number 2701 amp Electric Modbus Communication Presentation The disturbance recording function is used to record analog and logical signals during a time interval Sepam Series 40 can store up to 19 records Each record is made up of two files m configuration file with suffix CFG m data file with suffix DAT The data of each record may be transferred via the Modbus link It is possible to transfer 15 records at 60 Hz to a remote monitoring and control system A record can be transferred as many times as possible until it is overwritten by a new record If a record is made by Sepam while the oldest record is being transferred the oldest record is stopped If a command such as a remote read or remote setting request is carried out during the transfer of a disturbance reco
284. nation m a substantial reduction in the delayed tripping of circuit breakers nearest the source drawback of the classical time based discrimination process The system applies to the following phase overcurrent ground fault and directional protection functions m definite time DT Inverse Definite Minimum Time IDMT Standard Inverse Time SIT Very Inverse Time VIT Extremely Inverse Time EIT Ultra Inverse Time UIT td X 0 9s td X 0 6s td X 0 3s td Xs Example radial distribution using time based discrimination td tripping time definite time curves Example radial distribution using the Sepam zone selective interlocking system 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Zone Selective Interlocking ANSI Code 68 Radial Network With this type of system time delays are set in accordance with the device to be protected without concern for the discrimination aspect Operating Principle sending BI MT10195 level n 1 Sepam O3 output other level n Sepam receiving BI When a fault occurs in a radial network the fault current flows through the circuit between the source and the location of the fault m the protection units upstream from the fault are triggered m the protection units downstream from the fault are not triggered m only the first protection unit upstream from the f
285. nce no positive or negative sequence So the port name Inr is just that a port name What kind of current positive negative or zero sequence depends on the type of CTs used Readout The residual current measured Ir and the residual current calculated by the sum of the phase currents Ir may be accessed via m the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the O key m aPC operating with SFT2841 software m acommunication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Measurement range Connection to 3 phase CTs 0 1 to 1 5 Inr Connection to 1 CT 0 1 to 1 5 Inr 1 3 Connection to zero sequence CT with ACE990 0 1 to 1 5 Inr 1 Connection to CSH residual 2 A rating 0 2 to 3 A current sensor 5 A rating 0 5 to 7 5 A 20 A rating 2 to 30 A Unit Aor kA Accuracy 2 1 typical at Inr 2 from 0 3 to 1 5 INr 5 if lt 0 3 Inr Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 0 1A Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 Inr rated current set in the general settings 2 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 excluding sensor accuracy 3 Inr INCT or INr INCT 10 according to setting Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved dp Electric Metering 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Average Current Peak Demand Current Operation This function provides two values m the average RMS current for each phase that has been obtained for ea
286. nctions Application Closed ring network protection may be provided using Sepam S42 which includes the following functions m Two units of directional phase 67 and ground fault 67N protection functions o a unit to detect faults located in the line direction o a unit to detect faults located in the bus direction m double zone selective interlocking function with o sending of two blocking information according to the detected fault direction o receipt of two blocking information to block the directional protection relays according to their detection direction 4 direction of 67 67N protection functions A direction of blocking signals With the combination of the directional protection functions and the zone selective interlocking function the faulty section may be isolated with minimum delay by the tripping of the circuit breakers on either side of the fault Protection functions 67 and 67N prepare the blocking information Priority is given to protection function 67 when protection functions 67 and 67N detect faults in opposite directions at the same time the blocking information is determined by the direction of the fault detected by protection function 67 The instantaneous output of protection function 67 activated at 80 of the Is set point is used to send blocking information This avoids uncertainly when the fault current is close to the Is set point Note The
287. ne Main functions performed by SFT2841 ine Do tai oe me m changing passwords Detre tme h2 fra Sf froo me SIR aure fene z m entering general characteristics ratings Detrite tne f ra Sf fico m for SR Um ire nn ae F Daly vae Advanced goup B een yae a m setting Sepam ate and time Men AE ener A pees m entering protection settings BE En a aS m changing program logic assignments z m enabling disabling functions m saving files g 020o u eeaeee Saving ir E a 1 Protection and parameter setting data can be saved as well as printing reports RE 7 Connected Motor M41 Moteur 1 Parameter setting Remote controls en 2401 2002 16 47 12 7 Example of a protection setting screen The SFT2841 software can also be used to recover disturbance recording files and provide graphic display using the SFT2826 software tool Operating Assistance Access from all the screens to a help section which contains all the technical data required for Sepam installation and use 1 Modes accessed via 2 passwords protection setting level parameter setting level 216 63230 216 219 B1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Use and Commissioning A Sepam document displayed on the screen has conventional Windows features All SFT2841 software screens are set up in similar fashion A title bar with O name of the application SFT2841 o identification of the Sepam document displayed o
288. ng the consistency of the that tool appropriate tests keeping in mind that the relay is The commissioning tests may be performed without the SFT2841 software for always involved as the main link in the protection Sepam units with advanced UMIs chain Therefore protection relays based on electromechanical and static technologies the Method performances of which are not totally reproducible For each Sepam must be systematically submitted to detailed testing m only carry out the checks suited to the hardware configuration and the not only to qualify relay commissioning but also to functions activated check that they actually are in good operating order A comprehensive description of all the tests is given further on and maintain the required level of performance m use the test sheet provided to record the results of the commissioning tests The Sepam concept makes it possible to do Checking Current and Voltage Input Connections away with such testing since The secondary injection tests to be carried out to check the connection of the current m the use of digital technology guarantees the and voltage inputs are described according to reproducibility of the performances m the type of current and voltage sensors connected to Sepam in particular announced for residual current and voltage measurement m each of the Sepam functions has m the type of injection generator used for the tests three phase or single phase undergone full factory
289. nnector CCA620 or CCA622 m 1x 6 pin connector CCA626 or CCA627 The other optional accessories such as modules current input connectors or voltage and cables are supplied in separate packages To identify a Sepam check the 2 labels on the right side panel of the base unit describing the product s functional and hardware features m Hardware reference and designation label 59600 _a _ Model sepam basic UMI 24 250 V Origin France User Machine Interface sepam IHM de base 24 250 V C04 UMI I MIN INN NNT in ifn en 3 aaO 5660 I MI II MIN S10 MX XXX JXX XAT Schneider Electric m Software reference and designation label 59680 Application type 59609 Operating language i Substation Sous station S 40 English French Miscellaneous additional ULI ATE AN UOTI f information S10 XX 540 X33 XXX Schneider electric Identification of Accessories The accessories such as optional modules current or voltage connectors and connection cables come in separate packages which are identified by labels m Example of MES114 module identification label 59646 10 inputs 4 outputs 24 250 VDC Origin France Part number 10 entr es 4 sorties 24 250 V CC c23 MES114 a IAME INN IN 03146134FA Schneider Es Electric Commercial reference 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Installation Equipment Identification List of S
290. nt voltage frequency power energy o amp key switchgear diagnosis and additional measurements choice diagnosis tripping contexts x5 o key general settings choice general modules I U sensors CT VT supervision program logic I O test o key protection settings choice phase I residual I directional I voltage frequency power machine recloser m when the user presses a key the system moves on to the next screen in the loop When a screen includes more than 4 lines the user moves about in the screen via the cursor keys A N Protection and Parameter Setting Modes There are three levels of use m operator level used to access all the screens in read mode and does not require any passwords m protection setter level requires the entry of the first password key allows protection setting key m parameter setter level requires the entry of the second password key allows modification of the general settings as well S key MT10808 Only general setters may modify the passwords The passwords have four digits Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Example Measurement Loop Metering menu current choice Metering numerical values Irms Metering bar graphs Overcurrent Average current Ir bar graph bar graph b51 1 gt gt 51 b gt 5iN b gt 5IN ext 0 off lon Trip password
291. ntrol tripping command TC1 which can be activated at any time 138 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Modbus Communication Presentation The communication system time tags data processed by Sepam The time tagging function assigns a date and precise time to status changes so that they can be accurately classified over time Time tagged data are events that can be processed in the control room by the remote monitoring and control system using the communication protocol for the data logging and chronological display functions Sepam time tags the following data m logic inputs m remote indications m information pertaining to Sepam equipment see Sepam check word Time tagging is carried out systematically The remote monitoring and control system provides a chronological display of the time tagged data Time Tagging Sepam events time tagging uses absolute time see section on date and time When an event is detected it is tagged with the absolute time given by Sepam s internal clock All the Sepam internal clocks must be synchronized so as to avoid drifts and all be the same thereby allowing inter Sepam chronological sorting Sepam has two mechanisms for managing its internal clock m time setting to initialize or modify the absolute time A special Modbus message called time message is used to time set each Sepam m s
292. nvalid Sepam does not reply 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider Commissioning and Diagnosis Modbus Diagnosis Counters Counter Definition Sepam manages the Modbus diagnosis counters These are m CPT1 Number of valid frames received whether the slave is involved or not m CPT2 Number of frames received with a CRC error or physical error frames with more than 255 bytes frames received with at least one parity overrun framing or line break error m CPT3 Number of exception responses generated even if not transmitted due to receipt of a broadcast request CPT4 Number of frames specifically addressed to the station excluding broadcasting CPT5 Number of valid broadcast frames received CPTE Not significant CPT7 Not significant CPT8 Number of frames received with at least one character having a physical error parity overrun framing or line break m CPT9 Number of valid requests received and correctly executed Counter Reset The counters are reset to 0 m when they reach the maximum value FFFFh 65535 m when they are reset by a Modbus command function 8 m when Sepam auxiliary power is lost m when communication parameters are modified Using the Counters Modbus diagnosis counters help to detect and resolve communication problems They can be accessed by the dedicated read functions Modbus protocol functions 8 and 11 CPT2 and CPT9 counters can be displayed on SFT2841 Sepam Di
293. o as to only supply Sepam s phase a current input and therefore obtain a residual current Ir la a b e BEER e e O 79 current test Sepam Series 40 voltage test Re terminal box terminal box I l l u i I Jul I il z Hlas r la Ib Ic N Van Vbn Ven N single phase O or 3 phase generator A v 2 Turn the generator on 3 Apply a V_ voltage set to the rated secondary voltage of the VTs installed in an open delta arrangement depending on the case V 8 V3 or V s 3 4 When applicable inject an current set to the rated secondary current of the CTs 1 Aor5 A and in phase with the voltage applied generator phase displacement a Vi I 0 5 Use the SFT2841 software to check the following m the value indicated for the measured Vr residual voltage is approximately equal to the rated primary phase to neutral voltage of the VTs i e V_ p V p v3 m when applicable the value indicated for the calculated Irz residual current is approximately equal to the rated primary current of the CTs m when applicable the value indicated for the phase displacement gr Vr Irz between the Ir current and Vr voltage is approximately equal to 0 6 Turn the generator off 242 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Gf Electric Use and Commissioning Description Check to be carried out when the res
294. odbus Communication Reading Sepam Identification Presentation The Read Device Identification function is used to access the information required in a standardized manner in order to clearly identify a device The description is made up of a set of objects ASCII character strings Sepam Series 40 accepts the read identification function conformity level 02 For a complete description of the function go to www modbus org The description below covers a subset of the function adapted to Sepam Series 40 Implementation Request Frame The request frame is made of the following components Sepam Series 40 Identification The objects making up the Sepam Series 40 Field Size bytes Slave number 1 43 2Bh 1 Generic access function code 14 OEh 1 Read device identification 01 or 02 1 Type of read 00 1 Object number CRC16 2 The type of read is used to select a simplified 01 or a standard 02 description Reply Frame The reply frame is made of the following components identification are listed below Field Size bytes Number Type Value Slave number 1 0 VendorName Square D 43 2Bh 1 Generic access function code 1 ProductCode Application EAN13 code 14 OEh 1 Read device identification 2 MajorMinorRevision Application version number 01 or 02 1 Type of read Vx yy 02 1 Conformity level 3 VendorURL www schneider electric com
295. olution 1V Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 V nP primary rated phase to neutral voltage V P V p V3 Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 15 amp Electric Metering 16 63230 216 219 B1 Negative Sequence Voltage Frequency Negative Sequence Voltage Operation This function gives the calculated value of the negative sequence voltage V2 Readout The measurement may be accessed via m advanced UMI display unit by pressing the O key m aPC with SFT2841 software m acommunication link Characteristics Measurement range 0 05 to 1 2 V_ p Unit Vor kV Accuracy 2 at V_ P Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 1V Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 Vap primary rated phase to neutral voltage Nap Vi p V3 Frequency Operation This function gives the frequency value Frequency is measured via the following m based on Vab if only one phase to phase voltage is connected to Sepam m based on positive sequence voltage V1 if the Sepam includes Vab and Vbc measurements Frequency is not measured if m the voltage Vab or positive sequence voltage V1 is less than 40 of Vi m the frequency is outside the measurement range Readout The measurement may be accessed via m advanced UMI display unit by pressing the amp key a PC with SFT2841 software a communication link an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Rated frequency
296. on the CCA670 CCA671 connector Operating Mode 1 Use a screwdriver to remove the shield located in the LPCT settings zone the shield protects 3 blocks of 8 microswitches marked L1 L2 L3 2 On the L1 block set the microswitch for the selected rated current to 1 2 IN values per microswitch m The table of equivalencies between the microswitch settings and the selected rated current In is printed on the connector m Leave the 7 other microswitches set to 0 3 Set the other two blocks of switches L2 and L3 to the same position as the L1 block and close the shield Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 181 amp Electric DE51675 Installation 182 63230 216 219 B1 LPCT Type Current Sensors Test Accessories Accessory Connection Principle A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH m Only qualified personnel should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions m NEVER work alone m Before performing visual inspections tests or maintenance of the equipment disconnect all sources of electric power Assume that all circuits are live until they have been completely de energized tested and tagged Pay particular attention to the design of the power system Consider all sources of power including the possibility of backfeeding m Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off Failur
297. ontrol Activity Reserved Reserved Vsr set point Tripping time delay Reserved Reserved Reserved NIJA A V N 0 Reserved ANSI 66 Starts per Hour Function number 0701 Setting Data Latching Format Unit Reserved Activity Reserved Reserved Period of time Total number of starts OINIO A Oj N Number of consecutive hot starts Number of consecutive starts Time delay between starts Minutes Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Schneider GP Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Modbus Communication Remote Settings Access ANSI 67 Directional Phase Overcurrent Function number 21xx Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 3 Activity O 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Group A direction 0 line 1 bus 7 Group A characteristic angle 0 30 angle 1 45 angle 2 60 angle 8 Group A tripping logic 0 one out of three 1 two out of three 9 Group A tripping curve 10 Group A Is set point 0 1A 11 Group A tripping time delay 10 ms 12 Group A timer hold curve 13 Group A timer hold delay 10 ms 14 Reserved 15 Reserved 16 Reserved 17 Reserved 18 Group B direction 0 line 1 bus 19 Group B characteristic angle 0 30 angle 1 45 angle 2 60 angle 20 Group B tripping logic 0 10n3 1 20n3 21 Group B
298. or Stage en Sepam diagnosis and output relay test screen 244 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider Checking Logic Input amp Output Connection Checking Logic Input Connection Procedure Proceed as follows for each input 1 If the input supply voltage is present use an electric cord to short circuit the contact that delivers logic data to the input If the input supply voltage is not present apply a voltage supplied by the DC voltage generator to the terminal of the contact linked to the chosen input being sure to comply with the suitable polarity and level Observe the change of status of the input using the SFT2841 software in the Input output indicator status screen At the end of the test if necessary press the SFT2841 Reset key to clear all messages and deactivate all outputs 2 Checking Logic Output Connection Procedure This check is carried out using the Output relay test function It is activated through the SFT2841 software in the Sepam Diagnosis screen Only output O4 when used for the watchdog can be tested This function requires prior entry of the Parameter setting password 1 Activate each output relay using the buttons in the SFT2841 software 2 The activated output relay changes status over a period of 5 seconds 3 Observe the change of status of the output relay through the operation of the related switchgear if it is ready to operate and is powered or connect a voltmeter to t
299. or zero sequence depends on the type of CTs used 10 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Metering Characteristics Metering Phase current 0 1 to 40 IN 0 5 Residual current Calculated 0 1 to 40 IN 1 Measured 0 1 to 20 Inr 1 Demand current 0 1 to 40 IN 0 5 Peak demand current 0 1 to 40 IN 0 5 o Phase to phase voltage 0 06 to 1 2 Vip 0 5 Phase to neutral voltage 0 06 to 1 2 V_ p 0 5 Residual voltage 0 04 to 3 V P 1 Positive sequence voltage 0 05 to 1 2 V_ p 2 Negative sequence voltage 0 05 to 1 2 V_ p 2 Frequency 25 to 65 Hz 0 02 Hz a Active power 0 015 SN to 999 MW 1 E Reactive power 0 015 SN to 999 MVAR 1 E Apparent power 0 015 SN to 999 MVA 1 Peak demand active power 0 015 Sn to 999 MW 1 o Peak demand reactive power 0 015 SN to 999 MVAR 1 o Power factor 1 to 1 CAP IND 1 Calculated active energy 0 to 2 1 108 MW h 1 1 digit o Calculated reactive energy 0 to 2 1 108 MVAR h 1 1 digit o Temperature 30 to 200 C 1 C from 20 to 140 C or 22 to 392 F Network Diagnosis Assistance Tripping context o Phase tripping current 0 1 to 40 IN 5 o Ground fault tripping current 0 1 to 20 Inr 5 o Negative sequence unbalance 10 to 500 of IB 2 Phase displacement pr between Vr
300. oring Functions 108 63230 216 219 B1 Zone Selective Interlocking ANSI Code 68 Closed Ring Network Example Closed Ring Protection Function Setting Case of a closed ring with two substations each of which comprises two Sepam S42 relays marked R11 R12 and R21 R22 MT11210 substation 2 lt direction of 67 67N protection functions A direction of blocking signals substation 1 Note The NO references are to output contacts program logic setting not the state of the circuit breaker The breaker status for all breakers above is CLOSED Starting at one end of the ring the detection direction of units 1 and 2 of the directional protection functions should be alternated between line and bus Example of setting of the different Sepam with zone selective interlocking Substation 1 Sepam S42 no R11 m Logic input output assignment 113 blocking reception 1 O3 send blocking information BI1 O12 send blocking information BI2 m 67 67N unit 1 tripping direction bus m 67 67N unit 2 tripping direction line Substation 2 Sepam S42 no R22 m Logic input output assignment 113 blocking reception 1 114 blocking reception 2 O3 send blocking information BI1 O12 send blocking information BI2 m 67 67N unit 1 tripping direction bus m 67 67N unit 2 tripping direction line Schneider amp Electric Sepam S42 no R
301. ormation to block the phase overcurrent protection functions 50 51 of both mains o and trips the main circuit breaker m protection function 67 of the fault free main is insensitive to fault current in the bus direction Examples Parallel Main Protection Function Setting Protection by Sepam S42 m logic input output assignment o 113 blocking reception 1 Do not assign any inputs to blocking reception 2 O O83 send blocking information BI1 m protection function 67 unit 1 tripping direction line o instantaneous output send blocking information BI1 o time delayed output blocked by receipt of BI1 on 113 m protection function 67 unit 2 tripping direction line o time delayed output tripping of circuit breaker triggered by fault upstream from main not blocked since no input is assigned to blocking reception 2 Protection by Sepam T42 m logic input output assignment o 113 blocking reception 1 o O8 send blocking information BI1 m protection function 67 unit 1 tripping direction line o instantaneous output send blocking information BI1 o time delayed output tripping of circuit breaker triggered by a fault upstream from the main not blocked by the receipt of BI1 on 113 m protection function 67 unit 2 if necessary 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 109 lectric Control and Monitoring Disturbance Recording Triggering Functions Description Recording analog and logic signals ca
302. ower supplied to the bus is positive O power exported by the bus is negative flow direction MT11184 This protection function operates for VanVbnVcn Vab Vbc and Vab Vbc Vr connections To operate with certain synchronous motors it may be necessary to block the protection function during motor starting This is done using the Starting in progress output of the 48 51LR function in the equation editor Block Diagram overpower reverse power MT11168 Vab choice of time dela ic direction output Vbc pick up output Characteristics Tripping Direction Setting overpower reverse power Qs Set Point Setting 5 to 120 SN Resolution 0 1 var Accuracy 5 for Qs between 5 and 40 SN 3 for Qs between 40 and 120 SN Drop out pick up ratio 93 5 5 Time Delay T Setting 100 ms to 300 s Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Accuracy 2 2 or from 10 ms to 35 ms Characteristic Times Operation time lt 80 ms Overshoot time lt 90 ms Reset time lt 80 ms 1 Sn v3 V p IN 2 IN reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 43 amp Electric Protection Operation This is single phase protection It enables when phase a current drops below the Is set point and is inactive when the current is less than 10 of IB It is insensitive to current drops breaking due to circuit breaker tripping and includes a definite time delay T Undercurrent protection tripping
303. peration The function picks up when the positive sequence voltage frequency is below the Fs set point and if the negative sequence voltage is above the Vs set point If a single VT is connected Vab the function picks up when the frequency is below the Fs set point and the Vab voltage is above the Vs set point It includes a definite time delay T The protection function includes a restraint which may be configured according to the rate of change of frequency which blocks the protection in the event of a continuous decrease in frequency greater than the block set point This setting avoids the tripping of all the feeders when the bus is resupplied by remanent motor voltage following the loss of the main Block Diagram Vab g Vbe T 0 gt time delayed A output pick up signal dF dt gt dFs dti setting without restraint with restraint 1 Or Vab gt Vs if only one VT Characteristics Fs Set Point Setting 40 to 50 Hz or 50 to 60 Hz Accuracy 0 0 02 Hz Resolution 0 1 Hz Pick up drop out difference 0 25 Hz 0 1 Hz Vs Set Point Setting 20 to 50 VLP Accuracy 0 2 Resolution 1 Restraint on Frequency Variation Setting With without dFs dt set point 1 Hz s to 15 Hz s Accuracy 1 Hz s Resolution 1 Hz s Time Delay T Setting 100 ms to 300 s Accuracy 0 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic Times Operation ti
304. protection is often set based on the hot and cold curves supplied by the machine manufacturer To fully comply with these experimental curves additional parameters must be set m initial heat rise EsO is used to reduce the cold tripping time Increase factor fa 2 t9 Es0 ai t IB modified cold curve Lie T e9 Es IB m a second group of parameters time constants and set points is used to take into account thermal withstand of a locked rotor and when the current is greater than the adjustable set point Is Accounting for Negative Sequence Current In the case of motors with wound rotors the presence of a negative sequence component increases the heat rise in the motor The negative sequence component of the current is taken into account in the protection by the equation leq ph K 12 where Iph is the greatest phase current I2 is the negative sequence component of the current K is an adjustable factor K may have the following values 0 2 25 4 5 9 For an induction motors K is determined as follows Cd 1 where CN Cd rated torque and starting torque CN Id 2 IB Id basis current and starting current 2 2 IB g rated slip Obtaining the Cooling Time Constant T2 The cooling time constant T2 can be obtained from the temperatures measured in the equipment by using temperature sensors connected to tne MET1482 module T2 is calculated each time the equipment shuts down and cools I lt 0 1 IB a
305. ption 1 Choice is made in the general settings MT10168 MT10179 Characteristics Active Power P Reactive Power Q Measurement range 1 5 SN at 999 MW 1 5 SN at 999 MVAR Unit kW MW kVAR MVAR Accuracy 1 typical 1 typical Display format 3 significant digits 3 significant digits Resolution 0 1 kW 0 1 kvar Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 second typical Apparent power S Measurement range 1 5 Sn at 999 MVA Unit kVA MVA Accuracy 1 typical 2 Display format 3 significant digits Resolution 0 1 kVA Refresh interval 1 second typical 1 SN v3V P IN 2 At IN ViLp cos gt 0 8 in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 17 amp Electric MT10257 MT10258 Metering 18 63230 216 219 B1 Peak Demand Active amp Reactive Power Power Factor cos 9 Peak Demand Active and Reactive Power Operation This function gives the greatest average active or reactive power value since the last reset The values are refreshed after each integration interval an interval that is be set from 5 to 60 mn common interval with peak demand phase currents The values are saved in the event of a power outage Readout The measurements may be accessed via m advanced UMI display unit by pressing the O key m aPC with SFT2841 software m a communication link Resetting to Zero m press the de key on the advanced UMI display unit when
306. r input connection to the MET1482 module for type T40 T42 M41 G40 o Type of Check Test Performed Result Display Phase current and phase Secondary injection of CT CT rated primary current voltage input connection rated current e o 1Aor5A Ib IC nn Secondary injection of phase VT rated primary phase to neutral voltage the value to be voltage V s V 3 VAN o injected depends on the test being performed MON Siriei VGN nn Phase displacement o V 1 0 Pa o ob OCS anata TESTS PEMOrMEGion eee een Signatures LS ea eee ee ay ee er cre neve E E Comments 246 63230 216 219 B1 Se 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Use and Commissioning Test Sheets Sepam Series 40 Pfoject 32 2 2 nassen Type of Sepam Switchboard ccsccseceeeeeeeceeseeeeeeceeeceeseeseeeees Serial Number i G bicle once ioc beecccdsdcceeaddincensaiealenanasasaswonssacdsanccnaeeaae Software Version V Type of Check Test Performed Result Display Residual current input Injecting 5A into the zero Zero sequence connection sequence CT primary circuit Ir o When applicable VT rated primary phase to neutral secondary injection voltage vr V3 VF Seier of the rated phase to neutral voltage of a phase VT V s 3 Phase displacement r Vr Ir 0 QOH aen Residual voltage input Secondary injection VT rated primary p
307. ratio 93 5 5 Time Delay ST LT and LTS Setting ST 500 ms lt T lt 300s LT 50 ms lt T lt 300 s LTS 50 ms lt T lt 300 s Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Accuracy 0 2 or from 25 ms to 40 ms 1 IN reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 49 amp Electric MT10858 MT10419 Protection Description The thermal overload function protects equipment motors transformers generators lines capacitors against overloads based on current measurement Operation Curve The protection gives a trip command when the heat rise is greater than the set point E gt Es It is calculated according to an equivalent current measurement leq The greatest permissible continuous current is I IB Es The protection tripping time is set by time constant T m the calculated heat rise depends on the current consumed and the previous heat rise state m the cold curve defines the protection tripping time based on zero heat rise m the hot curve defines the protection tripping time based on 100 nominal heat rise 10 T Cold curve tea Pr I na t IB r ee teq ia DE 102l gt pen Hot curve i le 2 10 tr 1 0 5 10 t LN T 9 es IB Alarm Set Point Tripping Set Point Two set points may be set for heat rise m Esi alarm m Es2 tripping Hot state Set Point When the function is used to protect a motor this fixed set point is designed for detecting the hot
308. rding record the record in not disturbed Time Setting Each record can be dated Time setting of Sepam is described in the Time Tagging Events section Transferring Records Transfer requests are made record by record A configuration file and a data file are produced for each record The master sends the commands to m determine the characteristics of the records stored in an identification zone m read the contents of the different files acknowledge each transfer m reread the identification zone to ensure that the record still appears in the list of records available Two transfer zones are available m transfer zone 1 o request frame 2200h 2203h o identification zone starting at 2204h o reply frame starting at 2300h m transfer zone 2 o request frame 2400h 2403h o identification zone starting at 2404h o reply frame starting at 2500h 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider Disturbance Recording Reading the Identification Zone Given the volume of data to be transmitted the master must ensure that there are data to be recovered and prepare the exchanges when necessary The identification zone described below is read by the reading of N words starting at the address 2204h 2404h m two reserve words forced to 0 size of record configuration files encoded in one word size of record data files encoded in two words number of records encoded in one word date of record 1 most recent encoded
309. re for downloading a parameter and protection setting file is as follows 1 Activate the Download Sepam function in the Sepam menu 2 Select the file S40 S41 S42 T40 T42 M41 G40 according to the type of application which contains the data to be downloaded Return to Factory Settings This operation is only possible in Parameter setting mode via the Sepam menu All of the Sepam general characteristics protection settings and the control matrix go back to the default values Uploading Parameter and Protection Settings The connected Sepam parameter and protection setting file may only be uploaded in Operating mode Once the connection has been established the procedure for uploading a parameter and protection setting file is as follows 1 Activate the Upload Sepam function in the Sepam menu 2 Select the rpg file that is to contain the uploaded data 3 Acknowledge the end of operation report Local Operation of Sepam When connected to Sepam SFT2841 offers all the local operating functions available in the advanced UMI screen plus the following functions m setting the Sepam internal clock on the general characteristics tab m implementing the disturbance recording function through the Fault recording menu OPG validation blocking the function recovery of Sepam files start up of SFT2826 m consulting the history of the last 64 Sepam alarms with time tagging m acc
310. re voltage output sensors which are compliant with the IEC 60044 8 standard The Schneider Electric range of LPCTs includes the following sensors CLP1 CLP2 CLP3 TLP160 and TLP190 CCA670 CCA671 Connector Function The three LPCT sensors are connected to the CCA670 or CCA671 connector on the rear panel of Sepam The connection of only one or two LPCT sensors is not allowed and causes Sepam to go into fail safe position The two CCA670 and CCA671 interface connectors serve the same purpose the difference being the position of the LPCT sensor plugs m CCA670 lateral plugs for Sepam Series 20 and Series 40 m CCA671 radial plugs for Sepam Series 80 Description m 3 RJ45 plugs to connect the LPCT sensors m 3 blocks of microswitches to set the CCA670 CCA671 to the rated phase current value m Microswitch setting selected rated current equivalency table 2 In values per position m 9 pinsub D connector to connect test equipment ACE917 for direct connector or via CCA613 CCA670 CCA671 Connectors Rating The CCA670 CCA671 connector must be rated according to the rated primary current In measured by the LPCT sensors In is the current value that corresponds to the rated secondary current of 22 5 mV The possible settings for In are in A 25 50 100 125 133 200 250 320 400 500 630 666 1000 1600 2000 3150 The selected In value should be entered as a Sepam general setting and configured by microswitch
311. responding to 40 IN IN current transformer rated current defined when the general settings are made Timer Hold Delay The function includes an adjustable timer hold delay T1 m definite time timer hold for all the tripping curves gt Is time delayed output I gt Is pick up signal ra I I I I 11 l N ra LI l tripping MT10541 T RER ER value of internal time delay counter 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Protection 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Directional Phase Overcurrent ANSI Code 67 m IDMT for IEC IEEE and IAC curves gt Is time delayed output MT10527 gt Is pick up signal I value of internal l time delay l counter Ih tripping u Characteristics Characteristic Angle 0 Setting 30 45 60 Accuracy 2 Tripping Direction Setting Bus line Tripping Logic Setting One out of three two out of three Tripping Curve Setting Definite time IDMT chosen according to list page 72 Is Set Point Setting Definite time 0 1 IN lt Is lt 24 In expressed in Amps IDMT 0 1 IN lt Is lt 2 4 IN expressed in Amps Resolution 1Aor1 digit Accuracy 0 5 or 0 01 IN Drop out pick up ratio Time Delay T Operation Time at 10 Is 93 5 5 or gt 1 0 015 IN Is x 100 Setting Definite time inst 50 ms lt T lt 300 s IDMT 10
312. rgy Reactive Energy Metering capacity 0 to 2 1 108 MW h 0 to 2 1 108 MVAR h Unit MW MVAR Display format 10 significant digits 10 significant digits Resolution 0 1 MW h 0 1 MVAR h Increment 0 1 kW h to 5 MW h 0 1 KVAR h to 5 MVAR h Impulse 15 ms min 15 ms min Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 19 amp Electric Metering Temperature Operation This function gives the temperature value measured by resistance temperature detectors RTDs m platinum Pt100 100 Q at 0 C or 32 F in accordance with the IEC 60751 and DIN 43760 standards m nickel 100 Q or 120 Q at 0 C or 32 F Each RTD channel gives one measurement tx RTD x temperature The function also indicates RTD faults m RTD disconnected tx gt 205 C or t gt 401 F m RTD shorted tx lt 35 C ort lt 31 F The value is blocked if a fault display occurs The associated monitoring function generates a maintenance alarm Readout The measurement may be accessed via m advanced UMI display unit by pressing the O key in C or in F m aPC with SFT2841 software m a communication link m an analog converter with the MSA141 option Characteristics Range 22 F to 392 F 30 C to 200 C Resolution 1 F 1 C Accuracy 1 8 F from 68 F to 284 F 1 C from 20 to 140 C 3 6 F from 22 F to 68 F 2 C from 30 to 20 C 3 6 F from 284 F to 392 F 2 C from 140 to 200 C Refresh interval 5 seconds typical
313. rmal Overload ANSI Code 49 RMS Setting Examples Hot Curves VB 4 80 5 00 5 50 6 00 6 50 7 00 7 50 8 00 8 50 9 00 9 50 10 00 12 50 15 00 17 50 20 00 Es 105 0 0023 0 0021 0 0017 0 0014 0 0012 0 0010 0 0009 0 0008 0 0007 0 0006 0 0006 0 0005 0 0003 0 0002 0 0002 0 0001 110 0 0045 0 0042 0 0034 0 0029 0 0024 0 0021 0 0018 0 0016 0 0014 0 0013 0 0011 0 0010 0 0006 0 0004 0 0003 0 0003 115 0 0068 0 0063 0 0051 0 0043 0 0036 0 0031 0 0027 0 0024 0 0021 0 0019 0 0017 0 0015 0 0010 0 0007 0 0005 0 0004 120 0 0091 0 0084 0 0069 0 0057 0 0049 0 0042 0 0036 0 0032 0 0028 0 0025 0 0022 0 0020 0 0013 0 0009 0 0007 0 0005 125 0 0114 0 0105 0 0086 0 0072 0 0061 0 0052 0 0045 0 0040 0 0035 0 0031 0 0028 0 0025 0 0016 0 0011 0 0008 0 0006 130 0 0137 0 0126 0 0103 0 0086 0 0073 0 0063 0 0054 0 0048 0 0042 0 0038 0 0034 0 0030 0 0019 0 0013 0 0010 0 0008 135 0 0160 0 0147 0 0120 0 0101 0 0085 0 0073 0 0064 0 0056 0 0049 0 0044 0 0039 0 0035 0 0023 0 0016 0 0011 0 0009 140 0 0183 0 0168 0 0138 0 0115 0 0097 0 0084 0 0073 0 0064 0 0056 0 0050 0 0045 0 0040 0 0026 0 0018 0 0013 0 0010 145 0 0206 0 0189 0 0155 0 0129 0 0110 0 0094 0 0082 0 0072 0 0063 0 0056 0 0051 0 0046 0 0029 0 0020 0 0015 0 0011 150 0 0229 0 0211 0 0172 0 0144 0 0122 0 0105 0 0091 0 0080 0 0070 0 0063 0 0056 0 0051 0 0032 0 0022 0 0016 0 0013 155 0 0253 0 0232 0 0190 0 0158 0 0134 0 0115 0 0100 0 0088 0 0077 0 0069 0 0062 0 0056 0 0035 0 0025 0 0018 0 001
314. rmer 2 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 3 Setting ranges in TMS Time Multiplier Setting mode Inverse SIT and IECIEC SIT A 0 04 to 4 20 Very inverse VIT and IEC VIT B 0 07 to 8 33 Very inverse LTI and IEC LTI B 0 01 to 0 93 Ext inverse EIT and IEC EIT C 0 13 to 15 47 IEEE moderately inverse 0 42 to 51 86 IEEE very inverse 0 73 to 90 57 IEEE extremely inverse 1 24 to 154 32 IAC inverse 0 34 to 42 08 IAC very inverse 0 61 to 75 75 IAC extremely inverse 1 08 to 134 4 4 Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC IEEE and IAC types 5 For Isr lt 0 4 InO the minimum time delay is 300 ms If a shorter time delay is needed use the CT CSH30 or CT CCA634 combination 64 63230 216 219 B1 Ground Fault ANSI Code 50N 51N or 50G 51G m IDMT for IEC IEEE and IAC curves Ir gt Isr time delayed output DE50248 Ir gt Isr pick up signal ti value of internal time delay counter I I toy tripping lt ___ _____ I T1 i Characteristics Tripping Curve Setting Definite time IDMT chosen according to list page 63 Isr Set Point Definite time setting 0 1 INr lt Isr lt 15 INr expressed in Amps Sum of CTs 0 1 INr lt Isr lt 15 Inr With CSH sensor 2 A rating 0 2 A to 30 A 5 A rating 0 5 A to 75 A 20 A rating 2 A to 300 A CT 0 1 INr lt Isr lt 15 Inr min 0 1 A Zero sequence CT with ACE990 0 1 INr lt Isr lt 15
315. rmines whether the circuit breaker has actually changed status If the circuit breaker status does not match the last command sent a Control fault message and remote indication TS108 are generated Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Circuit Breaker Contactor Control AC Feeder 3 Line Typical Control and Monitoring Functions SEPAM SERIES 20 40 AC FEEDER 3 LINE Typical T T T T I 2VT s m Zus A L II T 4 11 Sepam 11 Sepam H H H 11 Sepam 11 Sepam SER 20 SER 40 PowerLogic SER 20 SER 40 PowerLogic B21 or 22 ALL CM or PM B21 or 22 ALL CM or PM 1 I 1 1 i i 1 lt 1 52 1 i J i i I 67 Trip Dir with Bus i selected and i CTcommon 0 Net nennen toward load Test 11 Sepam PowerLogic as shown Sw _ SER20 40____ CMorPM ___ Shorting TB j O F M 3 CT A 1 Xxxx 5A i Zone Application i N O C Protection Metering Series 20 Series 40 cr aS pl Feeder Non Dir O C I 23 E f i Non Dir O C 1 V P E S40 i Dir Grd O C 1 V P E 41 a 1 Dir Ph amp Grd O C I V P E 42 ARAA Nr Motor Non Dir 0 C I M20 ALT GND FAULT CKT 1 Dir Grd O C l V P E M41 Transformer Non Dir O C I T23 en Di vt Dir Ph amp Grd O C ENPE 142 I ir rd O C LV P Zor FII N T Gen
316. rogramming All Modbus exchanges include two messages a request by the master and a reply by the Sepam All the frames that are exchanged have the same structure Each message or frame contains 4 types of data Example at 9600 bauds this time is equal to approximately 3 milliseconds slave function data CRC 16 number code zones check zone m slave number 1 byte this indicates the receiving Sepam 0 to FFh If it is equal to zero the request concerns all the slaves broadcasting and there is no reply message m function code 1 byte this is used to select a command read write bit word and to check that the reply is correct m data zones n bytes these zones contain the parameters relating to the function bit address word address bit value word value number of bits number of words m check zone 2 bytes this zone is used to detect transmission errors 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 121 ectric PE50619 PE50620 Modbus Communication SFTZB41 Sepam s rie 40 540 Eis LS Opeon jagen Aspkaten Daten wre 2 068801 0r 7 a Sopan harinas conigasten Gress chasctnscs CTAVT Specs Propan oge Pormat Hardware configuration Sapam model C MX mode han ted advanced UMN VAD mode fi fned advanced LM E z Greiner mae I MES frena opa met e r F I MSANE 1 analog oupa mach F F MEUNI Commurseation rtedace Corredi Bihin
317. rotor User information The following information is available for the user m heat rise m learnt cooling time constant T2 m time before restart enabled in case of block start m time before tripping with constant current See chapter Machine operation assistance functions Characteristics Set Point Rate 1 Rate 2 Setting Es1 alarm set point 50 to 300 50 to 300 Es2 tripping set point 50 to 300 50 to 300 Es0 initial heat rise 0 to 100 0 to 100 Resolution 1 1 Time Constants Setting T1 running heat rise 1 mn to 600 mn 1 mn to 600 mn T2 stopped cooling 5 mn to 600 mn 5 mn to 600 mn Resolution 1mn imn Accounting for Negative Sequence Component Setting K 0 2 25 4 5 9 Maximum Equipment Temperature According to Insulation Class 2 T max ambient correction temperature by ambient temperature 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider amp Electric Setting Tmax 60 a 200 Resolution 1 Tripping Time Accuracy 2 or1s RMS Current Measurement Accuracy 5 Changing Operating Rate By current threshold Is Setting 0 25 to 8 IB By logic input Switching of thermal settings Basis Current for Thermal Operating Rate 2 Setting 0 2 to 2 6 IN Use of Learned Cooling Time Constant T2 Setting Yes no 1 IN reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 Equipment manufacturer data alarm indication At T tripping indication logic inp
318. rved Active and Reactive Energy Accumulated Active and Reactive Energy Operation This function gives the following for the active and reactive energy values m accumulated energy conveyed in one direction m accumulated energy conveyed in the other direction It is based on measurement of the fundamental component The accumulated energy values are saved if power is lost Readout The measurements may be accessed via m advanced UMI display unit by pressing the O key m PC with SFT2841 software m a communication link Characteristics Active Energy Reactive Energy Metering capacity 0 to 2 1 108 MW h 0 to 2 1 108 MVAR h Unit MW h MVAR h Accuracy 1 typical 1 typical 1 Display format 10 significant digits 10 significant digits Resolution 0 1 MW h 0 1 MVAR h 1 At IN V p cos gt 0 8 in reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Accumulated Active and Reactive Energy by Pulse Metering Operation This function meters energy through logic inputs Energy incrementing is associated with each input one of the general parameters to be set Each input pulse increments the meter Four inputs and four accumulated energy metering options are available m positive and negative active energy m positive and negative reactive energy The accumulated active and reactive energy values are saved if power is lost Readout m aPC with SFT2841 software m acommunication link Characteristics Active Ene
319. rves UIT RI IAC IEC Curves Curve Type Coefficient Values k a p Standard inverse A 0 14 0 02 2 97 Very inverse B 13 5 1 1 50 Long time inverse B 120 1 13 33 Extremely inverse C 80 2 0 808 Ultra inverse 315 2 2 5 1 RI Curve Equation ty l x T 1 3 1706 0 339 0 236 I IEEE Curves Curve Type Coefficient Values A B p B Moderately inverse 0 010 0 023 0 02 0 241 Very inverse 3 922 0 098 2 0 138 Extremely inverse 5 64 0 0243 2 0 081 IAC curves Curve Type Coefficient Values A B c D E B Inverse 0 208 0 863 0 800 0 418 0 195 0 297 Very inverse 0 090 0 795 0 100 1 288 7 958 0 165 Extremely inverse 0 004 0 638 0 620 1 787 0 246 0 092 Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Protection ts DE51629 T 1 5 sec Example DE51630 IEC curve VIT Ws gt Is delayed output j l gt Is pick up signal l l l l MENE i tripping General Trip Curves Setting IDMT Tripping Curves Time Delay T or TMS Factor The time delays of current IDMT tripping curves except for customized and RI curves may be set as follows m time T operating time at 10 x Is m TMS factor factor shown as T in the equations on the left Example t l 123 x TMS whereTMS 5 es z Is The VIT type IEC curve is positioned so as to be the same with TMS 1 or T 1 5s Timer Hold The adjustable timer hold T1
320. s 63230 216 219 B1 225 Use and Commissioning Advanced UMI White Keys for Current Operation SE The metering key is used to display the variables measured by Sepam on Ss b51 MT10283 amp key on N b51 The diagnosis key provides access to diagnostic data on the breaking device and additional measurements to facilitate fault analysis MT11117 key on AY b51 The alarms key is used to consult the 16 most recent alarms that have not yet been cleared 226 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider amp Electric b gt 51 lo gt SIN lo gt gt SIN ext Ooff Ylon Tip 162A aus 161A aus 163A RMS I gt gt 51 lo gt 5IN b gt 5IN ext 0 off lon Trip I gt gt 51 Io gt 5IN b gt gt 5IN ext Ooff lon Trip O Ir FAULT a 2 3 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Use and Commissioning Advanced UMI White Keys for Current Operation key on Bst be51 b gt 5IN b gt 5iN ext Ooff lon Trip MT10301 The reset key resets Sepam extinction of signal lamps and resetting of protection units after the disappearance of faults The alarm messages are not erased 10 06 2006 12 40 50 Sepam resetting must be confirmed PHASE FAULT 1A N Phase a s3 key When an alarm is present on the Sepam display the clear key is used to return to the screen that was present prior to the appearance of the alarm or to a
321. s remote setting of protection units remote control of the analog output with MSA141 option transfer of disturbance recording data Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Gf Electric MT10524 Modbus Communication Modbus Protocol Characterization of Exchanges Protocol Principle The Modbus protocol may be used to read or write one or more bits one or more words the contents of the event counters or the contents of the diagnosis counters Modbus Functions Supported The Modbus protocol used by Sepam is a compatible sub group of the RTU Modbus protocol The functions listed below are handled by Sepam basic functions data access The following exception codes are supported unknown function code incorrect address incorrect data not ready cannot process request not acknowledged remote reading and setting Response Time The communication response time Tr is less than 15 ms including a 3 character silence approximately 3 m m m DO Do Do 00 communication management functions m m m NPOD master MT10203 request reply function 1 reading of n output or internal bits function 2 reading of n input bits function 3 reading of n output or internal EA at words slave slave slave function 4 reading of n input words function 5 writing of 1 bit function 6 writing of 1 word
322. s impulse waves 63230 216 219 B1 211 amp Electric DE51670 Installation Male 9 pin sub D connector supplied with the ACE919 ACE919 212 RS485 MENS ERE 63230 216 219 B1 ACE919CA and ACE919CC RS 485 RS485 Converters Description and Dimensions A Terminal block for 2 wire RS485 link without distributed power supply Female 9 pin sub D connector to connect to the 2 wire RS485 network with distributed power supply 1 screw type male 9 pin sub D connector is supplied with the converter Power supply terminal block 1 Distributed power supply voltage selector switch 12 V DC or 24 V DC 2 Protection fuse unlocked by a 1 4 turn 3 ON OFF LED on if ACE919 is energized 4 SW1 parameter setting of 2 wire RS485 network polarization and line impedance matching resistors Function swi 1 sw1 2 SW1 3 Polarization at 0 V via Rp 470 Q ON Polarization at 5 V via Rp 470 Q ON 2 wire RS 485 network impedance ON matching by 150 resistor Converter Configuration when Delivered m 12 V DC distributed power supply m 2 wire RS485 network polarization and impedance matching resistors activated Connection 2 wire RS485 Link without Distributed Power Supply m To AWG 12 2 5 mm screw type terminal block A m L L 2 wire RS485 signals m Shielding 2 wire RS485 Link with Distributed Power Supply m To connector female 9 pin s
323. s modem installation procedure Configuring the Calling Modem in SFT2841 When configuring a Sepam network SFT2841 displays the list of all modems installed on the PC The communication parameters to be defined are m modem select one of the modems listed by SFT2841 telephone no no of the remote modem to be called speed 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 baud parity none not adjustable handshake none RTS or RTS CTS time out from 100 to 3000 ms Communication via modem and telephone network is slowed considerably because of the transit time through the modems A time out of between 800 ms and 1000 ms is sufficient in most 38400 baud installations In some cases the poor quality of the telephone network may require a slower speed 9600 or 4800 baud The time out value should then be increased 2 to 3 seconds with the number of retries ranging from 1 to 6 Note The speed and parity of the calling modem must be configured under Windows with the same values as for SFT2841 Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 221 amp Electric PE50590 Use and Commissioning SFT2841 Setting amp Operating Software Configuring a Sepam Network Configuring a Called Modem N a The modem on the Sepam side is the called modem It must first be configured either via AT commands from a PC using HyperTerminal or the configuration tool that Phone modem a may have been supplied with the modem or by setting switches see the modem cw manufact
324. s of the network cable o the network cable must be stripped o the cable shielding braid must be around and in contact with the clamp m The interface is to be connected to connector on the base unit using a CCA612 cable length 9 8 ft 3 m green fittings m The interfaces are to be supplied with 12 V DC or 24 V DC m The ACE959 can be connected to a separate distributed power supply not included in shielded cable Terminal block 0 is used to connect the distributed power supply module Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved GH Electric PE50024 DE80037 DE51666 Installation ACE937 fiber optic connection interface CAUTION ACE937 Fiber Optic Interface Function The ACE937 interface is used to connect Sepam to a fiber optic communication star system This remote module is connected to the Sepam base unit by a CCA612 cable Characteristics Weight Assembly Power supply 0 22 Ib 0 1 kg On symmetrical DIN rail Supplied by Sepam Operating temperature Environmental characteristics 13 F to 158 F 25 C to 70 C Same as Sepam base units Graded index multimode silica 820 nm invisible infra red ST BFOC bayonet fiber optic connector Maximum Minimum Optical Maximum Attenuation Power Available Fiber Length Fiber type Wavelength Type of connector Fiber Optic Numerical Diameter Aperture NA HA
325. screen 63230 216 219 B1 125 amp Electric Modbus Communication 126 63230 216 219 B1 Data Addresses and Encoding Presentation Data similar to the monitoring and control application viewpoint are grouped together in adjacent address zones Synchronization zone 0002 0005 3 16 Identification zone 0006 000F 3 Event Table 1 Exchange word 0040 0040 3 6 16 Events 1 to 4 0041 0060 3 Event Table 2 Exchange word 0070 0070 3 6 16 Events 1 to 4 0071 0090 3 Data Remote control commands OOFO OOFO 3 4 6 16 1 2 5 15 Remote control confirmation 00F1 00F1 3 4 6 16 1 2 5 150 Status 0100 0112 3 4 1 20 Measurements 0113 0158 3 4 Diagnosis 0159 0185 3 4 Phase displacement 01A0 01A9 3 4 Tripping context 0250 0275 3 4 Switchgear diagnosis 0290 02A5 3 4 Application 02CC 02FE 3 Test zone 0C00 OCOF 3 4 6 16 1 2 5 15 Protection Settings Read zone 1 1E00 1E7C 3 Read request zone 1 1E80 1E80 3 6 16 Remote settings zone 1 1F00 1F7C 3 6 Read zone 2 2000 207C 3 Read request zone 2 2080 2080 3 6 16 Remote settings zone 2 2100 217C 3 16 Disturbance Recording Choice of transfer function 2200 2203 3 16 Identification zone 2204 2271 3 Disturb rec exchange word 2300 2300 3 6 16 Disturbance recording data 2301 237C 3 Note Non addressable zones may reply by an exception message or else supply non significant data 1 Zones accessible in word mode or bit mode
326. se a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off m Before closing all covers and doors carefully inspect the work area for tools and objects that may have been left inside the equipment m Use caution while removing or installing panels so that they do not extend into the energized bus avoid handling the panels which could cause personal injury m Successful equipment operation requires proper handling installation and operation Neglecting fundamental installation requirements may lead to personal injury as well as damage to electrical equipment or other property m NEVER bypass external fusing NEVER short the secondary of a Power Transformer PT m NEVER open circuit a Current Transformer CT use the shorting block to short circuit the leads of the CT before remooving the connection from the power meter m Before performing Dielectric Hi Pot or Megger testing on any equipment in which the Sepam is installed disconnect all input and output wires to the Sepam High voltage testing may damage electronic components contained in the Sepam m Sepam should be installed in a suitable electrical enclosure Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Gf Electric Installation We recommend following the instructions given in this document for quick correct installation of your Sepam unit
327. se zone phase c inst output Phase c current Ic processing ale h ime delayed IV phase a time delaye 5 ini ai s phase b time delayed 3 pick up signal amp phase c time delayed a time delayed gt output for tripping phase a instantaneous phase a inverse zone g instantaneous 0 8 Is 3 phase b instantaneous 8 phase b Binverse zone instantaneous 0 8 Is phase c instantaneous phase c inst output 0 8 Is Inverse zone oO inverse zone instantaneous 0 8 Is for nn ring N p instantaneou I gt output direct zone selective indication interlocking Grouping of output data Setting tripping logic 3 oO one of three 5 two of three Grouping output data Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 71 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved dp Electric Protection Tripping Logic In certain cases it is wise to choose a tripping logic of the two out ofthree phases type Such cases can occur when two parallel transformers Dy are being protected For a phase to phase fault on a transformer primary winding there is a 2 1 1 ratio current distribution at the secondary end The highest current is in the expected zone operation zone for the faulty main no operation zone for the fault free main One of the lowest currents is at the limit of the zone According to the line parameters it may even be in the wrong zone There is therefore a risk of tripping both mains Time Delay Definite Time Pro
328. t 20 Inr tripping time is the time corresponding to 20 Inr operation based on Ir input m if Ir gt 40 Inr tripping time is the time that corresponds to 40 Inr operation based on sum of phase currents Block Diagram la pick up signal and to 2 Ib x zero selective interlocking 8 Ic H2 time delayed CSH zero output sequence CT CT zero sequence ACE990 The choice between Ir measured and Ir amp calculated by the sum of the phase currents can be set for each unit by default units 1 and 2 set to Ir and units 2 and 4 to Irz By mixing the two possibilities on the different units it is possible to have m different dynamic set points m different applications e g zero sequence and tank ground leakage protection Timer Hold Delay The function includes an adjustable timer hold delay T1 m definite time timer hold for all the tripping curves Ir gt Isr time delayed output Ir gt Isr pick up signal I T il l tripping r H I valua of internal I time delay DE50247 counter I Kom ar ee koe T1 Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 63 amp Electric Protection Functions 1 Inr IN if the sum of the three phase currents is used for the measurement Isr sensor rating if the measurement is taken by a CSH zero sequence CT Inr IN of the CT at In 10 according to parameter setting if the measurement is taken by a 1 A or 5 A current transfo
329. t AWG 24 12 or 2 wires with maximum cross section of 0 2 to 1 mm gt AWG 24 16 O Stripped length 0 31 to 0 39 in 8 to 10 mm m With fitting o Recommended wiring with Telemecanique fitting DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1 5 mm AWG 16 DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 2 5 mm AWG 12 AZ5DE010D for 2 wires 1 mm AWG 18 o Wire length 0 32 in 8 2 mm O Stripped length 0 31 in 8 mm Wiring of the CCA627 connector m Ring lug connectors 0 25 in 6 35 mm Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 177 amp Electric 120R302 Installation 1A 5A Current Transformers Function Sepam can be connected to any standard 1A and 5A current transformer Schneider Electric offers a range of current transformers to measure primary currents from 50 A to 4000 A Please contact a customer service representative for more information Sizing Current Transformers The current transformers should be large enough to minimize saturation CTs should be selected per ANSI C37 110 This can be critical for high X R systems and systems with generators larger than 2MW For Overcurrent Protection m Definite time The saturation current must be more than 1 5 times the setting value m IDMT The saturation current must be more than 1 5 times the highest working value on the curve Practical solution when there is no information on the settings Burden ANSI IEC Burden ANSI IEC tio Designation Class Class Designation Class Class 2 5V
330. t IMa x 1 011B R 3 4 16NS 0 1 A Peak demand phase current IMb x 1 011C R 3 4 16NS 0 1 A Peak demand phase current IMc x 1 011D R 3 4 16NS 0 1A Phase to phase voltage Vab x 1 011E R 3 4 16NS 1V Phase to phase voltage Vbc x 1 O11F R 3 4 16NS 1V Phase to phase voltage Vca x 1 0120 R 3 4 16NS 1V Phase to neutral voltage Van x 1 0121 R 3 4 16NS 1V Phase to neutral voltage Vbn x 1 0122 R 3 4 16NS 1V Phase to neutral voltage Ven x 1 0123 R 3 4 16NS 1V Residual voltage Vr x 1 0124 R 3 4 16NS 1V Positive sequence voltage V1 x 1 0125 R 3 4 16NS 1V Negative sequence voltage V2 x 1 0126 R 3 4 16NS 1V Frequency 0127 R 3 4 16NS 0 01 Hz Active power P x 1 0128 R 3 4 16S 1 kW Reactive power Q x 1 0129 R 3 4 16S 1 kvar Apparent power S x 1 012A R 3 4 16S 1 kVA Peak demand active power Pm x 1 012B R 3 4 16S 1 kW Peak demand reactive power Qm x 1 012C R 3 4 16S 1 kvar Power factor cos x 100 012D R 3 4 16S 0 01 Positive active energy Ea x 1 012E 012F R 3 4 2 x 16NS 100 kW h Negative active energy Ea x 1 0130 0131 R 3 4 2x 16NS 100 kW h Positive reactive energy Er x 1 0132 0133 R 3 4 2x 16NS 100 kvar h Negative reactive energy Er x 1 0134 0135 R 3 4 2x 16NS 100 kvar h 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider amp Electric 63230 216 219 B1 129 Modbus Communication Data Addresses and Encoding Measurement Zone x 10
331. t breaker closing if thermal alarm set points are overrun The temperature protection function 38 49T supplies 16 alarm bits If one of the first three bits is activated the user wishes to block circuit breaker closing V_INHIBCLOSE P38 49T_1_10 OR P38 49T_2_10 OR P38 49T_3_10 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Gf Electric Modbus Communication Contents Presentation 120 Modbus Protocol 121 Configuring the Communication Interfaces 122 Commissioning and Diagnosis 124 Data Addresses and Encoding 126 Time Tagging Events 139 Remote Settings Access 144 Disturbance Recording 159 Reading Sepam Identification 161 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 119 amp Electric Modbus Communication 120 63230 216 219 B1 Presentation General Modbus communication allows Sepam to be connected to a supervisor or any other device with a master Modbus communication channel Sepam is always a slave station Sepam is connected to a Modbus communication network via a communication interface There is a choice of two types of communication interface m Communication interfaces to connect Sepam to a single network o ACE9492 for connection to a 2 wire RS485 network o ACE959 for connection to a 4 wire RS485 network o ACE937 for connection to a fiber optic star network m Communication interfaces to connect Sepam to two networks o ACE969TP for connection to one 2
332. te of the monitored equipment Readout The measurements may be accessed via m advanced UMI display unit by pressing the key m aPC with SFT2841 software m a communication link Characteristics Measurement range 5 to 600 mn Unit mn Resolution 1 mn Accuracy 5 Display format 3 significant digits 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 25 ectric Metering 26 63230 216 219 B1 Machine Operation Assistance Functions Operating Time Before Tripping Waiting Time After Tripping Remaining Operating Time Before Overload Tripping Operation The time is calculated by the thermal protection function It depends on the thermal capacity used Readout The measurements may be accessed via m advanced UMI display unit by pressing the key m aPC with SFT2841 software m acommunication link Characteristics Measurement range 0 to 999 mn Unit mn Display format 3 significant digits Resolution imn Refresh interval 1 second typical Waiting Time After Overload Tripping Operation The time is calculated by the thermal protection function It depends on the thermal capacity used Readout The measurements may be accessed via m advanced UMI display unit by pressing the key m aPC with SFT2841 software m acommunication link Characteristics Measurement range 0 to 999 mn Unit mn Display format 3 significant digits Resolution i
333. tection Is is the operation set point expressed in Amps and T is the protection operation time delay MT10911 Definite time protection principle IDMT Protection IDMT protection operates in accordance with IEC 60255 3 BS 142 and IEEE C 37112 standards DE52320 112 10 20 IDMT protection principle 72 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider Directional Phase Overcurrent ANSI Code 67 The Is setting is the vertical asymptote ofthe curve and T is the operation time delay for 10 Is The tripping time for I Is values of less than 1 2 depends on the type of curve chosen Name of Curve Type Standard inverse time SIT 1 2 Very inverse time VIT or LTI 1 2 Extremely inverse time EIT 1 2 Ultra inverse time UIT 1 2 RI curve 1 IEC standard inverse time SIT A IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI B IEC extremely inverse time EIT C IEEE moderately inverse IEC D IEEE very inverse IEC E IEEE extremely inverse IEC F a a a IAC inverse IAC very inverse 1 IAC extremely inverse 1 The curve equations are given in the chapter entitled IDMT Protection Functions The function considers current variations during the time delay interval For large amplitude currents the protection function has a definite time characteristic m if gt 20 Is tripping time is the time corresponding to 20 Is m ifl gt 40IN tripping time is the time cor
334. the menu bar The use of on line help requires a browser such as Netscape Navigator or Internet Explorer SFT2841 Setting amp Operating Software General Screen Organization A SFT2841 Sepam 1000 serie 40 Connection window Fle Edt Operation Sepam Application Options Window 2 MT11192 Hardware configuration FF MES input output modde MES108 41 40 modde MES114 101 40 mode F MET148 8 temperature sensor module number 1 FF MET148 8 temperature sensor module number 2 I MSA141 1 analog output module F DSM303 Front panel UMI module n I ACE349 959 937 Communication interface Example of Sepam configuration screen SFT2841 Sepam 1000 serie 40 Connection window BB Eis Ect Operation Sepam Application Options Window 2 MT11193 pam hardware configuration General characteristics CT VT Supervision Program logic Passweed a BLSMR EHRA F NE Si E A EIEREN E e Sepam model MX model vethout foed advanced UMI C MD model with fed advanced UMI Parameter setting Remote controts en 24 01 2002 164205 Sepam hardware configuration General characteristics jew Supervision Program logic Password General characteristics Custer tanstoemers Rated secondary curent Network frequency SOHz C 60Hz Selection of active setting group This choice determines the setting group active for all the protections Choice by input 113
335. the test terminal box o logic input and output connection o temperature sensor connection O analog output connection m hardware BOMs and installation rules m group of Sepam parameter and protection settings available in paper format Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 233 amp Electric Use and Commissioning 234 63230 216 219 B1 General Examination amp Preliminary Actions Checks Required Prior to Energizing Apart from the mechanical state of the equipment use the diagrams and BOMs provided by the contractor to check m identification of Sepam and accessories determined by the contractor m correct grounding of Sepam via terminal 17 of the 20 pin connector m correct connection of auxiliary voltage terminal 1 AC or positive polarity terminal 2 AC or negative polarity m presence of a residual current measurement zero sequence CT and or additional modules connected to Sepam when applicable m presence of test terminal boxes upstream from the current inputs and voltage inputs m conformity of connections between Sepam terminals and the test terminal boxes Connections Check that the connections are tightened with equipment non energized The Sepam connectors must be correctly plugged in and locked Energizing 1 Switch on the auxiliary power supply 2 Ensure that Sepam performs the following initialization sequence lasts approximately 6 seconds m green ON and red indicators on m red indicator off
336. ting wave ANSI C37 90 1 2 5 kV MC and MD IEC 60255 22 1 2 5 kV MC 1kV MD 100 kHz damped oscillating wave IEC 61000 4 12 2 5 kV MC 1 kV MD Surges IEC 61000 4 5 2kV MC 1 kV MD Voltage interruptions IEC 60255 11 Series 20 100 10 ms Series 40 100 20 ms In Operation Vibrations IEC 60255 21 1 2 1 Gn 10 Hz 150 Hz IEC 60068 2 6 Fe 2Hz 13 2Hz a 1 mm 40 039 in Shocks IEC 60255 21 2 2 10 Gn 11ms Earthquakes IEC 60255 21 3 2 2 Gn horizontal axes 1 Gn vertical axes De Energized Vibrations IEC 60255 21 1 2 2 Gn 10 Hz 150 Hz Shocks IEC 60255 21 2 2 30 Gn 11 ms Jolts IEC 60255 21 2 2 20 Gn 16 ms In operation Exposure to cold IEC 60068 2 1 Series 20 Ab 25 C 13 F Series 40 Ad Exposure to dry heat IEC 60068 2 2 Series 20 Bb 70 C 158 F Series 40 Bd Continuous exposure to damp heat IEC 60068 2 3 Ca 10 days 93 RH 40 C 104 F Temperature variation with specified variation rate IEC 60068 2 14 Nb 13 F to 158 F 25 C to 70 C 5 C min Salt mist IEC 60068 2 52 Kb 2 Influence of corrosion IEC 60068 2 60 Cc 21 days 75 RH 77 F 25 C 0 5 ppm H S 1 ppm SO Gaz test 4 IEC 60068 2 60 21 days 75 RH 77 F 25 C 0 01 ppm H3S 0 2 ppm SO 0 02 ppm NO 0 01 ppm Cl In Storage 4 Exposure to cold IEC 60068 2 1 Ab 13 F 25 C Exposure to dry heat IEC 60068 2 2 Bb 158 F 70 C Continuo
337. tion Isr is the operation set point expressed in Amps and T is the protection operation time delay tA DE50398 Definite time protection principle IDMT Protection IDMT protection operates in accordance with IEC 60255 3 BS 142 and IEEE C 37112 standards gt 1 10 20 Ir Isr IDMT protection principle 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Ground Fault ANSI Code 50N 51N or 50G 51G The Isr setting is the vertical asymptote of the curve and T is the operation time delay for ir Isr The tripping time for Ir Isr values of less than 1 2 depends on the type of curve chosen Name of Curve Type Standard inverse time SIT 1 2 Very inverse time VIT or LTI 1 2 Extremely inverse time EIT 1 2 Ultra inverse time UIT 1 2 RI curve 1 IEC standard inverse time SIT A IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI B IEC extremely inverse time EIT C IEEE moderately inverse IEC D IEEE very inverse IEC E IEEE extremely inverse IEC F IAC inverse k oa a oa oa af a a IAC very inverse IAC extremely inverse 1 The curve equations are given in the chapter entitled IDMT Protection Functions The function considers current variations during the time delay interval For large amplitude currents the protection function has a definite time characteristic m ifl gt 20 Isr tripping time is the time that corresponds to 20 Isr m if g
338. tion is used for phase to neutral voltage 63230 216 219 B1 117 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider Gf Electric Control and Monitoring Functions 118 63230 216 219 B1 Logic Equations Processing After Losing Auxiliary Voltage The V1 to V10 VL1 to VL 31 and V_TRIPCB V_CLOSECB V_INHIBCLOSE V_FLAGREC variables are saved if Sepam loses auxiliary power The status is restored when the power returns thereby allowing the statuses produced by LATCH SR or PULSE type memory operators to be saved Special Cases Brackets must be used in expressions which comprise different OR AND XOR or NOT operators such as m V1 VL1 AND 112 OR P27 27S_1_1 incorrect expression m V1 VL1 AND 112 OR P27 27S_1_1 correct expression m V1 VL1OR 112 OR P27 27S_1_1 correct expression Only the V1 to V10 VL1 to VL31 and V_TRIPCB V_CLOSECB V_BLOCKCLOSE V_FLAGREC variables are allowed in the LATCH function Function parameters cannot be expressions o VL3 TON V1 AND V3 300 incorrect expression o VL4 V1AND V3 o VL3 TON VL4 300 correct Use Limit The number of operators and functions OR AND XOR NOT TON TOF SR PULSE is limited to 100 Examples of Applications 1 Latching the recloser final trip data By default this data is of the impulse type at the recloser output If required by operating conditions it may be latched as follows LATCH V1 V1 may be latched V1 P79_1_204 recloser
339. tion terminals The shields can be removed if necessary to make wiring easier If removed they must be replaced after wiring If necessary remove the bridging strap linking terminals 1 2 and 3 This strap is supplied with the CCA630 Connect the wires using 4 mm 0 16 in ring lugs Check the tightness of the six screws that provide continuity for the CT secondary circuits The connector accommodates wires with cross sections of AWG 16 10 1 5 to 6 mm Close the side shields Plug the connector into the 9 pin inlet on the rear panel item B Tighten the two CCA630 connector fastening screws on the rear panel of Sepam Connecting and Assembling the CCA634 Connector 1 NO 01 CAUTION HAZARD OF IMPROPER OPERATION Do not use a CCA634 and residual current input 10 on connector A terminals 18 and 19 Even if it is not connected to a sensor a CCA634 will disturb input I0 on connector A Failure to follow this instruction can cause equipment damage 180 63230 216 219 B1 Open the two side shields for access to the connection terminals The shields can be removed if necessary to make wiring easier If removed replace them after wiring Remove or reverse the bridging strap in accordance with the required wiring The strap is used to link either terminals 1 2 and 3 or terminals 1 2 3 and 9 see picture opposite Use terminal 7 1 A or 8 5 A to measure the residual current according to the C
340. tional dead time gt Dead time step 1 Dead time step 2 m I Circuit breaker l open LE Circuit breaker Normal recharging time charged gt 84 63230 216 219 B1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Protection 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Overfrequency ANSI Code 81H Operation The protection function picks up when the positive sequence voltage frequency is above the Fs set point and the positive sequence voltage is above the Vs set point If asingle VT is connected Vab the function picks up when the frequency is above the Fs set point and the Vab voltage is above the Vs set point It includes a definite time delay T Block Diagram E Vbc 5 Vbn 1 Or Vab gt Vs if only one VT time delayed gt output pick up signal Characteristics Fs Set Point Setting 50 to 53 Hz or 60 to 63 Hz Accuracy 0 02 Hz Resolution 0 1 Hz Pick up drop out difference 0 25 Hz 0 1 Hz Vs Set point Setting 20 to 50 V p Accuracy 0 2 Resolution 1 Time Delay T Setting 100 ms to 300 s Accuracy 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic Times Operation time pick up lt 80 ms typically 80 ms Overshoot time lt 40 ms Reset time lt 50 ms 1 IN reference conditions IEC 60255 6 Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 85 amp Electric Protection Underfrequency ANSI Code 81L O
341. to the following digit The values are entered with three significant digits and a period The unit A or kA is chosen using the last digit 4 Press the lt key to confirm the entry then press the key for access to the following field 5 All of the values entered are only effective after the user confirms by selecting the apply box at the bottom of the screen and presses the I key Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved G Electric Use and Commissioning Default Parameters All Applications Hardware Configuration identification Sepam xxxx model MX MES module absent MET modules absent MSA module absent DSM module present ACE module absent Output Parameter Setting outputs used O1 to 04 N O contacts 01 O3 N C contacts O2 O4 impulse mode no latched Program Logic circuit breaker control yes zone selective interlocking no recloser no logic input assignment not used General Characteristics network frequency 50 Hz group of settings A enable remote setting no working language English type of cubicle feeder except G40 main CT rating 5A number of CTs 3 la Ib Ic rated current IN 630 A basic current IB 630 A integration period 5 mn residual current none rated primary voltage V p 20 kV rated secondary voltage Vs 100 V voltages measured by VTs Vab Vbc residual voltage none disturbance recording 9 x 2 second blocks
342. ts Reserved GH Electric DE51649 Installation MET1482 Temperature Sensor Module Connection A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Only qualified personnel should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device NEVER work alone Check that the temperature sensors are isolated from dangerous voltages Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury Connecting the Grounding Terminal By tinned copper braid with cross section gt AWG 10 6 mm or cable with cross section gt AWG 12 2 5 mm and length lt 7 9 in 200 mm fitted with a 0 16 in 4 mm ring lug MET1482 Check the tightness maximum tightening torque 19 5 Ib in or 2 2 Nm Connecting RTDs to Screw type Connectors m 1 wire with cross section AWG 24 12 0 2 to 2 5 mm m or 2 wires with cross section AWG 24 18 0 2 to 1 mm Recommended cross sections according to distance m Up to 330 ft 100 m gt AWG 18 1 mm m Up to 990 ft 300 m gt AWG 16 1 5 mm m Up to 0 62 mi 1 km gt AWG 12 2 5 mm Maximum distance between sensor and module 0 62 mi 1 km Wiring Precautions m Itis preferable to use shielded cables The use of unshielded cables can cause measurement errors which vary in degree according to the level of surrounding electromagnetic disturbance m Only connect the shiel
343. ub D m 2 wire RS485 signals L L m Distributed power supply V 12 V DC or 24 V DC V 0 V Power Supply m To AWG 12 2 5 mm screw type terminal block m Reversible phase and neutral ACE919CA m Grounded via terminal block and metal case ring lug on back of case Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved dp Electric Use and Commissioning 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Contents User Machine Interfaces SFT2841 Setting amp Operating Software Welcome Window Presentation General Screen Organization Software Use Configuring a Sepam Network Front Panel UMI Presentation Advanced UMI Access to Data White Keys for Current Operation Blue Keys for Parameter and Protection Setting Data Entry Principles Default Parameters All Applications Principles and Methods Required Testing amp Metering Equipment General Examination amp Preliminary Actions Checking Parameter amp Protection Settings Checking Phase Current amp Voltage Input Connection With 3 Phase Generator With Single Phase Generator amp Voltages Delivered by Three VTs With Single Phase Generator amp Voltages Delivered by Two VTs LPCT Type Current Sensors Checking Residual Voltage Input Connection Checking Logic Input amp Output Connection Validation and Checks Test Sheet Maintenance Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 amp Electric 214 215 215 216 217 218 219 224 224 225
344. ule Description and Dimensions The module is simply flush mounted and secured by its clips No additional screw type fastening is required Front View Side View P 3 4 l TEER DE80033 5 ale Sf DE80034 la 165A ams i Ib 166A avs Milli _ Ic 167A rns x EE a HIII ke UP EHRE 5 98 152 1 Green LED Sepam on Red LED steadily on module unavailable flashing Sepam link unavailable 9 yellow LEDs Label identifying the LEDs Graphic LCD screen Display of measurements Display of switchgear network and machine diagnosis data Display of alarm messages Sepam reset or confirm data entry 10 Alarm acknowledgment and clearing or move cursor up 11 LED test or move cursor down 12 Access to protection settings 13 Access to Sepam parameters 14 Entry of two passwords 15 PC connection port 16 Mounting clip 17 Gasket to ensure NEMA 12 tightness gasket supplied with the DSM303 module to be installed if necessary OONOUO RW RJ45 lateral output connector to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cable CAUTION Cut out for flush mounting mounting plate thickness lt 0 12 in or 3 mm HAZARD OF CUTS in Trim the edges of the cut out plates to remove g mm any jagged edges Failure to follow this instruction can cause serious injury MT10151 5 67 0 2 144 20 2 DSM303 Connection RJ45 socket to
345. unction may be used as active overpower protection for energy management load shedding or reverse active power protection against motors running like generators and generators running like motors reverse overpower It enables if the active power flowing in one direction or the other supplied or absorbed is greater than the Ps set point The function includes a definite time delay T and is based on the two wattmeter method The function is enabled if the condition P gt 3 1 Q is met This condition provides a high level of sensitivity and high stability in the event of short circuits The power sign is determined by one of the following parameters m for the feeder circuit o power exported by the bus is positive Operating zone O power supplied to the bus is negative MT11183 lt a oz fo e r m for the main circuit o power supplied to the bus is positive O power exported by the bus is negative MT11184 i a 2 oO 5 This protection function operates for VanVbnVcn Vab Vbc and Vab Vbc Vr connections Block Diagram overpower reverse power MT11166 Vab choice of time delayed Ic output Vbc Ler Characteristics Tripping Direction Setting overpower reverse power Ps Set Point Setting 1 to 120 SN Resolution 0 1 kW Accuracy 2 0 3 SN for Ps between 1 and 5 SN 5 for Ps between 5 and 40 SN 3 for Ps between 40 and 120 SN
346. up A tripping curve 8 Group A Is set point 0 1A 9 Group A tripping time delay 10 ms 10 Group A timer hold curve 3 11 Group A timer hold delay 10 ms 12 Reserved 13 Reserved 14 Reserved 15 Reserved 16 Group B tripping curve 17 Group B Is set point 0 1A 18 Group B tripping time delay 10 ms 19 Group B timer hold curve 3 20 Group B timer hold delay 10 ms 21 Reserved 22 Reserved 23 Reserved 24 Reserved ANSI 50BF Breaker Failure Function number 2001 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 Reserved 3 Activity 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Use close position of circuit breaker E Is set point 0 1 A 8 Tripping time delay 10 ms 9 Reserved 10 Reserved 11 Reserved 12 Reserved 152 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric Modbus Communication Remote Settings Access ANSI 50N 51N Ground Fault Function number 02xx relay 1 xx 01 to relay 4 xx 04 Setting Data Format Unit 1 Latching 2 CB control 3 Activity O 4 Type of Ir 0 calculated 1 measured 5 Reserved 6 Reserved 7 Group A tripping curve 2 8 Group A Isr set point 0 1A 9 Group A tripping time delay 10 ms 10 Group A timer hold
347. urers manual EEE Modem RS485 Interface Faun porss In general the configuration parameters for the modem s RS485 interface must be fewo defined in accordance with the Sepam communication interface configuration m speed 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 baud m character format 8 data bits 1 stop bit parity none even odd Telephone Network Interface Modern modems offer sophisticated features such as checking the quality of the telephone line error correction and data compression These options are not appropriate for communication between SFT2841 and Sepam which is based on the Modbus RTU protocol Their effect on communication performance may be the opposite of the expected result Configuration window for the communication network via telephone modem It is therefore highly advisable to m invalidate the error correction data compression and telephone line quality monitoring options m Use the same end to end communication speed between o the Sepam network and the called modem o the called modem Sepam side and the calling modem PC side o the PC and the calling modem see recommended configurations table Sepam Network Telephone Network PC Modem Interface 38400 baud V34 modulation 33600 baud 38400 baud 19200 baud V34 modulation 19200 baud 19200 baud 9600 baud V32 modulation 9600 baud 9600 baud Industrial Configuration Profile The following table shows the main characteristics of the
348. urrent or voltage input connections by secondary injection tests m checking logic input and output connections by simulation of input data and forcing output status m validation the complete protection chain possible customized logic functions included m checking the connection of the optional MET1482 and MSA141 modules m Obey all existing safety instructions when commissioning and maintaining high voltage equipment m Apply appropriate personal protective equipment PPE and follow safe electrical work practices In the USA see NFPA 70E Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury General Principles The various checks are described further on m allthe tests should be carried out with the MV cubicle completely isolated and the MV circuit breaker racked out disconnected and open mall the tests are to be performed in the operating situation no wiring or setting changes even temporary changes to facilitate testing are allowed m the SFT2841 parameter setting and operating software is the basic tool for all Sepam users It is especially useful during Sepam commissioning tests The tests described in this document are systematically based on the use of Protection Relay Testing Protection relays are tested prior to commissioning with the dual aim of maximizing availability and minimizing the risk of malfunctioning of the assembly being commissioned The problem consists of defini
349. us exposure to damp heat IEC 60068 2 3 Ca 56 days 93 RH 104 F 40 C Enclosure Safety Tests Front panel tightness IEC 60529 IP52 Other panels closed except for rear panel IP20 NEMA Type 12 with gasket supplied Fire withstand Electrical Safety Tests 1 2 50 us impulse wave IEC 60695 2 11 IEC 60255 5 1200 F 650 C with glow wire 5KVM Power frequency dielectric withstand IEC 60255 5 2kV 1 mn ce Harmonized standard European directives EN 50263 m 89 336 CEE Electromagnetic Comptability EMC Directive o 92 31 CEE Amendment o 93 68 CEE Amendment m 73 23 CEE Low Voltage Directive o 93 68 CEE Amendment UL Aus UL508 CSA C22 2 n 14 95 File E212533 CSA CSA C22 2 n 14 95 n 94 M91 n 0 17 00 File 210625 1 Except for communication 3 kV in common mode and 1kV in differential mode 2 Except for communication 1 kVrms 3 Sepam must be stored in its original packing 63230 216 219 B1 7 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider Electric 63230 216 219 B1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Metering Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Contents General Settings Characteristics Phase Current Residual Current Average Current Peak Demand Current Phase to Phase Voltage Phase to Neutral Voltage Residual Voltage Vr Positive Sequence Voltage V1 Negative Sequence Voltage Frequency Active Rea
350. us protocol causing communication times that would be incompatible with Sepam Note 2 SFT2841 allows Sepam protection settings to be modified and direct activation of the outputs These operations which could involve the operation of electrical switchgear opening and closing and thus risk the safety of people and installations are protected by the Sepam password In addition to this protection the E LANs and S LANs must be designed as private networks protected from external actions by all suitable methods 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved amp Electric PE50590 Use and Commissioning ComSegm ATA Type of baison C Serial Phone modem c t Configuration window for the communication network via telephone modem 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved SFT2841 Setting amp Operating Software Configuring a Sepam Network Link via Telephone Modem The Sepam unitss are connected to an RS485 multidrop network using an industrial PSTN modem This modem is the called modem It must first be configured either via AT commands from a PC using HyperTerminal or the configuration tool that may have been supplied with the modem or by setting switches See the modem manufacturer s manual for more information The PC may use an internal or an external modem This modem on the PC side is always the calling modem It must be installed and configured in accordance with the Window
351. ut inhibit thermal overload inhibit indication 63230 216 219 B1 51 MT10860 Protection Example 1 The following data are available m time constants for on operation T1 and off operation T2 o T1 25min o T2 70min m maximum curve in steady state Imax lB 1 05 Setting Tripping Set Point Es2 Es2 Imax IB 110 Please note if the motor absorbs a current of 1 05 IB in steady state the heat rise calculated by the thermal overload protection will reach 110 Setting of alarm set point Es1 Es1 90 I IB 0 95 Knegative 4 5 usual value The other thermal overload parameters do not need to be set They are not considered by default Example 2 The following data are available m motor thermal resistance in the form of hot and cold curves see solid line curves in Figure 1 m cooling time constant T2 m maximum steady state current Imax lB 1 05 Setting Tripping Set Point Es2 Es2 Imax IB 110 Setting Alarm Set Point Es1 Es1 90 I IB 0 95 The manufacturer s hot cold curves can be used to determine the heating time constant T1 The method consists of placing the Sepam hot cold curves below those of the motor Figure 1 Motor thermal resistance and thermal overload tripping curves A Thermal Overload ANSI Code 49 RMS Setting Examples For an overload of 2 IB the value t T1 0 0339 2 is obtained For Sepam to trip at the point 1 t 70 s T1 is equal to 2
352. verse Time EIT Curve Very Inverse Time VIT or LTI Curve Ultra Inverse Time UIT Curve RI Curve t94 t s 100 00 1 000 00 E E 100 00 10 00 K A curve T 1s curve T 1s v A N 10 00 J N 1 00 RI Xa inverse time SIT 1 00 N N very inverse time VIT or LTI extremely inverse EIT ultra inverse UIT Ns Vs 0 10 gt 2 1 10 100 1 10 100 IEEE Curves IAC Curves te to A 10000 00 a 1000 00 8 E 1000 00 100 00 100 00 3 vi a 2 X VI 10 00 EI x 10 00 S y an N 1 00 1 00 Sehe 0 10 Vs meg 10 do d 10 Fig 92 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved G Electric Control and Monitoring Functions 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Contents Description Definition of Symbols Logic Input Output Assignment Standard Logic Input Assignment Circuit Breaker Contactor Control Zone Selective Inter
353. w the following m Zero sequence CT ratio 1 n m Zero sequence CT power m Close approximation of rated current Inr INr is a general setting in Sepam and defines the ground fault protection setting range between 0 1 INr and 15 Inr The table below can be used to determine m The two ACE990 input terminals to be connected to the MV zero sequence CT secondary m The type of zero sequence current sensor to set m The exact value of the rated residual current Inr setting given by the following formula Inr k x number of zero sequence CT turns with k the factor defined in the table below The zero sequence CT must be connected to the interface in the right direction for correct operation the MV zero sequence CT secondary output terminal S1 must be connected to the terminal with the lowest index Ex K Value ACE990 Input Residual Current Min MV Zero Terminals to be Sensor Setting Sequence CT Connected Power Example 0 00578 E1 E5 ACE990 range 1 0 1 VA Given a zero sequence CT with a ratio of 1 400 2 VA used 0 00676 E2 E5 ACE990 range 1 0 1 VA within a measurement range of 0 5 A to 60 A How should it be connected to Sepam via the ACE990 0 00885 Ei EH ACE990 range 1 OVA 1 Choose a close approximation of the rated current INr 0 00909 E3 E5 ACE990 range 1 0 1 VA such as 5A 0 01136 E2 E4 ACE990 range 1 0 1 VA 2 on A mo a oosa 0 01587 E1 E3 ACE990 range 1
354. wer margin 3 dBm according to IEC 60870 standard Example for a 62 5 125 um fiber Lmax 9 4 3 0 6 3 2 1 12 mi 1 8 km Dimensions in mm DE80043 ACE969TP 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ae ee 63230 216 219 B1 205 lectric Installation ACE969TP and ACE969FO Multi Protocol Interfaces Description ACE969 Communication Interfaces ACE969TP ACE969FO Grounding terminal using supplied braid Power supply terminal block RJ45 socket to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cable 4 Green LED ACE969 energized 5 Red LED ACE969 interface status E LED off ACE969 set up and communication operational m LED flashing ACE969 not set up or setup incorrect m LED remains on ACE969 failed Service connector reserved for software upgrades E LAN 2 wire RS485 communication port ACE969TP and ACE969FO 8 S LAN 2 wire RS485 communication port op DES1855 DES1856 NO ACE969TP 9 S LAN fiber optic communication port ACE969FO 2 wire RS485 Communication Ports 1 2 wire RS485 network terminal block S LAN Port ACE969TP E LAN Port ACE969TP or m two black terminals connection of 2 wire ACE969FO RS485 twisted pair 2 1 m two green terminals connection of twisted pair for distributed power supply 2 LEDs m Flashing Tx LED Sepam sending
355. wer outage that lasts for more than 24 hours the time must be reset The period over which Sepam data and time settings are maintained in the event of a power outage depends on the ambient temperature and the age of the Sepam unit Typical values m at77 F m at104 F o 24 hours for 7 years o 24 hours for 3 years o 18 hours for 10 years o 16 hours for 10 years o 14 hours for 15 years o 10 hours for 15 years Resetting the Date and Time The internal clock of Sepam Series 40 may be time set in three different ways m by the remote monitoring and control system through the Modbus link m through SFT2841 software tool General characteristics screen m Sepam display units equipped with advanced UMI The time tagged on events is encoded in 8 bytes as follows b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b09 b08 b07 b06 b05 b04 b03 b02 b01 b00 word 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y word 1 0 o 0 0 M M M M 0 0 0 D D D D D 1 word2 0 0 o0 H H H H H 0 0 mn mn mn mn mn mn word3 ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms word4 Y 1 byte for years varies from 0 to 99 years The remote monitoring and control system must ensure that the year 00 is greater than 99 M 1 byte for months varies from 1 to 12 D 1 byte for days varies from 1 to 31 H 1 byte for hours varies from 0 to 23 mn 1 byte for minutes varies from 0 to 59 ms 2 bytes for milliseconds varies from 0 to 59999 These data are encoded in binary format Sep
356. window manipulation handles B menu bar to access all the SFT2841 software functions unavailable functions are dimmed toolbar a group of contextual icons for quick access to the main functions also accessed via the menu bar D work zone available to the user presented in the form of tab boxes status bar with the following information relating to the active document o alarm on o identification of the connection window o SFT2841 operating mode connected or not connected o type of Sepam o Sepam editing identification o identification level o Sepam operating mode o PC date and time Guided Navigation A guided navigation mode provides easier access to all Sepam parameter and protection settings It allows users to go through the data input screens in the natural order The sequencing of the screens in guided mode is controlled by clicking on two icons in the toolbar m lt lt to go back to the previous screen m gt to go to the next screen The screens are linked up in the following sequence Sepam hardware configuration General characteristics CT VT supervision Program logic Password Setting screens for the protection functions available according to the type of Sepam Logical equation editor Various tabs of the control matrix Disturbance recording setup ouahwon ooN On Line Help The operator may look up on line help at any time by using the command in
357. wire RS485 Modbus S LAN supervision communication network one 2 wire RS485 E LAN engineering communication network o ACE969FO for connection to one fiber optic Modbus S LAN supervision communication network one 2 wire RS485 E LAN engineering communication network Data Available The data available depend on the type of Sepam Measurement Readout m phase and ground fault currents peak demand phase currents tripping currents cumulative breaking current phase to phase phase to neutral and residual voltages active reactive and apparent power active and reactive energy frequency temperatures thermal capacity used starts per hour and block time running hours counter motor starting current and time operating time before overload tripping waiting time after tripping operating time and number of operations circuit breaker charging time Program Logic Data Readout m a table of 144 pre assigned remote indications TS depends on the type of Sepam enables the readout of program logic data status m readout of the status of 10 logic inputs Remote Control Commands Writing of 16 impulse type remote control commands TC in either direct mode or SBO Select Before Operate mode via 16 selection bits Other Functions m reading of Sepam configuration and identification m time tagging events synchronization via the network or externally via logic input 121 time tagging within a millisecond remote reading of Sepam setting
358. work connection Network configuration PE50603 Edt be Comsesm LS net DEE Configuration windows for the communication network according to the type of link serial link modem link STN or Ethernet link TCP 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 219 lectric PE50588 PE50589 Use and Commissioning configuration net ComSegmL 5 Type of baison Serial Phone modem C Tto 38400 Odd lt NONE X Configuration window for the serial link communication network ComSepam TCP Type of kaiscn C Seisi E C Phone modem a Add 40 e Tor a Ea R 8 Looking for IP Address 101340107 Timeout 800 me Retentions 2 x eo Configuration window for the Ethernet TCP IP communication network 220 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider SFT2841 Setting amp Operating Software Configuring a Sepam Network Direct Serial Link The Sepam units are connected to an RS485 or fiber optic multidrop network Depending on the serial link interfaces available on the PC the PC itself will be connected either directly to the RS485 network or fiber optic HUB or via an RS232 RS485 converter or fiber optic converter The communication parameters to be defined are m port communication port used on the PC speed 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bauds parity None Even or Odd handshake None RTS or RTS CTS time out from 100 to 3000 ms number of retries from 1 to 6
359. ws 0 H2 restraint 1 no H2 restraint The tripping curve setting is 0 definite time 1 IDMT Setting of latching and CB control 0 No 1 Yes Tripping curve for negative sequence undercurrent 0 definite 9 IEC VIT B 12 IEEE Very inverse 7 IEC SIT A_ 10 IEC EIT C 13 IEEE Extr inverse 8 IEC LTI B 11 IEEE Mod inverse 17 Schneider specific The activation of each of the cycles is encoded as follows Correspondence between bit position protection according to the table below Bit Activation by 0 Instantaneous phase overcurrent unit 1 1 Time delayed phase overcurrent unit 1 2 Instantaneous phase overcurrent unit 2 3 Time delayed phase overcurrent unit 2 4 Instantaneous phase overcurrent unit 3 5 Time delayed phase overcurrent unit 3 6 Instantaneous phase overcurrent unit 4 7 Time delayed phase overcurrent unit 4 8 Instantaneous ground fault unit 1 9 Time delayed ground fault unit 1 10 Instantaneous ground fault unit 2 11 Time delayed ground fault unit 2 12 Instantaneous ground fault unit 3 13 Time delayed ground fault unit 3 14 Instantaneous ground fault unit 4 15 Time delayed ground fault unit 4 16 Instantaneous directional ground fault unit 1 17 Time delayed directional ground fault unit 1 18 Instantaneous directional ground fault unit 2 19 Time delayed directional ground fault unit 2 20
360. xt inverse EIT and IEC EIT C 0 13 to 15 47 IEEE moderately inverse 0 42 to 51 86 IEEE very inverse 0 73 to 90 57 IEEE extremely inverse 1 24 a 154 32 IAC inverse 0 34 to 42 08 IAC very inverse 0 61 to 75 75 IAC extremely inverse 1 08 to 134 4 3 Only for standardized tripping curves of IEC IEEE and IAC types 66 63230 216 219 B1 er 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Protection Overvoltage ANSI Code 59 Operation The protection function is single phase and operates with phase to neutral or phase to phase voltage It enables if one of the voltages concerned is above the Vs or Vins set point It includes a definite time delay T With phase to neutral operation it indicates the faulty phase in the alarm associated with the fault Block Diagram Vab or Van lt Vus or Vus DE52310 Vbe or Vbn _ Vits or Vins time delayed output Vi V Vac or Von lt Vus or Vins pick up signal Characteristics VLS or V nS Set Point Setting 50 to 150 V p or Vi yp 2 Accuracy 0 2 or 0 005 V p Resolution 1 Drop out pick up ratio 97 1 Time Delay T Setting 50 ms to 300 s Accuracy 0 2 or 25 ms Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit Characteristic Times Operation time pick up lt 35 ms typically 25 ms Overshoot time lt 35 ms Reset time lt 40 ms 1 In reference conditions IEC 60255 6 2 13
361. y Timer hold Cuve k Delay __ gt au The wrench key is used to enter the passwords for access to the different modes m protection setting m parameter setting and return to operating mode with no passwords on Q b51 1 gt 51 b gt 5iN lo gt gt SIN ext yo off lon Trip MT10808 passwords Note for parameter setting of signal lamps and output relays it is necessary to use the SFT2841 software program logic menu 228 63230 216 219 B1 Se 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved ectric Use and Commissioning Advanced UMI Blue Keys for Parameter and Protection Setting fiese amp key MT10812 The key is used to confirm the protection settings parameter settings and passwords 50 51 on o On hia Curve Sir Threshold 550 A Delay 600 ms TAS key When there are no alarms on the Sepam display and the user is in the status protection or alarm menu the A key is used to move the cursor upward on Bw b51 1 gt 51 b gt 5IN b gt 51N ext 0 off lon Trip MT10813 General settings General Module I V Sensor Logic O Test w haere ae aoe When there are no alarms on the Sepam display and the user is in the status protection or alarm menu the P key is used to move the cursor downward MT10814 Metering Frequency N 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserve
362. y be used on cables Characteristics Inner diameter 4 7 in 120 mm 7 9 in 200 mm Weight 1 32 Ib 0 6 kg 3 09 Ib 1 4 kg Accuracy 5 at 68 F 20 C 6 max from 13 F to 158 F 25 C to 70 C Transformation ratio 1 470 Maximum permissible current 20kA 1s Operating temperature 13 F to 158 F 25 C to 70 C Storage temperature 40 F to 185 F 40 C to 85 C Dimensions 4 horizontal mounting holes 0 2 in 5 mm DE10228 4 vertical mounting holes 0 2 in 5 mm H J K L 2 99 1 57 6 54 2 44 1 38 76 40 166 62 35 4 72 2 36 10 1 4 09 1 46 120 60 257 104 37 Dimensions A B CSH120 4 75 6 46 mm 120 164 CSH200 7 87 10 1 mm 200 256 Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved DE80021 Installation A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH m Only qualified personnel should install this equipment Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device m NEVER work alone m Before performing visual inspections tests or maintenance of the equipment disconnect all sources of electric power Assume that all circuits are live until they have been completely de energized tested and tagged Pay particular
363. y energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 amp Electric Contents Introduction Metering Functions Protection Functions Control and Monitoring Functions Modbus Communication Installation Use and Commissioning 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 ectric 63230 216 219 B1 Schneider amp Electric 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Introduction 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Contents Overview Presentation Selection Table Technical Characteristics Environmental Characteristics Schneider 63230 216 219 B1 ff Electric oo of fF NY Introduction Overview The Sepam range of protection relays is designed for all protection applications on medium voltage public and industrial distribution networks For usual applications It consists of three series of relays with g increasing levels of performance a m Sepam Series 20 for simple applications m Sepam Series 40 for demanding applications m Sepam Series 80 for custom All information relating to
364. ynchronization to avoid Sepam internal clock drifts and ensure inter Sepam synchronization Synchronization may be carried out according to two principles m internal synchronization via the communication network without any additional wiring m external synchronization via a logic input with additional wiring At the time of commissioning the user sets the synchronization mode parameter 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Schneider Time Tagging Events Initializating the Time Tagging Function Each time the communication system is initialized energizing of Sepam the events are generated in the following sequence m appearance of data loss appearance of incorrect time appearance of not synchronous disappearance of data loss The function is initialized with the current values of the remote indication and logic input status without creating any events related to those data After the initialization phase event detection is activated It can only be interrupted by saturation of the internal event storage queue or by the presence of a major fault in Sepam Date and Time Presentation An absolute date and time are generated internally by Sepam comprising the following information Year Month Day Hour minute millisecond The date and time format is standardized ref IEC 60870 5 4 Power Outage Protection The internal clock of Sepam Series 40 is saved for 24 hours After a po
365. zero sequence CT and ACE990 less than 160 ft 50 m long m Sheathed cable shielded by tinned copper braid between the ACE990 and Sepam maximum length 6 6 ft 2 m m Cable cross section between AWG 18 0 93 mm and AWG 12 2 5 mm m Resistance per unit length less than 30 5 mQ ft 100 mQ m m Minimum dielectric strength 100 Vrms Connect the connection cable shielding in the shortest manner possible 5 08 in or 2 cm maximum to the shielding terminal on the Sepam connector Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle The connection cable shielding is grounded in Sepam Do not ground the cable by any other means 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved er 63230 216 219 B1 189 lectric PE50476 Installation 2 zus 10 input 4 output MES114 module 190 63230 216 219 B1 MES114 Modules 10 Inputs and 4 Outputs Function The four outputs included on the Sepam Series 20 and 40 base units can be extended by adding an optional MES114 module with 10 inputs and 4 outputs available in three versions m MES114 10 inputs voltage from 24 V DC to 250 V DC m MES114E 10 inputs voltage 110 125 V AC or V DC m MES114F 10 inputs voltage 220 250 V AC or V DC Characteristics Weight 0 617 Ib 0 28 kg Operating temperature 13 F to 158 F 25 C to 70 C Environmental Same characteristics as Sepam base units characteristics Voltage 24

- Power Logic

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents